617580
246
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/252
Next page
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠKODA Superb
Owner's Manual

3T0012720AH
Preface
You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
The description of the vehicle operation, important information about safety, vehicle care, mainte-
nance and self-help, as well as technical vehicle data, are given in this manual.
Please read this Owner's Manual carefully, because the operation in accordance with these instruc-
tions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle.
We hope you enjoy driving your ŠKODA, and wish you a pleasant journey at all times.
Your ŠKODA AUTO a.s. (hereinafter referred to only as ŠKODA or manufacturer)

3T0012720AH
Table of Contents
Board literature 4
Notes 5
Structure and more information about the
Operating Instructions 6
Abbreviations
Safety
Passive Safety 8
General information 8
Correct and safe seated position 9
Seat belts 12
Using seat belts 12
Inertia reels and belt tensioners 15
Airbag system 16
Description of the airbag system 16
Airbag overview 17
Deactivating airbags 20
Transporting children safely 22
Child seat 22
Fastening systems 25
Operation
Cockpit 29
Overview
28
Instruments and Indicator Lights
30
Instrument cluster
30
Warning lights
34
Information system
42
Driver information system
42
Multifunction display (MFD)
44
MAXI DOT display 46
Service interval display 48
Unlocking and opening 50
Unlocking and locking 50
Anti-theft alarm system 55
Luggage compartment lid 57
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi) 59
Electrical power windows 61
Electric sliding/tilting roof 64
Panoramic sliding/tilting roof (Superb Estate) 65
Lights and visibility 67
Lights 67
Interior lights 73
Visibility 75
Windscreen wipers and washers 77
Rear mirror 79
Seats and practical features 81
Adjusting the seats 81
Seat features 85
Practical features 88
Luggage compartment 97
Removable light (Superb Combi) 103
Variable loading floor in the luggage
compartment (Estate) 104
Extending variable loading floor with
integrated aluminium rails and fastening
elements (Superb Combi) 105
Net partition (Superb Combi) 107
Roof rack 108
Air conditioning system 110
Heating, ventilation, cooling 110
Air conditioning system (manual air
conditioning system) 112
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning
system) 115
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation) 118
Communication and multimedia 121
General information 121
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II 124
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl 126
Wi-Fi 130
Voice control 131
Multimedia 134
Driving
Starting off and Driving 138
Starting and stopping the engine using the
key 138
Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY 140
Brakes 143
Manual gear changing and pedals 144
Automatic transmission 145
Running in 148
Economical driving and environmental
sustainability 149
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 152
Driving abroad 153
Assist systems 154
Brake assist systems 154
Parking aid 156
Park assist 157
Cruise Control System 161
START STOP 162
Fatigue detection (break recommendation) 165
Tyre pressure monitoring 165
Hitch and trailer 166
Hitch 166
Trailer 170
2
Table of Contents
General Maintenance
Car care 173
Services, modifications and technical
alterations 173
Washing vehicle 176
Taking care of your vehicle exterior 177
Taking care of the interior 181
Inspecting and replenishing 183
Fuel 183
Engine compartment 186
Engine oil 189
Coolant 191
Brake fluid 192
Vehicle battery 193
Wheels 197
Tyres and wheel rims 197
Manufacturer-approved tyre variants 201
Winter operation 203
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
204
Emergency equipment 204
Changing a wheel 205
Puncture set 209
Jump-starting 211
Towing the vehicle 213
Radio remote control 215
Emergency unlocking/locking 216
Emergency operation of the sliding/tilting
roof 217
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 218
Fuses and light bulbs 220
Fuses 220
Replacing bulbs 223
Technical data
Technical data 228
Vehicle data 228
Index
3
Table of Contents
Board literature
You always find these Operating Instructions and the Service Plan in the on-
board literature for your vehicle.
Depending on the equipment, the on-board literature can also contain The ra-
dio instruction manual or Manual of the navigation systemand in some coun-
tries also the brochure On the road.
Owner's Manual
These operating instructions apply to all body variants of the vehicle and all
related model versions as well as all equipment levels.
This owner's manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com-
ponents described in this Owner's Manual.
The scope of equipment on your vehicle depends on your purchase contract
for the vehicle. For questions regarding the scope of equipment, please con-
tact a ŠKODA Partner, if required.
The Pictures in this manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illustrations
can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended to provide
general information.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. pursues a policy of constant product and model develop-
ment. Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time with regard to
design, equipment and technology. The information listed in this operating
manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press.
It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the technical
data, illustrations and information contained in this Owner's Manual.
Service schedule
The service plan includes the documentation of the vehicle handover informa-
tion with regard to warranty and service events.
The radio instruction manual
The instruction manual of the radio contains a description of the operation of
the radio, and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.
Manual of the navigation system
The manual of the navigation system includes a description of the operation of
the navigation system, and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.
Move Brochure
The Move brochure contains phone numbers of importers and service offices in
individual countries, together with emergency numbers.
4
Board literature
Notes
Terms used
The on-board literature contains the following terms relating to the service
work for your vehicle.
- a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for
ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist garage can be a ŠKODA partner, a ŠKODA
service partner or an independent workshop.
- A Workshop that has been contractually authorised
by the manufacturer ŠKODA AUTO a.s. or its sales partner to perform
service tasks on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
- A company that has been authorised by the manufacturer
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. or its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and,
when applicable, to service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell
ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
Explanation of symbols
An overview of the symbols used in the instruction manual and a brief explan-
ation of their meaning.
Reference to the introductory module of a chapter with important infor-
mation and safety warnings.
Continuation of the module on the next page.
Situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible.
® Trademark.
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display .
Text display in the segment display.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.
For the sake of the environment
Texts with this symbol contain information on environmental protection as
well as tips for economical operation.
“Specialist garage”
“ŠKODA service partner”
“ŠKODA partner”
Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
5
Notes
Structure and more information about the Operating
Instructions
Structure of the manual
The operating manual is hierarchically divided into the following areas.
Section (e.g. Safety) - the title of the Section is always indicated at the lower
left side
Main chapters (e.g. Airbag System) - the title of the main chapter is always
indicated at the lower right side
Chapter (e.g. Airbag Overview)
Introduction to the topic - Module Overview within the chapter intro-
ductory information about the chapter content, if necessary, valid for
the entire chapter notes
Module (e.g. Front Airbags)
Information Search
When searching for information in the operating instructions, we recommend
using the Index at the end of the manual.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Units of measurement
The volume, weight, speed and length data are given in metric units, unless
otherwise indicated.
Display
In this owner's manual, the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the dis-
play illustration, provided nothing is otherwise stated.
6
Structure and more information about the Operating Instructions
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Definition
rpm Engine revolutions per minute
ABS Anti lock brake system
AF Multi-purpose vehicles
AHL Adaptive headlights
AG Automatic gearbox
AGM Vehicle battery type
APN An access point name for the Wi-Fi connection
ASR Traction control
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
DPF Diesel particle filter
DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox
DSR active driver steering recommendation
EDL electronic differential lock
ECE Economic Commission for Europe
EPC Controller for the engine electronics
ESC Electronic Stability Control
ET Rim depth
EU European Union
FSI Stratified petrol direct injection
GSM
a digital network of mobile devices for the transmission of
voice and data
HFP
Connection of a mobile device by means of its Bluetooth
®
profile
kW Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output
MG Manual gearbox
MFD Multifunction display
N1
Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta-
tion of goods
Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
PIN personal identification number
Abbreviation Definition
rSAP Remote transmission of the SIM data
SSP Connect two devices using Bluetooth
®
profile
TDI CR
Diesel engine with turbo-charging and common rail injection
system
TSA Trailer stabilisation
TSI Petrol engine with turbo-charging and direct injection
UMTS the next generation of the GSM network (3G)
VIN Vehicle identification number
WLAN
wireless connection of electronic devices for data transfer
(wireless)
7
Abbreviations
Safety
Passive Safety
General information
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Before setting off
8
Driving safety 8
Safety equipment 8
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the sub-
ject of passive safety in your vehicle.
We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with, for ex-
ample, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and safety of children.
WARNING
This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for
the driver and his occupants.
You can find further information on safety concerning you and those trav-
elling with you in the following chapters of this owner's manual.
The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This
applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.
Before setting off
Read and observe on page 8 first.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please
pay attention to the following points before setting off.
Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning proper-
ly.
Ensure that the function of the wiper and the condition of the wiper
blades are free of any defects.
Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed.
Ensure that the mirrors are not covered.
Check the tyre inflation pressure.
Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
Secure all items of luggage.
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
the vehicle.
Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat
belts » page 22, Transporting children safely.
Adopt the correct seated position » page 9, Correct and safe seated
position. Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position.
Driving safety
Read and observe on page 8 first.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving
safety is affected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk.
The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g.
by your passengers or mobile phone calls.
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. due to medication, al-
cohol or drugs.
Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather condi-
tions.
Take regular breaks on long journeys – at least every two hours.
Safety equipment
Read and observe
on page 8 first.
The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle.
Three-point seat belts for all the seats.
Belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats.
Belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats.
Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats.
Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger.
Driver’s knee airbag.
8
Safety
Front side airbags.
Rear side airbags.
Head airbags.
Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system.
Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system.
Head restraints adjustable for height.
Adjustable steering column.
The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect
you and those travelling with you in accident situations.
The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you, if
you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is
not correctly adjusted or used.
If the seat belt is not fastened properly, this may result in injuries if an airbag is
activated in the event of an accident.
Correct and safe seated position
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Correct seated position for the driver
9
Adjusting the steering wheel position 10
Correct seated position for the front passenger 10
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats 11
Examples of incorrect seated positions 11
WARNING
The front seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match the
body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to
provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers.
Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 22, Transporting children safely with a
suitable restraint system.
If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to life-
threatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.
WARNING (Continued)
If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury
is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.
The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of
injury!
Correct seated position for the driver
Fig. 1
Correct driver seating position / properly adjusted headrest
Read and observe on page 9 first.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following instructions must be observed.
Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
For vehicles with driver knee air bag adjust the driver's seat in a forward/
back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the legs
and the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag -
B
» Fig. 1.
Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance
A
between the steering
wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 1. Adjust the steering
wheel » page 10, Adjusting the steering wheel position.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head
C
» Fig. 1.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 81.
9
Passive Safety
WARNING
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt
the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is
moving.
Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a dis-
tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height
of the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that
the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position. Never hold the steering
wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the middle or
inner edge of the steering wheel). In such cases, you could severely injure
your arms, hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed.
Ensure that there are no objects in the driver's footwell, as these may get
caught in the pedal apparatus when driving or braking. You would then no
longer be able to operate the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 2
Adjustable steering wheel: Lever
underneath the steering wheel
Read and observe on page 9 first.
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.
Swivel the lever underneath the steering wheel downwards » Fig. 2.
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position (with regard to the height
and forward/back position).
Push the lever upwards to the stop.
WARNING
The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked while you are
driving so that the position of the steering wheel cannot accidentally
change during the journey – there is the risk of an accident!
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
the vehicle is stationary!
Correct seated position for the front passenger
Read and observe
on page 9 first.
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head
C
» Fig. 1 on page 9.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 81.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactiva-
ted » page 20, Deactivating airbags.
WARNING
Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel. Not maintaining
this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to
properly protect you - hazard!
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
seated position!
10
Safety
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats
Read and observe on page 9 first.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an
accident, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of the head
C
» Fig. 1 on page 9.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12.
Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi-
cle » page 22, Transporting children safely.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 81.
Examples of incorrect seated positions
Read and observe
on page 9 first.
Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if seat belts are fastened cor-
rectly.
Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the
seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing
of the seat belt.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers, especially children.
Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is
moving.
The following list contains instructions which, if not observed, may cause seri-
ous injuries or death. This list is not complete, however we would like you to
familiarise yourself with this subject.
Observe the following instructions while driving.
Do not stand up.
Do not stand on the seats.
Do not kneel on the seats.
Do not tilt the seat backrest too far back.
Do not lean against the dash panel.
Do not lie on the rear seats.
Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
Do not sit facing to the side.
Do not lean out of the window.
Do not put your feet out of the window.
Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
Do not put your feet on the seat cushion.
Do not allow anybody to travel in the footwell.
Do not drive without fastening your seat belt.
Do not delay in the luggage compartment.
11
Passive Safety
Seat belts
Using seat belts
Introduction
Fig. 3
Driver wearing seat belt
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The physical principle of a frontal collision 13
Fastening and unfastening seat belts 14
Belt height adjustment on the front seats 15
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
in the event of a major accident.
Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated
position » Fig. 3.
The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy (energy of motion) to a considerable
extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well re-
sult in severe injuries.
Occupants of a vehicle who have correctly fastened their seat belts have the
major benefit of the fact that the kinetic energy is absorbed as effectively as
possible by the belts.
The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety meas-
ures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to the kinetic energy being re-
duced as effectively as possible. The energy produced is thus absorbed and
there is less risk of injury.
Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the
vehicle » page 22.
WARNING
Fasten your seat belt before each journey - even when driving in town!
This also applies to the passengers seated at the rear – risk of injury!
Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way
of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child » page 14, Fastening
and unfastening seat belts.
Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seat-
ed » page 9.
The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
WARNING
Information on the correct routing of the belt
Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even
in minor accidents.
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder - on no ac-
count across your neck.
A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. specta-
cles, ball-point pens, bunches of keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
WARNING
Information on dealing with the safety belts
The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twis-
ted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
Make sure you do not catch the seat belt when closing the door.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of the safety belts
Never use one seat belt to secure two persons (including children). The
seatbelt must not be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another
passenger.
12
Safety
WARNING (Continued)
The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt
tongue will not lock in place properly.
Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
Do not use clamps or similar items, which prevent the lash lock function
of the safety belt from operating. A seat belt which is hanging too loose
can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy
produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt.
The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably
when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 87.
WARNING
Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts
The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belts may impair
proper operation of the inertia reel » page 183.
The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage
to the seat belts, seat belt connections, inertia reel or the lock is detected,
the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage.
Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident
and were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is best done by a
specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspec-
ted. The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked.
Note
The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts.
The physical principle of a frontal collision
Fig. 4 Driver without a fastened seat belt/rear seat passenger without a
fastened seat belt
Read and observe on page 12 first.
Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is
moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants.
The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at
which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the
occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase, the greater the
amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident.
The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor. Doubling the speed of
the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy four
times.
The idea that it is possible to support your body with your hands in a minor ac-
cident is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces acting on
the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.
Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 - 50 km/h, the forces that your body is
exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a metric tonne (1000 kg).
For example, a person's weight of 80 kg “increases” to 4.8 tonnes (4800 kg) at
50 km/h.
In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt
are thrown forward and strike parts of the interior of the car, such as the
steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen in ways which cannot be control-
led » Fig. 4 -
. In certain circumstances you could even be thrown out of the
vehicle, which could cause life-threatening or even fatal injuries.
13
Seat belts
It is also important that rear passengers fasten their seat belts, as they could
otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the
event of an accident.
A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only
to himself but also for those seated in the front » Fig. 4 -
.
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Fig. 5 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
Fig. 6 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Rout-
ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother
Read and observe on page 12 first.
Fastening
Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat
belt » page 9.
Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis.
Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle belonging to the seat » Fig. 5
until it you hear it click into place.
Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is
easy to get hold of.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must
roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest.
The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis, must not be lie across the
stomach and must always fit snugly » Fig. 6 -
.
Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of
ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child.
The lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis on
expectant mothers to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdo-
men » Fig. 6 -
.
Release
Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary.
Press the red button in the belt buckle » Fig. 5 -
, the lock tongue pops out.
Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing,
the seat belt does not twist.
CAUTION
When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not dam-
age the door trim or other parts of the interior.
14
Safety
Belt height adjustment on the front seats
Fig. 7
Front seat: Seat belt height ad-
juster
Read and observe on page 12 first.
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the
front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size.
Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direc-
tion » Fig. 7.
Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in place.
Inertia reels and belt tensioners
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Inertia reels
15
Belt tensioners
15
Inertia reels
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel.
The belts also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving
downhill and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
immediately by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
The safety for the driver, front passenger and passengers on the outer rear
seats who are wearing their seat belts, is enhanced by the belt tensioners fit-
ted to the inertia reels on the front and rear external seat belts.
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal
collision of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the
seat belts are not fastened.
The seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a collision of a cer-
tain severity.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions, side
and rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in
which no major forces are produced from the front.
WARNING
Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation
of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried
out by a specialist garage.
The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single acci-
dent. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to re-
place the entire system.
Note
Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in-
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system, it is im-
portant to comply with national legal requirements. ŠKODA service partners
are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with de-
tailed information.
15
Seat belts
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
System description 16
Airbag deployment 16
The airbag system provides, as a supplement to the seat belts, additional oc-
cupant protection during severe frontal and side collisions.
WARNING
An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a
fastened seat belt.
The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but instead forms part of
the complete passive vehicle safety concept.
To ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect
when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be correctly adjusted to
match the body size » page 9, Correct and safe seated position.
If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
If there is a fault, the airbag system must be checked by a specialist ga-
rage immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activa-
ted in the event of an accident.
No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork.
It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one ac-
cident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de-
ployed.
System description
Read and observe on page 16 first.
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning light
in the instrument cluster » page 40.
When the airbags are deployed, they fill with gas and inflate.
A grey white or red, non-harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated.
This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following modules.
Electronic control unit.
Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger » page 17.
Driver’s knee airbag » page 18.
Side airbags » page 19.
Head airbags » page 20.
Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster » page 40.
Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 21.
Warning light for the front passenger airbag deactivation/activation in the
middle of the dash panel » page 21.
Note
The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.
If you sell your vehicle, provide the complete vehicle documentation to the
new owner. Please note that the information relating to the possibility of de-
activating the front passenger airbag must be included!
When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important to
comply with the national legal requirements.
Airbag deployment
Read and observe
on page 16 first.
The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high-speed in order to be
able to offer additional protection in the event of an accident.
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
In certain accident situations, the several airbags may be deployed simultane-
ously.
16
Safety
The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions,
rear-end collisions, tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover.
Deployment factors
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. An important role is played by factors
such as the type of object that the vehicle hits (hard/soft), the impact angle,
vehicle speed etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which
occurs. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the
relevant restraint system.
If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision
remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit,
the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe dam-
age to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
Driver’s front airbag.
Front passenger airbag.
Driver’s knee airbag.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision.
Front side airbag on the side of the accident.
Rear side airbag on the side of the accident.
Head airbags on the side of the accident.
When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur.
The interior lighting illuminates (if the switch for the interior light is in the
door contact position).
The hazard warning lights are switched on.
All the doors are unlocked.
The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
Airbag overview
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front airbags
17
Driver’s knee airbag 18
Side airbags 19
Head airbags 20
Front airbags
Fig. 8 Driver airbag in the steering wheel/front passenger airbag in the
dashboard
Fig. 9 Safe distance to steering wheel/gas-filled airbags
In the event of a severe frontal collision, the front airbag system offers addi-
tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger.
The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel » Fig. 8 -
.
The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel
above the glove compartment » Fig. 8 -
.
The airbags inflate in front of the driver and front passenger when they are
deployed » Fig. 9 -
. The forward movement of the driver and of the front
passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag
and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
17
Airbag system
WARNING
Information on correct seated position
For the driver and front passenger, it is important to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard
A
» Fig. 9. Not
maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will
not be able to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head
restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of
the occupant.
The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to
injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct.
There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.
WARNING
Front airbag and transporting children
Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident,
the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 20, Deactivating airbags. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child
on the front passenger seat, pay attention to any relevant national regula-
tions regarding the use of child safety seats.
WARNING
General information
The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash pan-
el on the passenger side must not have stickers attached, be covered or
modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth
that is dry or has been moistened with water. No objects such as cup hold-
ers, mobile phone mounts, etc. must be attached to the covers of the air-
bag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity.
Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module
in the dash panel.
Note
In vehicles with head airbags, the lettering  can be seen on the steering
wheel.
In vehicles with front passenger airbags, the lettering

is located on the
dash panel on the passenger side.
Driver’s knee airbag
Fig. 10 Installation of the airbag / Safe distance from the switching panel
The driver's knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver's legs.
The driver's knee airbag
A
is located in the lower part of the dash panel below
the steering column » Fig. 10.
In the event of a severe frontal collision, the driver's knee airbag and front air-
bags are deployed.
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus
reduced.
18
Safety
WARNING
Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap
of at least 10 cm between the legs
B
and the dash panel in the vicinity of
the knee airbag » Fig. 10. If it is not possible to meet this requirement due
to your body size, visit a specialist garage.
The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel be-
low the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modified
in any other way. This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or
has been moistened with water. No objects must be attached to the cover
of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity.
Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the igni-
tion key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and
can cause injuries.
Note
In vehicles with a driver's knee airbag, a symbol with  is located on the
side panel on the driver's side.
Side airbags
Fig. 11 Location of the side airbag in the driver's seat or gas-filled side air-
bag
In the event of severe side collisions, the side airbag system provides addition-
al protection for the upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of passengers in
the vehicle.
The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of
the front seats » Fig. 11 -
.
The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat
backrest.
The head airbag and belt tensioner on the relevant side are also automatically
deployed when the side airbags » Fig. 11 - are deployed.
The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated
airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pel-
vis) is reduced on the side facing the door.
WARNING
Information on correct seated position
Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This ap-
plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable
child safety seat » page 24, Child safety and side airbag.
There must not be any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No accesso-
ries, such as cup holders, should be attached to the doors.
If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may
be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This
can result in serious injuries » page 22, Child seat.
WARNING
The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the
front doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the
doors or door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further
information » page 175, Airbags.
Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks
etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be
damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen-
ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view
of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of
non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the pro-
tective function of the side airbag.
Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag mod-
ule must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage.
The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage,
cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open
the modules.
19
Airbag system
Note
In vehicles with side airbags at the front a label with the lettering  is lo-
cated on the front seat backrests.
In vehicles with rear side airbags, the word

is located between the en-
trance area and the rear seat rest.
Head airbags
Fig. 12 Location of the head airbag/gas-filled head airbag
In the event of a severe side collision, the head airbag system offers additional
protection for the head and neck area of passengers.
The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior
of the car » Fig. 12 -
.
In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the
relevant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the
accident occurs.
The airbag covers the windows of the front and rear doors, as well as the door
pillar when it is deployed » Fig. 12 -
.
Head impact with interior parts is reduced by the inflated head airbag. The re-
duction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any move-
ments of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area.
The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset im-
pact by covering the front door pillar.
WARNING
There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head air-
bags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.
Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never
leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing. Additionally, clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items
of clothing.
The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head
airbags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in
the event of it being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated,
parts of the fitted accessories could be thrown into the interior of the car
and injure the occupants.
The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the
deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens,
etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if
the head airbag is deployed.
There must not be any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. In ad-
dition, none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window
when driving, or extend their arms and hands out of the window.
Note
In vehicles with head airbags, the lettering  can be seen on the B-column
cladding.
Deactivating airbags
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Deactivating airbags
21
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 21
20
Safety
Deactivating airbags
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones below.
If using a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat (due to different
legal regulations, the airbag must be deactivated if using a forwards-facing
child seat in some countries) » page 22, Transporting children safely.
If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the mid-
dle of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly
adjusted.
If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because
of a physical disability.
If different seats have been fitted (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side air-
bags).
The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated
switch » page 21, Deactivating the front passenger airbag.
We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
airbags.
Monitoring the airbag system
The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically,
even if one of the airbags is switched off.
Airbag deactivated using diagnostic equipment
The warning light
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds after switching on the
ignition and then flashes again for approx. 12 seconds.
Front passenger airbag deactivated using the key switch in the storage com-
partment
The warning light
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds after switching on the
ignition.
The

3
» Fig. 13 on page 21 warning light illuminates when the igni-
tion is switched on.
Note
The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed.
A ŠKODA service partner will be able to inform you which, if any, of your vehi-
cle's airbags can or must be deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
Fig. 13 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning
light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation
Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch.
Switching off
Switch off the ignition.
Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position
2
» Fig. 13 OFF.
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
Close the storage box on the front passenger's side.
Check that warning light

3




in the text illuminates after
the ignition is switched on.
Switching on
Switch off the ignition.
Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position
1
» Fig. 13 ON.
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
Close the storage box on the front passenger's side.
Check that warning light

3




illuminates after the ignition
is switched on.
21
Airbag system
WARNING
The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off.
Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
If the warning light

is flashing, the front passenger airbag will not be
deployed in an accident. Have the airbag system checked by a specialist ga-
rage immediately.
The key cannot be inserted in the key switch while driving.
Shocks can cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag!
The airbag could be triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result
in injury or death!
CAUTION
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
Transporting children safely
Child seat
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 23
Use of the child seat in the front passenger seat 24
Child safety and side airbag 24
Classification of child seats 25
Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 25
Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger
seat.
In contrast to adults, the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet
fully developed. Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory pro-
visions.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard must be used. The ECE-R
standard stands for: Economic Commission for Europe - Regulation.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: a capital E in a circle and the certification num-
ber below
WARNING
The national legal requirements must be observed when using child
seats.
One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Certain outside climatic
conditions can cause life-threatening temperatures in the vehicle.
The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Other-
wise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants.
22
Safety
WARNING (Continued)
Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi-
nor accidents.
Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat. Further information » page 23,
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat.
CAUTION
When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the head
restraints so that they are as high as possible.
If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even in
the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 83. After remov-
ing the child seat, reinstall the head restraints.
Note
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
Does not apply to Taiwan
Fig. 14
Sticker on the B-column on the
front passenger side.
Fig. 15 Front passenger sun visor / label
Read and observe
and on page 22 first.
Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is protec-
ted by an active airbag installed in front of it. This could cause serious injury
to the child, even death.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you install child seats on the rear
seats whenever possible.
The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the
front passenger seat.
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing child
seat » .
If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical,
so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat.
23
Transporting children safely
If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con-
tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3, make sure that the loop-around fit-
tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B-pillar on the passenger
side.
Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac-
cording to the specifications in the manufacturer's user manual of the child
seat .
WARNING
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 20, Deactivating airbags.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy-
ment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child se-
vere, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
This fact is also indicated by the sticker that can be found in one of the
following locations.
On the B-column on the front passenger side » Fig. 14. The sticker is
visible upon opening the front passenger door.
On the front passenger's sun visor. In some countries, the sticker is lo-
cated on the front passenger's sun visor » Fig. 15.
With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3, make sure that the loop-around
fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at
the same height as the loop-around fittings on the B-pillar on the passen-
ger side.
As soon as the rear-facing child seat is no longer being used on the pas-
senger seat, the front passenger airbag should be reactivated again.
Use of the child seat in the front passenger seat
Applies to Taiwan
Fig. 16 Front passenger sun visor / label
Read and observe
and on page 22 first.
No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat.
This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found on the passenger's
sun visor » Fig. 16.
Child safety and side airbag
Fig. 17
Incorrect seated position of a
child who is not properly secured
– risk from the side airbag/Child
properly protected by safety seat
Read and observe
and on page 22 first.
The child must not be positioned in the area into which the side airbag will de-
ploy » Fig. 17 -
.
There must be sufficient room between the child and the area into which the
side airbag will deploy to allow the airbag to provide as much protection as
possible » Fig. 17 -
.
24
Safety
WARNING
Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of
the side airbag – risk of injury!
Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags –
risk of injury!
Classification of child seats
Read and observe and on page 22 first.
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Group Weight of the child Approximate age
0 up to 10 kg up to 9 months
0+ up to 13 kg up to 18 months
1 9 - 18 kg up to 4 years
2 15 - 25 kg up to 7 years
3 22 - 36 kg over 7 years
Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt
Read and observe
and on page 22 first.
Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of
the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
external
Rear seat
Center
0
up to 10 kg
U U U
0+
up to 13 kg
U U U
1
9 - 18 kg
U U U
2
15 - 25 kg
U U U
3
22 - 36 kg
U U U
Child seat category “Universal” - a child seat designed to be attached to
the seat using the seat belt.
Fastening systems
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Attachment points of the

-system 25
Use of child seats with the

-system 26
Attachment points of the


-system 27
Attachment points of the

-system
Fig. 18
ISOFIX system label

represents a system for a fast and secure child seat mounting.
There are two locking eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of
the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the

system child
seat in place.
On the rear outside seats, the fixing eyes are located below the upholstery.
The places are marked with labels with the

logo » Fig. 18.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the -system.
Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the

-system – risk
of death!
U
25
Transporting children safely
Note
A child seat fitted with the -system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
ted with an -system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
Child seats with the

-system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
cessories.
Use of child seats with the -system
Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with the -system on
each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Size class
of the child seat
a)
Front passenger seat
b)
Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
0
up to 10 kg
E X IL-SU X
0+
up to 13 kg
E
X IL-SU XD
C
1
9 - 18 kg
D
X
IL-SU
IUF
X
C
B
B1
A
2
15 - 25 kg
X IL-SU X
3
22 - 36 kg
X IL-SU X
a)
The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
b)
If the front passenger seat is fitted with the

system attachment points, it is suited for the installation of an

child seat with the “Semi-Universal” approval.
The seat is suited for installation of a -child seat with the “Semi-
Universal” approval. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child
seat with the

-system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the list
of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
The seat is suitable for the installation of a

-child seat with the ap-
proval “Universal” and attachment with the


-system belt.
The seat is not fitted with

-system attachment points.
IL-SU
IUF
X
26
Safety
Attachment points of the  -system
Fig. 19
Anchor eyelets on the TOP
TETHER system


represents a fastening system, which restricts movements of the up-
per part of the child seat.
The anchor eyelets for attaching the belt for a child seat with the


-sys-
tem are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests » Fig. 19.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the  -system.
Only use child seats with the


-system on the seats with the lock-
ing eyes.
Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other
anchorage points.
27
Transporting children safely
Fig. 20 Cockpit
28
Operation
Operation
Cockpit
Overview
Electrical power windows 61
Door opening lever 52
Central locking button 55
Air outlet vent 110
Parking ticket holder
Operating lever:
Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight
flasher 69
Speed regulating system 161
Steering wheel:
with horn
with driver’s front airbag 17
with pushbuttons for radio, navigation system phone and in-
formation system 122, 134
Instrument cluster: Instruments, warning lights and display 30
Operating lever:
Information system 42
Windscreen wiper and wash system 77
Air outlets in the central part of the dash panel 110
Regulator for left seat heating 85
Button for hazard warning light system
72
Regulator for right seat heating 85
Depending on equipment fitted:
Radio
Navigation system
Storage compartment on the front passenger side 94
Front passenger airbag 17
Air outlet vent 110
Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment) 21
Door opening lever 52
Electric exterior mirror adjustment 80
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Light switch 68
Bonnet release lever 187
Regulator for the instrument lighting and regulator for the head-
light beam range adjustment 68, 68
Storage compartment on the driver's side 89
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel 10
Driver’s knee airbag 18
Ignition lock 139
Pedals 145
Handbrake 144
Bars with buttons depending on the equipment fitted:
START STOP 162
Tyre pressure loss indicator 165
Traction control ASR 155
Electronic Stability Control ESC 154
Park Assist 157
Parking aid 156
Tailgate operation (Superb Combi) 59
Depending on equipment fitted:
Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) 144
Selector lever (automatic gearbox) 145
Depending on equipment fitted:
Ashtrays 91
Stowage compartment 90
Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag 21
Depending on equipment fitted:
Operating controls for the air conditioning system 112
Operating controls for Climatronic
115
Note
The arrangement of the controls right-hand drive models may differ from the
layout shown in » Fig. 20. The symbols on the controls and switches are the
same as for left-hand drive models.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
29
Cockpit
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Instrument cluster
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Overview 30
Revolution counter 31
Speedometer 31
Coolant temperature gauge 31
Display 31
Fuel gauge 32
Counter for distance driven 32
32
Display of the second speed 33
Display in rear centre console 33
Auto Check Control 33
Fault display
The Error message will appear in the display if there is a fault in the instru-
ment cluster. Ensure that the fault is rectified as soon as possible by a special-
ist workshop.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety.
Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving - risk of
accident. Operate the controls only when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Overview
Fig. 21 Instrument cluster
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Engine revolutions counter » page 31
with warning lights » page 34
Speedometer » page 31
with warning lights » page 34
Button for display mode:
Time settings » page 32
Enable/disable the display of the second speed
1)
» page 33
Service intervals - Display of the number of days and kilometres remain-
ing until the next service
1)
» page 48
Coolant temperature gauge » page 31
Display » page 31
Fuel gauge » page 32
Button for:
Reset trip meter » page 32
Setting the time » page 32
Enable/disable the mode selected by means of button
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1)
Applies for vehicles with a segment display.
30
Operation
Revolution counter
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The red scale of the revolution counter
1
» Fig. 21 on page 30 indicates the
range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed. The system auto-
matically restricts the engine speed to a steady limit.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached or select mode D on the automatic gearbox.
Follow the recommended gear to prevent engine speeds that are too high or
too low » page 43.
Speedometer
Read and observe
on page 30 first.
Warning against speeding
An audible warning will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km/h
1)
. The
audible warning is switched off once the vehicle speed falls below 120 km/h.
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 22
Coolant temperature gauge
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The coolant temperature gauge » Fig. 22 only operates when the ignitions is
switched on.
Cold range
The pointer in the left of the scale indicates that the engine has not yet
reached its operating temperature. Avoid high speeds, full throttle and high
engine loads. This prevents possible damage to the engine.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer
moves into the middle of the scale. At very high ambient temperatures or un-
der heavy engine loads, the pointer may move even further to the right.
High temperature range
The coolant temperature is too high if the pointer reaches the red area of the
scale. Further information » page 36.
CAUTION
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Display
Fig. 23
Display types
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The following information will be displayed.
Distance travelled » page 32
Time » page 32
Details of the information system » page 42
Details of the service interval display » page 48
1)
This function is only valid for some countries.
31
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Display types » Fig. 23.
Segment display
MAXI DOT display
CAUTION
Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display (e.g. when clean-
ing) to prevent any possible damage. On vehicles with the KESSY system,
switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.
Fuel gauge
Fig. 24
Fuel gauge
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The fuel gauge » Fig. 24 only operates if the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres. If the amount of fuel reaches
the reserve area (the pointer reaches the red scale range), the indicator symbol
is illuminated
» page 39.
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en-
gine and the exhaust system.
Note
After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves,
braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates ap-
prox. a fraction less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the fuel
gauge displays the correct fuel level again. This is not a fault.
Counter for distance driven
Fig. 25
Segment display / MAXI DOT dis-
play
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Display » Fig. 25
Trip odometer
Odometer
Daily trip counter (trip)
The counter indicates the distance you have driven since it was last reset - in
steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.
Reset trip meter
Press and hold button
7
» Fig. 21 on page 30.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance which the vehicle has been driven.
Note
If the second speed display is enabled on vehicles with a segment display, this
speed will be shown instead of the odometer.
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Use buttons
3
and
7
to set the time » Fig. 21 on page 30.
The choice to change the display (hours or minutes).
The change of the displayed value.
In vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display, it is also possible to set the
Time in the Time menu » page 47.
A
B
3
7
32
Operation
Display of the second speed
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The display can show the current speed in mph
1)
.
This feature is provided for driving in countries with different units for speed.
MAXI DOT display
The display of the second speed can be set in the Alt. speed dis. menu
item » page 47, Settings.
Segment display
Press the
3
» Fig. 21 on page 30key repeatedly, until the odometer display
flashes » page 32.
Press the
7
key while the display is flashing.
The second speed is displayed instead of the odometer.
Display of the second speed can be disabled in the same way.
Display in rear centre console
Fig. 26
Centre console at rear: Display
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The time and the outside temperature are displayed on the display in the rear
centre console when the ignition is switched on » Fig. 26.
The values are taken over by the instrument cluster.
Auto Check Control
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Vehicle condition
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
continuously when the ignition is switched on.
Some error messages and other information are displayed in the MAXI DOT
display. The messages are displayed simultaneously with the icons in the MAXI
DOT display or with the warning lights in the instrument cluster » page 34,
Warning lights.
The Vehicle status menu item is shown in the main menu of the MAXI DOT
display whenever at least one fault message is present. The first of the fault
messages is displayed after this menu item is selected. Several error messages
are shown on the display under the message e.g. 1/3. This indicates that the
first of a total of three error messages is being displayed.
Warning symbols in the MAXI DOT display
Engine oil pressure too low » page 36
Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are
too hot
» page 33
Check engine oil level,
engine oil sensor defective
» page 37
Thickness of brake pads » page 41
Problem with engine oil pressure » page 33
Problem with the engine oil pressure
If the
symbol is shown in the MAXI DOT display, you must have your vehicle
checked immediately by a specialist garage. The information about the maxi-
mum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol.
Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot
If the
symbol appears in the MAXI DOT display, this indicates that the tem-
perature of the automatic DSG gearbox clutches is too high.
1)
On models on which the speedometer indicates mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.
33
Instruments and Indicator Lights
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Owner's manual!
do not continue to drive! Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and wait
until the
icon goes out – risk of gearbox damage! You can continue your
journey as soon as the icon disappears.
WARNING
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard
warning light system » page 72. The warning triangle must be set up at
the prescribed distance - observe the national legal provisions when doing
so.
Note
If the MAXI DOT display shows warning messages, these messages must be
confirmed in order to access the main menu » page 42 .
As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always in-
dicated again. After they are displayed for the first time, the symbols continue
to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver.
Warning lights
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Handbrake 35
Brake system 35
Seat belt warning light 35
Generator 35
Door open 36
Engine oil pressure 36
Coolant 36
Bonnet 36
Boot lid 36
Power steering / steering lock (system KESSY) 36
Engine oil level 37
Traction Control System (ASR) 37
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 37
Anti lock brake system (ABS) 38
Rear fog light 38
Lamp failure 38
Adaptive headlights (AHL) 38
Exhaust inspection system 38
Glow plug system (diesel engine) 38

Engine performance check (petrol engine)
39
Diesel particulate filter (diesel engine) 39
Fuel reserve 39
Airbag system 40
Tyre inflation pressure 40
Windscreen washer fluid level 40
Brake linings 41
Turn signal system 41
Low beam 41
Fog lights 41
Cruise control system 41
Selector lever lock / starter (system KESSY) 41
Main beam 41
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the display of the instrument cluster.
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-
tion test.
If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go out a few
seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine.
34
Operation
WARNING
Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions
in the instrument cluster display may lead to serious personal injury or
damage to the vehicle.
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard
warning light system » page 72. The warning triangle must be set up at
the prescribed distance - observe the national legal provisions when doing
so.
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 186, Engine compartment.
Handbrake
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates if the handbrake is applied.
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h for at least
3 seconds while the handbrake is applied.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Release parking brake!
Brake system
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates if the brake fluid level in the braking system is
too low or there is a fault in the ABS.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Brake fluid: Owner's manual!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the brake flu-
id » page 193 » .
WARNING
If the warning light together with the warning light » page 38,
Anti lock brake system (ABS) illuminates, do not continue to drive! Seek
help from a specialist garage.
A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
cle's braking distance – there is a risk of accident.
The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet
and checking the brake fluid level » page 186, Engine compartment.
Seat belt warning light
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
is illuminated as a reminder for the driver and front pas-
senger to fasten their seat belts.
The warning light
goes out, after the respective seat belt has been fas-
tened.
If the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle
speed is more than 20 km/h, the warning light
flashes and you will hear an
acoustic warning signal.
The warning signal is switched off and the warning light
remains perma-
nently illuminated if the driver and front passenger have not fastened their
seat belts within the next 90 seconds.
Generator
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
If the warning light
is illuminated, when the engine is running, the vehicle
battery is not being charged.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. The electrical system re-
quires checking.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the warning light (coolant system fault) illumi-
nates in addition to the warning light while you are driving. Stop the engine
- there is a risk of engine damage. Seek help from a specialist garage.
35
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Door open
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates if one or several doors are opened.
Engine oil pressure
Read and observe on page 35 first.
When the warning light is flashing
, the engine oil pressure is too low.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Oil pressure: Engine off. Owner's manual!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil lev-
el » page 190.
If the warning light
flashes do not drive any further, even if the oil level is
correct! Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Coolant
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
illuminates or flashes, either the coolant temperature is
too high or the coolant level is too low.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Check coolant! Owner's manual!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and check the coolant lev-
el » page 192.
If the coolant level is too low, top up coolant » page 192.
If the warning light
does not illuminate, after adding coolant and switching
on the ignition, you may continue your journey.
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light
is still
illuminated, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan.
Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary » page 222, Fuses in
the engine compartment.
If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light is never-
theless still illuminated, do not continue your journey!
Seek help from a specialist garage.
WARNING
Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot, the cool-
ing system is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is therefore best to allow the
engine to cool down before removing the cap.
Do not touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may switch itself on auto-
matically even if the ignition is off - a danger of injury is present!
CAUTION
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Bonnet
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates if the bonnet is unlocked.
Boot lid
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates if the boot lid is opened.
Power steering / steering lock (system KESSY)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
Power steering
If the warning light
is illuminated, this indicates a partial failure of the Pow-
er Steering and the steering forces can be greater.
If the warning light
is illuminated, this indicates a complete failure of the
power steering and the steering assist has failed (significantly higher steering
forces).
Stop the car, turn the ignition off and on again.
The powered steering is fully functional again if the
or
warning light does
not illuminate after you switch the engine back on.
36
Operation
If the warning light or illuminates again, then immediately obtain help
from an authorised dealer.
Steering lock (KESSY system)
A long as the warning light
flashes, the steering lock cannot be released.
If the warning light
flashes, a signal tone sounds, and the following mes-
sage appears in the MAXI DOT- display Steering column lock. Workshop! ap-
pears the electrical steering lock is faulty. Seek assistance from a specialist ga-
rage immediately.
If the warning light
flashes , a beep will sound and a message Steering lock:
defective appears in theMAXI DOT display, this indicates that the electric
steering lock is broken. Park the vehicle,
do not continue your journey!. Af-
ter switching off the ignition, it is then no longer possible to lock the steering,
to activate the electrical components (e.g. radio, navigation system), to switch
on the ignition again and to start the engine. Seek help from a specialist ga-
rage.
Note
The warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi-
cle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected. If the warning light
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Engine oil level
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates (oil quantity too low)
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Check oil level!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil lev-
el » page 190.
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec-
onds. If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on
again after driving about 100 km.
The warning light
flashes (engine oil level sensor faulty)
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Oil sensor: Workshop!
If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, the warning light flashes several
times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Traction Control System (ASR)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
flashes, the ASR is currently operating.
If the warning light
illuminates, there is a fault in the ASR.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Fault: Traction control (ASR)
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
If the warning light
illuminates immediately after you start the engine, the
ASR might be switched off due to technical reasons.
Switch the ignition off and on again.
If the warning light
does not illuminate any more after the engine is switch-
ed on again, then the ASR is fully functional again.
Further information » page 155.
Note
The warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi-
cle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected. If the warning light
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
flashes, to show that the ESC is currently operating.
If the warning light
illuminates, there is a fault in the ESC.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Fault: Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
37
Instruments and Indicator Lights
If the warning light illuminates immediately after you start the engine, the
ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons.
Switch the ignition off and on again.
If the warning light
does not illuminate again after the engine is switched
on again, the ESC is fully functional again.
Further information » page 154.
Note
The warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi-
cle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected. If the warning light
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Anti lock brake system (ABS)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
is illuminated, there is a fault in the ABS.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Fault: ABS
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
If the warning light together with the warning light » page 35,
Brake system illuminates, do not continue to drive! Seek help from a
specialist garage.
A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
cle's braking distance – there is a risk of accident.
Rear fog light
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when the rear fog light is switched on.
Lamp failure
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates if a lamp is faulty.
The warning light
illuminates within a few seconds after switching on the
ignition or when a light with a faulty lamp is switched on.
The following message may be shown in the MAXI DOT display, for example.
INFORMATION Check front right low beam!
Adaptive headlights (AHL)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
flashes for 1 minute while driving or after switching on
the ignition, there is a problem with the adaptive headlights.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
No bend lighting (AHL) function. Owner's manual!
When the AHL mode “tourist light” (travel mode) is active » page 71, the
warning light
flashes for 10 seconds each time the ignition is switched on.
Exhaust inspection system
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
is illuminated, there is a fault in the exhaust inspection
system. The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Glow plug system (diesel engine)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates after the ignition has been turned on. Once
the light has gone out, the engine can be started immediately.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light
does not come
on at all or illuminates continuously.
If the warning light
begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine
control. The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
38
Operation
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.

Engine performance check (petrol engine)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light

illuminates, there is a fault in the engine control. The
system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Diesel particulate filter (diesel engine)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The
soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a
regular basis.
If the warning light
illuminates, rust has accumulated in the filter.
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for
at least 15 minutes or until the warning light
goes out.
4th or 5th is selected (automatic transmission: position S).
Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.
Engine speed between 1,800 - 2,500 rpm.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light
goes out.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light does
not go out and
the warning light
begins to flash.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Diesel particulate filter: Owner's manual!
The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode. After switching the
ignition off and on again the warning light,
also illuminates.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a
fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the
vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact
with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled
fuel or such like.
Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic condi-
tions. The recommendations indicated by the warning light must not tempt
you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic.
CAUTION
As long as the warning light illuminates, one must take into account an
increased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of
the engine.
Using diesel fuel with increased sulphur content can significantly reduce the
service life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA Partner will be able to tell you
which countries use diesel fuel with increased sulphur content.
Note
We recommend avoiding regularly driving short distances to assist the com-
bustion process of the soot particles in the filter.
If the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly after-
wards, the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes.
Fuel reserve
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates, if the fuel level is less than approx. 10.5 litres.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Please refuel. Range: ... km
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en-
gine and the exhaust system.
Note
The text in the display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short dis-
tance.
39
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Airbag system
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
illuminates, there is a fault in the airbag system.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Fault: Airbag
The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically,
even if one of the airbags is switched off.
If a front, side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using
the vehicle system tester:
The warning light
illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the igni-
tion is switched on and then flashes again for approximately 12 seconds.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated.
If the front passenger's front airbag was switched off using the key-operat-
ed switch on the side of the dash panel on the passenger side:
The warning light
illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the igni-
tion is switched on;
The deactivated air bag is indicated by the illumination of the warning light




in the middle of the dash panel » page 21.
WARNING
When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not
being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be
checked immediately by a specialized company.
Tyre inflation pressure
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
is illuminated
If while driving, the warning light
illuminates, a tyre pressure change has oc-
curred.
An audible signal sounds as a warning signal.
Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-
vres.
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressure » page 198.
Correct the tyre pressure, if necessary or replace the wheel » page 205 or
use the repair kit » page 209.
Store the tyre pressure values in the system » page 166.
The warning light
flashes for about 1 min. and remains lit
If the warning light
flashes for approximately 1 minute and stays on, there
may be a fault in the tyre pressure monitoring system.
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again.
If the warning light
flashes again after the engine has started, there is a
system error.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The following reasons can explain the warning light
being illuminated.
The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute loads as evenly as possible.
The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).
Snow chains are mounted.
A wheel has been changed.
Store the tyre pressure values in the system » page 166.
CAUTION
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light in the instrument cluster can be delayed or does
not light up at all.
Note
The warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi-
cle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected. If the warning light does
not go out after moving a short distance, this means that there is an error in
the system. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Windscreen washer fluid level
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low, the warning light
illumi-
nates.
40
Operation
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Top up wash fluid!
Top up with liquid » page 188, Windscreen washer system.
Brake linings
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
is illuminated, the brake pads are worn.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Check brake wear!
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Turn signal system
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
Either the left
or the right
warning light flashes depending on the position
of the turn signal lever.
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice
its normal rate.
Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of
the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
Low beam
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when low beam is selected.
Fog lights
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when the fog lamps are operating.
Cruise control system
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when the cruise control is active.
Selector lever lock / starter (system KESSY)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
illuminates, operate the brake pedal. This is necessary
to move the selector lever from position P and N » page 146or to start the en-
gine in vehicles with the KESSY system » page 142.
Main beam
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when the main beam or the headlight flasher
is being operated.
41
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Information system
Driver information system
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Using the information system 42
Display a low temperature 43
Gear recommendation 43
Door, boot or engine compartment warning 44
The information system provides the driver with alerts and messages about in-
dividual vehicle systems.
This information and advice is shown in the instrument cluster display or indi-
cated by the illumination of the corresponding warning light in the instrument
cluster.
The information system provides the following information and instructions
(depending on vehicle equipment).
Data relating to the multi function display (MFD) » page 44.
Data relating to the MAXI DOT display » page 46.
Service interval display » page 48.
Auto Check Control » page 33.
Selector lever positions for an automatic transmission » page 145.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully re-
sponsible for the operation of your vehicle.
Using the information system
Fig. 27 Buttons / wheel: on the operating lever / on the multifunction
steering wheel
Read and observe
on page 42 first.
Some functions of the information system can be operated using the buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 27.
Description of the operation
Button/
wheel
Action Function
A
Briefly push up or down Select data / set data values
Press and hold button
Display main menu of the
MAXI DOT display » page 46
B
Press briefly View information / confirm specification
C
Press briefly
To return up one level in the menu of
the
MAXI DOT display » page 46
Press button for a long
period of time
Display main menu of the
MAXI DOT display » page 46
D
Turn upwards or down-
wards
Select data / set data values
Press briefly View information / confirm specification
42
Operation
Display a low temperature
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Display in the MAXI DOT display
If the outside temperature while driving drops to below +4°C, the following
icon appears on the display in front of the temperature display
. An audible
signal is emitted.
If the outside temperature is already below +4°C when turning the ignition on,
the
icon appears immediately.
Prompt in the segment display
If the outside temperature while driving drops to below +4°C, the temperature
display will show up with the following icon before this occurs
. An audible
signal is emitted.
If the outside temperature is already below +4°C when turning the ignition on,
the temperature display and the
icon appear immediately.
After pressing button
A
» Fig. 27 on page 42, the most recently displayed data
is shown.
WARNING
Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, there may still be black ice on the
road surface. You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tempera-
ture display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road.
Gear recommendation
Fig. 28
Information on the selected
gear / gear recommendation
Read and observe on page 42 first.
The function of the gear recommendation is to help reduce fuel consumption.
A suitable gear is engaged, if necessary, a recommendation to shift to high or
lower gear is displayed.
Display » Fig. 28
Optimal gear engaged
Recommended gear
Recommended gear
The gear recommendation is intended only for vehicles with a manual trans-
mission or for vehicles with an automatic transmission in manual shift mode
(Tiptronic).
The recommended
1)
gear and the arrow icon
2)
is displayed.
- Recommends that you shift to a higher gear
- Recommends that you shift to a lower gear
If for example
is shown in the display with vehicles that have manual gear-
boxes this indicates that it is better to shift from a lower gear to the 4th gear.
If for example
is shown in the display with vehicles that have automatic
gearboxes and are in the manual switching mode (Tiptronic), this indicates
that it is better to shift from the 4th gear to a higher gear.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations, such as overtaking.
For the sake of the environment
A suitably selected gear has the following advantages.
It helps to reduce fuel consumption.
It reduces engine noise.
It protects the environment.
It benefits the life and reliability of the engine.
1)
With vehicles that have an automatic gearbox and in the manual switching mode (Tiptronic) the current-
ly engaged gear is shown.
2)
For vehicles with segment display the arrow is displayed behind the gear indication.
43
Information system
Door, boot or engine compartment warning
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Vehicles with a MAXI DOT display
If at least one door, the boot or bonnet is open, the display indicates the rele-
vant open door, boot or bonnet vehicle icon.
Vehicles with a segment display
If at least one door or the boot or bonnet is open, the warning lights
or
and
come on in the instrument cluster » page 34, Warning lights.
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a
door is open.
Multifunction display (MFD)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Memory
44
Information overview
45
Warning at excessive speeds
46
The driving data is displayed on the multifunction display.
The multifunction display only operates when the ignition is switched on. After
the ignition is switched on, the function that was last selected before switch-
ing off the ignition is displayed.
For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, the menu item MFD must be selected
and confirmed in the main menu » page 46, MAXI DOT display.
On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, there is an option to fade out some of
the information » page 47, Settings.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, there may still be black ice on the
road surface. You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tempera-
ture display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road.
Note
In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of
measures.
If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is
not indicated in km/h on the display.
The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.
Memory
Fig. 29
Multi function display - memory display
Read and observe on page 44 first.
In memory the values of elements of the multifunction display(e.g. average
fuel consumption) are recorded.
The multifunction display is equipped with two memories, 1 and 2.
Display of the selected memory in the display at position
A
» Fig. 29
Single-trip memory
Total-trip memory
Select memory
Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display » page 45.
Confirm the element again to switch between the individual memories.
Resetting
Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display » page 45.
Select the desired memory.
Press and hold button
B
or adjustment wheel
D
» Fig. 27 on page 42.
Single-trip memory (memory 1)
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the
ignition is switched on until it is switched off.
44
Operation
New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if
the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition.
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
erased.
Total-trip memory (memory 2)
The total-trip memory gathers data from any number of individual journeys up
to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 1 999 kilometres driven (
), and a total
of 99 hours and 59 minutes or 9 999 kilometres driven (
).
The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calcula-
tion starts all over again.
Unlike the single-trip memory, the total-trip memory is not deleted after a pe-
riod of interruption of driving of 2 hours.
The following values of the selected memory are set to zero.
Average fuel consumption.
Distance driven.
Average speed.
Driving time.
Note
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.
Information overview
Read and observe on page 44 first.
Outside temperature
The current outside temperature is displayed.
This information is always shown on vehicles with a MAXI DOT display.
Driving time
The time travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.
If you want to measure the time travelled from a particular moment in time,
reset the memory to zero at that point in time » page 44, Memory.
The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes ()
and 99 hours and 59 minutes (). The indicator is set back to zero when this
period is exceeded.
Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption level is displayed in litres/100 km
1)
. You can use
this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consumption.
The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low
speed
2)
.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is displayed
in litres/100 km
1)
.
Set the memory to zero at the start of a new measurement if you wish to de-
termine the average fuel consumption over a certain period » page 44, Memo-
ry. After erasing the memory, no value is displayed until you have driven ap-
prox. 300 m.
The display is updated regularly while you are driving.
Range
The range indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on
the level of fuel in the tank and with the same style of driving as before.
The display is shown in steps of 10 km. The value is displayed in steps of 5 km
after the
has come on.
The fuel consumption over the preceding 50 km is used to calculate the infor-
mation. The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner.
If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), a fuel consump-
tion of 10 l./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is updated
according to the style of driving.
Distance travelled
The distance travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.
Reset the memory to zero if you want to measure the distance travelled from
a particular moment » page 44, Memory.
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km. (
) and
9 999 km (
). The indicator is set back to zero when this period is exceeded.
1)
On some models in certain countries, the display appears in kilometres/litre.
2)
On some models in certain countries, – -.- km/ltr. is displayed when the vehicle is stationary.
45
Information system
Average speed
The average speed since the memory was last erased is displayed in km/hour .
Set the memory to zero at the start of measurement to determine the average
speed over a certain period » page 44, Memory.
After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m driven.
The display is updated regularly while you are driving.
Current driving speed
The current speed displayed is identical to the display on the speedometer
2
» Fig. 21 on page 30.
Oil temperature
1)
If the engine oil temperature is in the range of 80-110 °C, the engine operating
temperature has been reached.
If the oil temperature is lower than 80 °C or above 110 °C, avoid high engine
revs, full throttle and high engine loads.
If the oil temperature is lower than 50 °C or if a fault in the system for check-
ing the oil temperature is present,
.
symbols are displayed instead of the oil
temperature.
Warning against speeding
Set the speed limit, e.g. for the maximum permissible speed in
towns » page 46, Warning at excessive speeds.
Warning at excessive speeds
Read and observe on page 44 first.
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
Select the menu item Speed warning (
) or
(
).
Activate the speed limit option by confirming this menu item
2)
.
Set the desired speed limit, e.g. 50 km/h.
Store the speed limit by confirming the set value, or wait several seconds.
Your settings will be saved automatically.
The speed limit can be adjusted from 30 km/h to 250 km/h in 5 km/h incre-
ments.
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
Select the menu item Speed warning ( ) or ( ).
Drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h.
Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
If you wish to adjust the set speed limit, you can do so in 5 km/h intervals (e.g.
the accepted speed of 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h or decreases to 45 km/h).
+Store the speed limit, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
automatically.
Change or disable speed limit
Select the menu item Speed warning (
) or
(
).
By confirming the stored value, the speed limit is disabled.
By reconfirming, the option to change the speed limit is activated.
If the set speed limit is exceeded, an audible signal will sound as a warning.
The Speed warning (MAXI DOT display) or
(segment display) menu item ap-
pears in the display with the limit set.
The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and
on.
MAXI DOT display
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Main menu
47
Settings 47
Compass point display 48
The MAXI DOT display provides you with information about the current operat-
ing state of your vehicle. Depending on the vehicle equipment, it also provides
you with data relating to the radio, multifunction display (MFD), mobile phone,
navigation system, automatic gearbox and devices connected via the MDI in-
put. Furthermore, it allows the adjustment of some other features of your ve-
hicle.
1)
Applies for vehicles using the MAXI DOT display.
2)
An initial value of 30 km/h is displayed automatically if no value has been specified.
46
Operation
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully re-
sponsible for the operation of your vehicle.
Main menu
Read and observe on page 47 first.
Press and hold button
A
or
C
» Fig. 27 on page 42 to activate the MAIN
MENU. By briefly pressing the
C
button you will reach one level higher.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
MFD (Multifunction display) » page 44
Audio » Operating instructions for the radio
Navigation » Operating instructions for the navigation system
Phone » page 121;
Aux. heating » page 118
Assist systems » page 165
Vehicle status » page 33
Settings » page 47
The Audio and Navigation menu items are only displayed when the factory fit-
ted radio or navigation system is switched on.
Note
If warning messages are displayed, these messages must be verified to ac-
cess the main menu » page 42, Using the information system.
If the display is not activated at that moment, the menu always shifts to one
of the higher levels after approx. 10 seconds.
Using the factory fitted radio or navigation system » Radio operating instruc-
tions or» Navigation system operating instructions.
Settings
Read and observe
on page 47 first.
You can change certain settings yourself through the MAXI DOT display. The
current menu item is shown in the top of the display under a line.
The following information can be selected (depending on the equipment in-
stalled in the vehicle).
Language
You can set the language for the display texts here.
Automatic blind (Combi)
This is where the automatic roll up function of the boot roll cover can be deac-
tivated/activated when opening the boot lid.
MFD data
Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here.
Convenience
The following functions can be activated, deactivated or adjusted here.
Rain closing
Activate/deactivate the function for automatically
closing the window and the tilt/slide sunroof in a
locked vehicle when it starts raining
a)
. If the function
is activated and it is not raining, the windows includ-
ing the panoramic tilt/slide sunroof will close auto-
matically after approx. 12 hours.
ATA confirm
Switch on/off the audible signal indicating activation
of the anti-theft alarm system. Further informa-
tion » page 55.
Central locking
Switch on/off the central locking and automatic lock-
ing function, also applies to the KESSY system. Fur-
ther information » page 54, Individual settings.
Window op.
Only convenience mode for the driver window or for
all of the windows can be adjusted here. Further in-
formation » page 63, Window convenience opera-
tion.
Mirror down
Activate/deactivate the function for mirror lowering
on the front passenger side when in the reverse
gear
b)
. Further information » page 80, Fold in pas-
senger's mirror.
Mirror adjust.
Activation / deactivation of the synchronous exterior
mirror function settings. Further informa-
tion » page 80, Synchronous adjustment of the mir-
ror.
Factory setting Restore the Convenience factory setting.
a)
This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor.
b)
This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat.
47
Information system
Lights and visibility
The following functions can be activated, deactivated or adjusted here.
Coming Home
Activate/deactivate and adjust the light duration of
the COMING HOME function. Further informa-
tion » page 72.
Leaving Home
Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the
LEAVING HOME function. Further informa-
tion » page 72.
Footwell light
Activate/deactivate and adjust the footwell light in-
tensity.
Dayl. dri. light
Activate/deactivate “DAY LIGHT” function. Further in-
formation » page 69, Daylight running lights (DAY
LIGHT).
Rear wiper
Activate/deactivate the function of the automatic
rear window wiping. Further information » page 78,
Automatic rear window wiper (Superb Combi).
Lane ch. flash
Activate/deactivate the lane ch. flash function. Fur-
ther information » page 70.
Travel mode
Activate/deactivate the travel mode feature. Further
information » page 71, Tourist lights (Travel mode).
Factory setting Restore the factory setting for the lighting.
Time
The time, time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the changeover between
summer/winter times can be set here.
Winter tyres
Here, the speed and the switching on and off of the acoustic signals when ex-
ceeding this speed can be adjusted. This function is, for example, used for win-
ter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum
speed of the vehicle » page 197.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the information display.
Winter tyres max. speed ... km/h.
Units of measurement
The units for the temperature, consumption and distance driven can be set
here.
Assist systems
The tones of the audible signals for the parking aid can be adjusted here.
Alt. speed dis.
Display of the second speed in mph
1)
can be activated here.
Further information » page 33, Display of the second speed.
Service
The days and kilometres remaining until the next service can be displayed
here.
Further information » page 48, Service interval display.
Factory setting
The display functions can be restored to their factory settings here.
Compass point display
Read and observe on page 47 first.
For vehicles with a factory fitted navigation system, an abbreviation for each
point of the compass (depending on the current direction of travel) is shown
on the top left-hand corner of the display.
The compass point display only operates when the ignition is switched on.
Service interval display
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Display in the MAXI DOT display 49
Prompt in the segment display
49
Resetting the service interval display
50
The service interval display shows the time and mileage to the next service
event.
1)
On models on which the speedometer indicates mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.
48
Operation
The service due date is automatically displayed on the display and this infor-
mation can be displayed manually if necessary.
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or
days until the service due date is reached.
The information regarding the service intervals can be found in the service
schedule.
Note
Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle
battery is disconnected.
Display in the MAXI DOT display
Oil change service
If an oil change service is due, the following message appears: Oil change in ...
km or ... days.
As soon as the service interval date has been reached, the message Oil
change now! appears once the ignition has been switched on.
Inspection
If an inspection is due, the following message appears: Inspection in ... km
or ... days.
As soon as the service interval date has been reached, the message Inspec-
tion now! appears once the ignition has been switched on.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
You can view the remaining distance and days until the next service appoint-
ment at any time when the ignition is switched on by going to the Service
menu item » page 47, Settings or from the Vehicle status in the main menu of
the MAXI DOTdisplay. » page 47, Main menu .
The following message is displayed for 10 seconds.
Oil change ... km / ... days
Inspection ... km / ... days
Prompt in the segment display
Fig. 30
Segment display: Example of a
message
Explanation of graphic » Fig. 30
Service due
Differentiating between types of service
Days remaining until the next service interval
Kilometres remaining until the next service interval
1)
Differentiating between types of service
The service type is determined by the number in position
A
» Fig. 30.
Oil change service
Inspection
Service due
If a service becomes due, then the following information is displayed for about
10 seconds » Fig. 30.
The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position
A
.
The symbol
and the number of days remaining until the next service inter-
val are displayed in position
B
.
The symbol
and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service
interval are displayed in position
C
.
As soon as the due date for the service has been reached, the flashing icon
and the message OIL CHNG or INSPEC_ appear in the display for about 20 sec-
onds after the ignition has been switched on.
Display the days and distance until the next service
You can press button
3
» Fig. 21 on page 30 repeatedly to display the remain-
ing distance and time to until the next service whenever the ignition is switch-
ed on.
A
B
C
1)
The kilometres remaining until the next service are displayed instead of the odometer.
49
Information system
Information on the oil change service is displayed at first, followed by informa-
tion on the inspection when button
3
is pressed again.
The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position
A
.
The symbol
and the number of days remaining until the next service inter-
val are displayed in position
B
.
The symbol
and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service
interval are displayed in position
C
.
Resetting the service interval display
We recommend that the display reset is completed by a specialist garage.
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
correctly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehi-
cle.
Variable service interval
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv-
ice display, the values of a new service interval are displayed, which are based
on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle.
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating
conditions of the vehicle.
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking and locking
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle key 51
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key 52
Opening/closing a door 52
Unlocking / locking - KESSY 53
Information messages KESSY 53
Safe securing 54
Individual settings 54
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside 55
Child safety lock 55
Your car is equipped with a central locking system.
The central locking system allows you to lock and unlock all doors, the fuel fill-
er flap and luggage compartment lid at the same time based on the current
setting
1)
.
The safe securing system » page 54 is integrated in the central locking sys-
tem. Once the car is locked from the outside, the door locks
2)
are automatically
blocked by the safe securing system » .
The following is true after unlocking
1)
The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
The interior light, which is switched by the door contact, illuminates.
The safe securing system is switched off
2)
.
The warning icon in the driver door stops flashing.
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
The following is true after locking
1)
The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked.
The interior light switched by the door contact goes off.
The safe securing system is switched on
2)
.
1)
Depending on the individual setting » page 54.
2)
This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some countries.
50
Operation
The warning light in the driver door begins flashing.
The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Displaying an error
If the warning icon in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec-
onds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing
again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
WARNING
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents!
When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. The children might,
for example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The ve-
hicle could then start to move – risk of injury and accidents! These individu-
als might also not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help
themselves. Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures!
If the car is locked from the outside and the safe lock system is switched
on, no one must be in the car, as it is then not possible to open either a
door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult
for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life.
Note
When leaving the vehicle, always check if it is locked.
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked
doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to
the vehicle.
Upon failure of the central locking system the key can only be used to unlock
and lock the driver's door. The other doors and the boot lid can be emergency
opened or emergency released.
Emergency locking of the door » page 216.
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid » page 217.
Vehicle key
Fig. 31
Remote control key
Read and observe on page 51 first.
Two remote control keys are provided with the vehicle» Fig. 31.
The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control
key. The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle.
The wireless key has a flip out key bit.
The spare key must by initialised by a specialist garage after repair or replace-
ment of the receiver unit. Only then can the remote control key be used again.
CAUTION
Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust,
etc.) have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ig-
nition lock.
The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system
does react to the remote control at less than approx. 3 metres
away » page 215.
When leaving the vehicle, always check if it is locked.
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
Note
Please contact a specialist garage if you lose a key as they can obtain a new
one for you.
51
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
Fig. 32
Remote control key
Read and observe on page 51 first.
Function and description of the remote control key » Fig. 32
Unlocking the vehicle
Locking the vehicle
Unlocking the boot lid
Button for the fold out / fold in of the key
Warning light
Unlocking
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been un-
locked.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safe lock system
1)
or anti-theft alarm system will be switched on. This function is intended to
prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
The seat and mirror are adjusted after the vehicle is unlocked » page 84.
Locking
The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been
locked.
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the
turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
The current position of the seat and mirror after the vehicle is
locked » page 84.
A
B
Checking the battery condition
If the red warning light
B
» Fig. 32 does not flash when you press a button on
the remote control key the battery is dead. Replace the battery » page 215.
CAUTION
Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and
the vehicle is in your line of sight.
If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote con-
trol key.
Operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal inter-
ference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same fre-
quency range.
Note
For vehicles with anti-theft alarm the acoustic signals can also be activated/
deactivated by locking/unlocking » page 47.
Opening/closing a door
Fig. 33 Door handle/door opening lever
Read and observe on page 51 first.
Opening from the outside
Unlock the vehicle.
Pull on door handle
A
» Fig. 33 on the door you wish to open.
Opening from the inside
Pull on door handle
B
of the door and push the door away from you.
1)
This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some countries.
52
Operation
Closing from the inside
Grasp pull handle
C
and close the door.
WARNING
Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly
while the vehicle is being driven – there is a risk of death.
Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing
sweep – there is a risk of injury.
An opened door can close spontaneously if there is a strong wind or the
vehicle is on a slope – there is a risk of injury.
Never drive with the doors open - there is a risk of death!
Unlocking / locking - KESSY
Fig. 34
Sensors in the handle of the
front door
Read and observe on page 51 first.
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key.
Sensors in the handle of the front door » Fig. 34
Unlocking sensor
Locking sensor
Unlocking
Grab the door handle of the front door or cover the sensor
A
» Fig. 34 »
with the whole palm of your hand.
Locking
Touch the sensor
B
» Fig. 34 with your fingers.
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved
into the position P before unlocking.
A
B
Unlocking the boot lid
Press the button in the handle of the boot lid » page 57.
If the vehicle is locked via the sensor
B
, it is not possible to unlock it again in
the following 2 seconds via the sensor
A
- prevents accidental unlocking.
CAUTION
Do not use objects which might prevent direct contact between the hand
and the grip sensor.
Some types of gloves can impair the function of the grip sensor.
After leaving the car there is no automatic locking.
The vehicle cannot be locked if the ignition has not been turned off.
Information messages KESSY
Read and observe
on page 51 first.
Key in the vehicle
The protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle unlocks the
vehicle automatically if the following condition is met.
The vehicle, including the boot lit, has been locked.
The turn signal lights flash four times as confirmation that the vehicle has
been unlocked again.
The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Key in vehicle.
KEY IN VEHICLE
An audible signal sounds additionally on vehicles which are fitted with the an-
ti-theft alarm system, .
System fault
If there is a fault in the system, the following message will appear in the dis-
play of the instrument cluster.
Keyless access system faulty.
CHECK KEYLESS
Low voltage of the key battery
If the voltage of the battery in the remote control key is too low, the following
message appears in the display of the instrument cluster.
Change the key battery!
KEY BATTERY
53
Unlocking and opening
Change the key battery » page 215!
Safe securing
Read and observe on page 51 first.
The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the out-
side. The vehicle cannot now be opened from the inside.
This fact is pointed out by the following message on the display of the instru-
ment cluster after switching off the ignition.
Check SAFELOCK! Owner's manual!
CHECK DEADLOCK
Switching off
The safe lock can be switched off in one of the following ways.
By locking twice within 2 seconds.
By disabling the interior monitoring » page 56, Interior monitor and towing
protection.
If the vehicle is locked and the SafeLock system is switched off, the door can
be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever.
Switching on
The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and
unlocked.
Switch on display
The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards
it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals.
Switch off display
The warning light in the driver door flashes fast for about 2 seconds, goes out
and starts to flash regularly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
WARNING
If the car is locked and the SafeLock system activated, no one may remain
in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or open a
window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescu-
ers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
Note
This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some
countries.
Individual settings
Read and observe on page 51 first.
The following central locking functions can be set via the MAXI DOT dis-
play » page 47, Settings.
Opening a single door
This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver's door. The other
doors and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened
again.
Unlocking a vehicle side door
This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side. The other
doors and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened
again.
Automatic locking/unlocking
All doors are locked from a speed of around 15 km/h. The button in the handle
of the boot lid is deactivated.
If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again.
In addition, it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by
pressing the central locking button
.
Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle.
The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened at any time by pulling once on
the door opening lever.
54
Operation
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside
Fig. 35
Central locking button
Read and observe on page 51 first.
If the vehicle was not locked from the outside, it can also be unlocked and
locked with the rocker switch on the door opening lever of the driver or front
passenger door » Fig. 35 even without the ignition switched on. While a door is
opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
Locking
Press the button
/ » Fig. 35 press.
The symbol
in the button illuminates.
Unlocking
Press the button
/ » Fig. 35 press.
The symbol
in the button goes out.
The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking
button.
It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety
feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).
The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
opening lever of the respective door.
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked
doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access
to the vehicle.
WARNING
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
If the safe lock system is switched on » page 54, the door opening lever
and the central locking buttons do not operate.
Child safety lock
Fig. 36
Child safety lock: Left rear door
Read and observe on page 51 first.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in-
side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.
Switching on
Turn the slot of the safety lock in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 36 (the
other way around on the right-hand door).
Switching off
Turn the slot of the safety lock in the opposite direction to the ar-
row » Fig. 36 (the other way around on the right-hand door).
Anti-theft alarm system
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Activating/deactivating
56
Interior monitor and towing protection
56
The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people
trying to break into the vehicle.
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to only as alarm).
Triggering the alarm
The alarm is triggered when the following unauthorized actions are carried out
on the locked vehicle.
55
Unlocking and opening
Opening the bonnet.
Opening the boot lid.
Opening the doors.
Manipulation of the ignition lock.
Towing the vehicle » page 56.
Movement in the vehicle » page 56.
Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system.
Uncoupling the trailer » page 170, Attaching and detaching trailers.
If the driver's door of a vehicle with a remote control is unlocked and opened
by the lock cylinder, then the alarm is triggered.
Switching off the alarm
The alarm is turned off by pressing the
button on the radio remote control
key or switching on the ignition.
CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, it must be checked that all of the windows, doors
and the sliding/tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of
the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years.
Activating/deactivating
Read and observe
on page 56 first.
Activating
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 sec-
onds after the vehicle is locked.
If the vehicle is unlocked and a door or the boot lid not opened within the next
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the SafeLock system
or anti-theft alarm system will be switched back on. This function is intended
to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
Deactivating
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated automatically after the vehicle is
unlocked. If the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds, the anti-theft alarm
system is automatically activated again.
The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the
key within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle.
Note
If the car is unlocked with the key in the driver door, insert the key into the
ignition and switch the ignition to deactivate the alarm system.
You can switch the audible signalling of the activation of the warning system
on and off in the MAXI DOT display in the menu item ATA confirm » page 47.
Interior monitor and towing protection
Fig. 37
Button for interior monitor and
towing protection
Read and observe on page 56 first.
The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the
alarm.
The tow-away protection triggers the alarm if a vehicle is registered as being
on an inclination.
Activating
The interior monitor and the towing protection are activated automatically af-
ter the vehicle is locked.
Deactivating
Switch off the ignition.
Open the driver door.
Press the symbol button
» Fig. 37 on the B-column on the driver's side.
The symbol lighting in the button changes
from red to orange.
Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibili-
ty of the alarm being triggered by movements (e.g. by children or animals)
within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train
or ship) or towed.
56
Operation
CAUTION
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the
interior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi-
cle.
The anti-theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked, even if
the SafeLock system is deactivated. The interior monitor is however not acti-
vated.
Luggage compartment lid
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Twindoor - open/close small boot lid
57
TwinDoor - open / close large boot
58
Open / close (Superb Combi)
58
Delayed locking of the boot lid
58
WARNING
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-
wise, the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the
lid was locked – risk of accident!
Never drive with the luggage compartment lid open or ajar, as otherwise
exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, as otherwise
this could crack – there is a risk of injury.
Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
CAUTION
If the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed, the lid is immediately
locked automatically when closed » page 58.
Note
The function of the button in the grip above the licence plate is deactivated
when starting off or at a speed of 5 km/hour or more for vehicles with central
locking. The function is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is
opened.
Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure
of the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twin-
door system.
Twindoor - open/close small boot lid
Fig. 38 Handle of boot lid/opened small boot lid
Read and observe and on page 57 first.
After unlocking the vehicle, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the
handle above the number plate.
Opening
Press the button in the handle at the lower edge of the boot lid
1
» Fig. 38
and lift the boot lid.
Closing
Pull down and strike the lid with the handle
2
» Fig. 38.
The small boot lid can also be opened by pressing the symbol
button on the
remote control key » page 52.
57
Unlocking and opening
TwinDoor - open / close large boot
Fig. 39 Handle of boot lid / opened large boot lid
Read and observe
and on page 57 first.
After unlocking the vehicle, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the
handle above the number plate.
Opening
Press the button in the handle at the lower edge of the boot lid
1
» Fig. 39.
Wait until the brake light
2
in the rear window flashes twice and then lift
the lid.
Closing
Pull down and strike the lid with the handle
3
» Fig. 39.
Open / close (Superb Combi)
Fig. 40 Boot lid handle/opening the boot lid
Fig. 41
Handle in the inner panelling of
the boot lid
Read and observe and on page 57 first.
After unlocking the vehicle, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the
handle above the number plate.
Opening
Press the handle
A
» Fig. 40 and raise the lid in the direction of the arrow
B
.
Closing
Pull the lid down with the handle
C
» Fig. 41 and close with a slight swing.
Delayed locking of the boot lid
Read and observe and on page 57 first.
If the boot lid is unlocked with the symbol button
on the remote control
key, then the door is automatically locked after closing.
The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
a specialist garage.
After activation of delayed locking, the boot lid can be opened again after clos-
ing within a limited period.
Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time.
CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically. We therefore recommend locking the vehicle with the symbol
button
on the remote control key.
58
Operation
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating description
59
Acoustic signals 61
Adjusting/deleting the top lid position 61
Malfunctions 61
Force limiter
The electric luggage compartment lid (hereinafter referred to only as a lid) is
equipped with a force limiter. If the lid hits an obstacle when closing, it stops
and an audible signal sounds.
If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the
boot lid, the whole vehicle may jerk and as a result the movement of the lid
can be interrupted.
Manual operation
Manually opening and closing the lid is only possible in exceptional cases. It
must be completed slowly and without sudden movements as close to the
centre of the lid as possible » .
WARNING
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – risk of accident!
Never drive with the lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust gases
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
CAUTION
The movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an abrupt and quick
force against the lid.
Do not attempt to close the door manually during electrical closing process -
there is a risk of damaging the system of an electric valve operation.
If the lid is closed manually, it must be ensured that when moving the lid into
the lock, pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the ŠKODA
logo. Handling the sides of the lid can damage the electric lid.
CAUTION
Before opening or closing the lid, check if there are any objects in the open-
ing or closing range which could obstruct the movement (e.g. a load on the
roof rack or on the trailer, etc.) – risk of causing damage to the lid!
Ensure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened lid (e.g. dis-
tance from the garage ceiling). Otherwise, it may happen that the clearance
above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a load
(e.g. after unloading) – risk of causing damage to the lid.
In certain circumstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g. by a thick layer of snow), the
opening process of the lid can be interrupted. Remove the load on the lid to re-
enable the electrical operation.
If the lid closes automatically (e.g. under load of snow), you will hear an inter-
mittent beep.
The flap is always to be close before disconnecting the battery.
Operating description
Fig. 42 Operation of the lid
59
Unlocking and opening
Fig. 43
Button for the flap operation / operation areas
Read and observe and on page 59 first.
Control elements
The lid can be operated with the following control elements.
With the symbol button
on the remote control key (press for about 1 s).
With the button in the handle
A
on the outer part of the lid » Fig. 42.
With the button
B
on the inner part of the lid » Fig. 42.
With the button
C
in the centre console » Fig. 43.
Operating areas
The system distinguishes 3 operating areas where the function of the individu-
al operating elements changes » Fig. 43. The end positions of the lid - fully
closed in the secured lock and fully opened - differ as well.
The range of the area
3
changes depending on the setting of the top position
of the lid » page 61.
If the lid is set in the uppermost position in the area
2
, the area
3
is not ac-
tive. The range of the area
2
changes depending on the setting of the top po-
sition of the lid.
Symbol explanation in the operating description
Feasible action
Non-feasible action
Movement in the opposite direction to the previous movement
Lid operation with the handle
A
Action
Closed
Lid
Range » Fig. 43
Open
Lid
1 2 3
Opening
Stop
Closing
The operation of the lid using the handle
A
is only possible when the vehicle
is unlocked.
Lid operation with the button
B
Action
Closed
Lid
Range
Open
Lid
1 2 3
Opening
Stop
Closing
Operating the lid with the button
B
is only possible when the lid is open.
Lid operation with the symbol button
on the remote control key and the
button
C
Action
Closed
Lid
Range
Open
Lid
1 2 3
Opening
Stop
Closing
When the ignition is switched on, the operation of the lid does not function us-
ing the remote control key.
Operating the lid with the button
C
does not work if the vehicle was locked
from the outside.
Operating the lid with the symbol button
on the remote control key and the
button
C
does not work when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle.
60
Operation
Acoustic signals
Read and observe and on page 59 first.
The acoustic signals serve as a safety function and provide information about
the success of a performed action.
Signals Meaning
Interrupted tone
Open (using the button on the remote control key
or the button
C
» Fig. 43 on page 60 )
Automatic closing of the lid » page 59, in section In-
troduction
1 continuous tone Force limiter
3 rising tones Confirmation of the storage of the lid position
3 identical tones fault
Adjusting/deleting the top lid position
Read and observe
and on page 59 first.
Adjusting
Stop the lid in the desired position (electrically or manually).
Press and hold the button
B
» Fig. 42 on page 59 for longer than 3 seconds.
Storing the new position is confirmed with an audible signal.
Delete
Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position.
Press and hold the button
B
» Fig. 42 on page 59 for longer than 3 seconds.
An audible signal sounds and the height which was originally set is deleted
from the memory, while the basic position of the top lid position is again set.
The top lid position is adjusted, for example, in the following situations.
When the space for opening the lid is limited (e.g. garage height).
For a more convenient operation, such as by a person's height.
The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always
lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is
opened manually.
The lid always opens to the height which was last stored.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 59 first.
If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the lid is open, it is nec-
essary to activate the system of the electric boot lid.
Activation means closing the lid by hand. Thus, the end position of the lid is
stored under fully closed in secured lock.
Examples of operational malfunctions
Description of the malfunc-
tion
Possible solutions
The lid cannot be lifted out
of the lock
Emergency unlocking of the lid » page 217
The lid does not react to an
opening signal
Removing a possible obstacle (e.g. snow), re-
opening the lid » page 59
Press handle
A
and pull the lid upwards
The lid remains in the top
position
Manual closing of the lid
Electrical power windows
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening/closing the window from the driver seat
62
Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors
63
Force limit
63
Window convenience operation
63
Operational faults
64
61
Unlocking and opening
WARNING
Ensure that no persons are still left in the vehicle when locking the vehi-
cle. In an emergency, the windows will no longer be able to be opened from
the inside.
The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 63. If there is an obsta-
cle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several
centimetres. The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully – risk of
injury.
Deactivating the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors is
recommended (safety push button)
S
when children are being transported
in the rear seats » Fig. 44 on page 62.
CAUTION
Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric
windows.
In the event that the windows are frozen, first of all eliminate the
ice » page 179, Windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the elec-
trical power windows. Otherwise, the window sealing and the electrical power
window mechanism could be damaged.
In the winter, ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause
there to be more resistance when closing the window. The window will stop
and move back several centimetres.
It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the win-
dow » page 63.
Always make sure that the windows are closed when you leave the locked
vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
At high speeds, you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily
high fuel consumption.
Note
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the win-
dows for approx. 10 minutes. After the driver's or front passenger's door has
been opened, the windows can only be operated by using button
A
» Fig. 44
on page 62.
When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventila-
tion system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are
opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the
wind noise is more at certain speeds.
The window lift system is equipped with protection against overheating. Re-
peated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to over-
heat. If this happens, it will not be possible to operate the window for a short
time. You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating
protection has cooled down.
Opening/closing the window from the driver seat
Fig. 44
Buttons on the driver's door
Read and observe and on page 62 first.
Power window buttons » Fig. 44
Button for electrical power window of the driver's door
Button for electrical power window of the front passenger door
Button for electrical power window of the rear right door
Button for electrical power window of the rear left door
Safety pushbutton
Opening
Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes the window to
stop immediately.
A
B
C
D
S
62
Operation
The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the
button as far as the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window
to stop immediately.
Closing
Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the
window has moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes
the window to stop immediately.
The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to
the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immedi-
ately.
Safety pushbutton
The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by press-
ing the safety switch
S
» Fig. 44. The buttons for the electrical power win-
dows at the rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety push button
S
again.
If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the warning light
in the
safety switch
S
illuminates.
Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear
doors
Fig. 45
Button in the rear door
Read and observe and on page 62 first.
There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that
window.
Opening
Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes the window to
stop immediately.
The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the
button as far as the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window
to stop immediately.
Closing
Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the
window has moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes
the window to stop immediately.
The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to
the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immedi-
ately.
Force limit
Read and observe and on page 62 first.
The electrical power window system is fitted with a force limiter. It reduces
the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec-
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be-
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.
The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again
within the next 10 seconds - the window will now close with full force!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
Window convenience operation
Read and observe
and on page 62 first.
The convenience operation of the windows offers the possibility of opening or
closing all the windows at once.
Convenience operation can take place in one of the following ways.
63
Unlocking and opening
Opening
Press and hold the symbol button on the remote control key.
Hold the key in the driver's lock in the unlock position.
Press and hold the upper part of the central locking button in the driver's
door » page 55.
Hold button
A
» Fig. 44 on page 62 in the opening position.
Closing
Press and hold the symbol button
on the remote control key.
Hold the key in the driver's lock in the lock position.
Press and hold the lower part of the central locking button » page 55 in the
driver's door.
Hold button
A
» Fig. 44 on page 62 in the closing position.
In the KESSY system, hold a finger on the sensor
B
» Fig. 34 on page 53.
The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the
menu item Window op. . » page 47.
The prerequisite for ensuring that the convenience operating feature correctly
is the automatic opening/closing of all windows is operational.
Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver's lock
is only possible within 45 seconds after locking the vehicle.
The movement of the window is stopped immediately when the key or the re-
spective button is released.
Operational faults
Read and observe and on page 62 first.
The automatic power windows do not work if the vehicle battery has been dis-
connected and connected again while a window was open. The system must
be activated.
Activation sequence:
Switch on the ignition.
Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
Release the button.
Drag and drop the button upwards again and hold for about 1 s.
Electric sliding/tilting roof
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation
64
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof 65
Electric sliding/tilting roof with solar cells 65
The electric sliding/tilting roof (abbreviated in the following as 'sliding/tilting
roof') can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the out-
door temperature is higher than -20 °C.
The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
switching the ignition off. However, as soon as the driver or front passenger's
door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
CAUTION
Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the
sliding/tilting roof does not operate correctly. In this case, turn the rotary
switch to the switch position
A
» Fig. 46 on page 64 and push forward for
about 10 seconds.
Operation
Fig. 46
Control dial for the sliding/tilting
roof
Read and observe on page 64 first.
Comfort position
Turn the switch to position
C
» Fig. 46.
When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the
wind noise is reduced.
64
Operation
Open partially
Simply turn the knob to a point between
A
and
C.
Open fully
Turn the switch to position
B
and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned
position).
Tilting roof
Turn the switch to position
D
.
Closing
Turn the switch to position
A
.
Sun screen
The sun screen is also opened automatically when the tilt/slide sunroof slides
open. When the tilt/slide sunroof is closed the sun screen can be manually op-
erated » .
Force limiter
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If an obstacle (e.g. ice) pre-
vents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens completely. The sliding/
tilting roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by pushing the
switch in position
A
» Fig. 46 forwards until the sliding/tilting roof is com-
pletely closed.
WARNING
When operating the tilt/slide sunroof and the sunshade, proceed with cau-
tion to avoid causing crushing injuries – risk of injury!
CAUTION
During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicin-
ity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the
opening mechanism.
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof
Read and observe on page 64 first.
The sliding/tilting roof can be operated by locking/unlocking using the key or
using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor
B
» Fig. 34 on page 53.
Press and hold the symbol button
on the remote control key.
In the KESSY system, hold a finger on the sensor
B
» Fig. 34 on page 53.
By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor
B
when using the
KESSY system, the closing process is immediately interrupted.
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully – risk of injury. The force limiter does
not operate with the convenience closing.
Electric sliding/tilting roof with solar cells
Read and observe
on page 64 first.
If there is sufficient bright sunlight, the solar cells in the sliding/tilting roof de-
liver the electrical power for the fresh air blower. Further informa-
tion » page 115, Climatronic (automatic air conditioning system).
The operation of the sliding/tilting roof with solar cells is the same as of a nor-
mal sliding/tilting roof.
Panoramic sliding/tilting roof (Superb Estate)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation
66
Opening/closing the sun screen
66
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof
67
The panoramic sliding/tilting roof (abbreviated in the following as 'sliding/tilt-
ing roof') can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the
outdoor temperature is higher than -20 °C.
The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
switching the ignition off. However, as soon as the driver or front passenger's
door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
CAUTION
Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
If, for example, the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is pos-
sible that the sliding/tilting roof does not operate correctly. Next, move the ro-
tary switch into position
A
» Fig. 47 on page 66 , pull the recess firmly
65
Unlocking and opening
downwards and hold forwards firmly. The sliding/tilting roof opens and closes
again after around 10 seconds. Do not release the control dial until it has done
so.
If, for example, the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is pos-
sible that the sun screen does not operate correctly. Then turn the switch to
position
A
» Fig. 47 on page 66and press and hold the button
G
» Fig. 48 on
page 66. The sun screen opens and closes again after around 10 seconds. Do
not release the control dial until it has done so.
Operation
Fig. 47
Control dial for the sliding/tilting
roof
Read and observe on page 65 first.
Comfort position
Turn the switch to position
C
» Fig. 47.
When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the
wind noise is reduced.
Open partially
Turn the switch to a position in area
D
.
Open fully
Turn the switch to position
B
and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned
position).
Tilting roof
Turn the switch to position
A
.
Press the switch in the region
E
towards the roof.
Closing
Turn the switch to position
A
.
Press the switch on the recess
E
down and pull forwards.
Force limiter
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. The sliding/tilting roof
stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because
there is something in the way (e.g. ice). The sliding/tilting roof can be fully
closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess
E
down
and then pushing it forward until the sliding/tilting roof is fully closed » .
WARNING
When operating the sliding/tilting roof, proceed with caution to avoid caus-
ing crushing injuries – risk of injury!
CAUTION
During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicin-
ity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the
opening mechanism.
Opening/closing the sun screen
Fig. 48
Buttons for sun screen
Read and observe on page 65 first.
The sun screen can be closed or opened using the buttons » Fig. 48.
Opening
Briefly press the button
F
» Fig. 48 to open fully.
Press and hold the button
F
to open to the desired position.
The opening process stops when one releases the button.
Closing
Briefly press the button
G
» Fig. 48 to close fully.
Press and hold the button
G
to close in the desired position.
The closing process stops when one releases the button.
66
Operation
WARNING
When operating the sunshade, proceed with caution to avoid causing
crushing injuries – risk of injury!
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof
Read and observe on page 65 first.
The sliding / tilting roof can be operated by locking or unlocking using the key
or using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor
A
or
B
» Fig. 34 on
page 53.
Closing
Press
and hold the symbol button on the key or hold the key in the locking
cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position, or for the KESSY system,
keep your finger on the sensor
B
» Fig. 34 on page 53 » .
By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor
B
when using the
KESSY system, the closing process is immediately interrupted.
Tilting roof
Press and hold the symbol button
on the remote control key.
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully – risk of injury. The force limiter does
not operate with the convenience closing.
Lights and visibility
Lights
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating the lights and the instrument illumination 68
Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT) 69
Turn signal and main beam 69
Automatic driving lamp control 70
Adaptive headlights (AHL) 70
Fog lights 71
Fog lights with the CORNER function 71
Rear fog light 71
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 72
Hazard warning light system 72
Parking lights 73
Unless otherwise stated, the lights only work when the ignition is on.
The arrangement of the controls right-hand drive models may differ from the
layout shown in » Fig. 49 on page 68. The symbols which mark the positions
of the controls are identical.
Keep the headlights lenses clean. The following guidelines must be ob-
served » page 179, Headlight lenses.
WARNING
The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with
national legal requirements.
The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the
lights.
67
Lights and visibility
WARNING (Continued)
The automatic driving lamp control  only operates as a support and
does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the lights and, if
necessary, to switch on the light depending on the prevailing light condi-
tions. The light sensor cannot, for example, detect rain or snow. Under
these conditions we recommend switching on the low beam or fog lights!
Never drive with only the side lights on! The side lights are not bright
enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by oth-
er oncoming traffic. Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is
dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the driving lights are switched
on, the light outlet areas are free from condensation after a short time, al-
though the headlight lenses may still be misted up around the edge. This mist
has no influence on the life of the lighting system.
Operating the lights and the instrument illumination
Fig. 49
Light switches, knobs for head-
light beam adjustment and
brightness of instrument illumi-
nation
Read and observe on page 67 first.
Switching lights on and off
Depending on the equipment configuration, the light switch
A
» Fig. 49 can be
moved to the following positions.
Turn switch
Switching off lights (except daytime running lights)
Automatic switching lights on and off » page 70
Switching on the parking light or parking lights » page 73
Switch on low beam

Pull switch
Switch on the front fog lamp » page 71
Switching on the rear fog light » page 71
Headlight range control
Turning the dial
B
» Fig. 49 from the position
to
gradually adjusts the
headlight range control and thereby shortens the light cone.
The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the fol-
lowing car load.
Front seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot loaded
Driver seat occupied, boot loaded
We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Turning the rotary switch
C
» Fig. 49 when the lights are switched on adjusts
the brightness of the instrument lighting » Fig. 49.
The instruments are also illuminated when the parking light, low or high beam
light is switched on.
Bi-Xenon headlights
The Bi-Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the
vehicle when the ignition is switched on and when driving. Vehicles that are
equipped with Bi-Xenon headlights do not have a manual headlight range ad-
justment control.
WARNING
Always adjust the headlight beam to satisfy the following conditions.
The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi-
cles.
The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
Note
The light switch is in position or  and the ignition is turned off, the low
beam is switched off automatically and the status light is lit. The parking light
goes out after the ignition key is removed.
If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam illuminates automatically.
68
Operation
Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT)
Read and observe on page 67 first.
The daytime running lights (hereafter only function) provide lighting for the
front of the vehicle.
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
The light switch is in the position
or

» Fig. 49 on page 68.
The ignition is switched on.
The parking aid is activated.
Deactivating the function
Switch off the ignition.
Pull the turn signal- and main beam lever (» Fig. 50 on page 69) towards
the steering wheel, push down and hold in this position.
Switch on the ignition.
Hold the lever in this position for at least 3 seconds after switching on the
ignition.
Activating the function
Switch off the ignition.
Pull the turning signal and main beam lever towards the steering wheel,
push it up and hold it in this position.
Switch on the ignition.
Hold the lever in this position for at least 3 seconds after switching on the
ignition.
On vehicles with MAXI DOT display, the function can be enabled or disabled in
the menu item Dayl. dri. light » page 47 .
WARNING
When the daytime running light is switched on, the parking lights (neither
at the front nor the rear) and the number plate lights are not lit. Therefore
always switch on the low beam when the visibility is poor.
Turn signal and main beam
Fig. 50
Operating lever: Turn signal and
main beam operation
Read and observe on page 67 first.
Lever positions » Fig. 50
Switch on right turn signal
Switch on left turn signal
Switch on high beam (spring-loaded position)
Switching off main beam / switching on headlamp flasher (spring-loaded
position)
Main beam
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
The warning light
illuminates in the instrument cluster when the high beam
is switched on.
Flasher
The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off.
The warning light
illuminates in the instrument cluster when the headlight
flasher is switched on.
Flashing
When the left turn signal switch is switched on, the indicator light
flashes in
the instrument cluster.
When the right turn signal switch is switched on, the indicator light
flashes
in the instrument cluster.
The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a
curve or after making a turn.
The warning light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal
light fails.
A
B
C
D
69
Lights and visibility
“Convenience turn signal”
If you wish to flash three times only, briefly push the stalk to the upper or low-
er pressure point and release again.
The “Lane ch. flash” can be activated or deactivated via the MAXI DOT display
in the Lane ch. flash» page 47 menu item.
WARNING
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled.
Automatic driving lamp control
Fig. 51
Light switch: AUTO position
Read and observe on page 67 first.
If the light switch is in position

» Fig. 51, the parking lights, low beam and
number plate lights are switched on or off automatically.
The light on/off switching is controlled by a sensor mounted under the wind-
screen in the holder of the inside mirror.
If the light switch is in position

, the lettering

illuminates next to the
light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol
next to the
light switch also illuminates.
Automatic driving-light control during rain
The low beam lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions
are met.
The light switch is in position

» Fig. 51.
Automatic wiping with rain - position
1
or wiping - position
2
or
3
is
turned on » page 78, Windscreen wipers and washers.
The windscreen wipers are on for more than 15 s.
The light turns off about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers.
CAUTION
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the
windscreen. This can impair its function or reliability.
Adaptive headlights (AHL)
Read and observe on page 67 first.
The AHL system makes sure the street remains lit up depending on the traffic
and weather situation.
The AHL system automatically adjusts the cone of light in front of the vehicle
to the driving speed or the use of the wiper.
The AHL system works as long as the light switch is in position

.» page 70
The AHL system operates in the following modes.
Out of town mode
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam.
City mode
The light cone in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that this and the adjacent
pavements, intersections, pedestrian crossings, etc. are illuminated. The mode
is active at speeds of 15 - 50 km / h.
Motorway mode
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can re-
spond in time to an obstruction or other hazard in time. The mode activates
progressively from a speed of 90 km / h onward. It is most efficient at a speeds
above 120 km / h.
Rain mode
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can re-
duce the glare from oncoming vehicles in rain.
The mode is active at speeds of 15 – 70 km/h and if the windscreen wipers
continuously operate for a period of time longer than 2 minutes. The mode is
deactivated when the windscreen wipers are switched off for longer than 8
minutes.
Dynamic cornering lights
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted to the steering angle so
that the road in the curve is illuminated. This function is active at speeds
greater than 10 km.h and in all AHL modes.
70
Operation
Tourist lights (Travel mode)
This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system
(driving on the left/right) without dazzling the oncoming vehicles.
When this mode is active, the above mentioned modes and the side swivel of
the headlights are deactivated.
This mode can be enabled or disabled via the MAXI DOT display in the Travel
mode» page 48, Lights and visibility menu option.
WARNING
If the AHL system is defective, the headlights are automatically lowered to
the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming
traffic. This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle. Drive carefully
and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible.
Note
When the “tourist light” mode is active, the warning light flashes for 10 sec-
onds each time the ignition is switched on.
Fog lights
Fig. 52
Light switch: Turn on front and
rear fog light
Read and observe on page 67 first.
Switching on/off
Turn the light switch to position
or
» Fig. 52.
Pull the light switch to position
1
.
The fog light is switched off in the reverse sequence.
The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the fog lights
are switched on » page 34.
Fog lights with the CORNER function
Read and observe on page 67 first.
The CORNER function lights the front fog lamp on the relevant side of the ve-
hicle to illuminate the area around the vehicle when turning, parking, etc.
The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions
are met.
The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to
the right or left
1)
.
The engine is running.
The vehicle is stopped or moves at a speed of no more than 40 km/h.
The low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position

and
the low beam is switched on.
The daytime running lights are not switched on.
The fog lights are not switched on.
Note
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
Rear fog light
Read and observe
on page 67 first.
Switching on/off
Turn the light switch to position
or
» Fig. 52 on page 71.
Pull the light switch to position
2
.
The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse sequence.
The warning light
illuminates in the instrument cluster when the rear fog
light is switched on » page 34.
When in reverse gear only the rear fog lamp illuminates on the driver's side.
1)
If both switch on conditions are conflicting, for example, if the front wheels are turned to the left and
the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.
71
Lights and visibility
Only the rear fog light on the trailer illuminates if the vehicle has a factory fit-
ted towing device or a towing device from ŠKODA original accessories and it is
driven with a trailer.
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
Read and observe on page 67 first.
COMING HOME (hereinafter referred to only as function) switches the light au-
tomatically for a short time after leaving the vehicle.
LEAVING HOME (hereinafter referred to only as function) switches the light au-
tomatically for a short time when approaching the vehicle.
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
The light switch is in position

» Fig. 51 on page 70.
The visibility in the vehicle environment is reduced.
The ignition is switched off.
The parking aid is activated.
The function is switched on (the driver's door is opened / the car is un-
locked with the remote control).
The function switches on the following light, depending on the equipment
fitted.
Parking lights
Low beam
Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors
Licence plate light
Poorer visibility is evaluated by sensor mounted in the holder of the interior
mirror.
COMING HOME
The light turns on automatically when you open the driver's door on (within 60
seconds of turning off the ignition).
The light turns off 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid or af-
ter the pre-set time has expired.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out after 60 seconds.
LEAVING HOME
The light turns on automatically after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control.
The light turns off after 10 seconds or after a pre-set time or after the vehicle
is locked.
Activate/deactivate the function
The functions and settings of the illumination time can be activated/deactiva-
ted via the MAXI DOT display in the menu items Coming Home or Leaving
Home » page 47.
CAUTION
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on
the windscreen. This can impair its function or reliability.
If this function is activated constantly, the battery will be heavily discharged
particularly in short-haul travel.
Hazard warning light system
Fig. 53
Button for hazard warning light
system
Read and observe on page 67 first.
Switching on/off
Press the
» Fig. 53 button.
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard
warning light system is switched on. The warning light for the turn signals and
the warning light in the button also flash at the same time. The hazard warn-
ing light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off.
The hazard warning light system will switch on automatically if one of the air-
bags is deployed.
If the turn signal light is switched on when the hazard warning light and the
ignition are both switched on, then only the turn signal light on the corre-
sponding vehicle side will flash.
72
Operation
WARNING
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example, the following oc-
curs.
You encounter a traffic jam.
The vehicle has broken down.
Parking lights
Read and observe on page 67 first.
The parking light is designed for temporary lighting of the parked vehicle.
Switching on the parking light
Switch off the ignition.
Place the control lever into position
A
or
B
as far as it can go » Fig. 50 on
page 69 - the parking light on the right/left-hand side of the vehicle is
switched on.
If the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is
switched off, the parking light
is not automatically switched on.
Switching on the side lights on both sides
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the light switch
A
to position
» Fig. 49 on page 68 and lock the ve-
hicle.
After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible
warning sounds. After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the au-
dible alarm is turned off, but the parking lights will remain switched on.
CAUTION
Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded, especially
over short distances.
Interior lights
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front interior light 73
Rear interior light - Variant 1
74
Rear interior light - Variant 2
74
Front door warning light 74
Entry lighting 75
Note
With the ignition off, the light turns off automatically after about 10 minutes.
Front interior light
Fig. 54 Operation of the front interior light: Version 1/version 2
Rocker switch positions » Fig. 54
Switching on
Switching off
Control with the door contact switch (middle position)
There is no icon available for the center position (operation with the door con-
tact switch) in Version 2.
Switch for reading lights
Switching left reading lamp on/off
Switching right reading lamp on/off
Conditions for operation of light with the door contact switch - setting
The system is turned on when any of the following is present.
The vehicle is unlocked.
One of the doors or the luggage compartment lid is being opened.
The ignition key is removed.
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
The vehicle is locked.
The ignition is switched on.
About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
73
Lights and visibility
Note
Two diffuse lights are integrated in the front interior lighting that illuminates
the gearshift lever and the middle of the dash panel. These are switched on
automatically when the parking light is activated. Also, after switching on the
ignition when the parking lights are switched on, the door handle lighting illu-
minates.
Rear interior light - Variant 1
Applies to vehicles without a panoramic sliding roof.
Fig. 55
Interior light and rear reading
lights
Switch for reading lights » Fig. 55
Switching left reading lamp on/off
Switching right reading lamp on/off
The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior
light » page 73.
Rear interior light - Variant 2
Applies to vehicles with a panoramic sliding roof.
Fig. 56
Interior lights at the rear
The light is operated by moving the lens into one of the following posi-
tions » Fig. 56.
Switching on
Control with the door contact switch (middle position)
1)
Switching off
Front door warning light
Fig. 57
Warning light
The warning light » Fig. 57 turns on when the front door is opened.
The warning light turns off when the front door is closed.
In vehicles without a warning light only a reflector is installed at this point.
1)
In this position, apply the same rules to the rear interior light as for the front interior light » page 73 .
74
Operation
Note
If the door is open and the ignition switched off, the light extinguishes auto-
matically after around 20 minutes.
Entry lighting
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror and illumi-
nates the entry area of the front door.
The light illuminates after the vehicle has been unlocked or on opening the
front door. The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed
or if the ignition is switched on.
WARNING
If the entry light is on, do not touch its cover – risk of burns!
Note
If the door is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish auto-
matically after around 1 minute.
Visibility
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Windscreen and rear window heater 75
Sun visors 76
Sun screen 76
Sun screen in the rear doors 76
Windscreen and rear window heater
Fig. 58 Buttons for the rear and front window heating Climatronic / man-
ual air conditioning
Buttons for the heating in the centre console » Fig. 58
Switching the rear window heater on/off
Switching the windscreen heater on/off
When the heater is switched on, a lamp illuminates inside the button.
The heater only works when the engine is running.
The heater automatically switches off after approximately 10 minutes.
For the sake of the environment
The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de-iced or free
from mist. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on
fuel economy » page 151, Saving electrical energy.
Note
If the on-board voltage drops, the heater switches off automatically, in order
to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control » page 197, Auto-
matic load deactivation.
If the light is flashing inside the button the heater is off due to low battery.
75
Lights and visibility
Sun visors
Fig. 59 Sun visor: fold down / pivot to door
Fig. 60 Sun visor: Auxiliary panel fold down / makeup mirror
Sun visors » Fig. 59, » Fig. 60
Fold down the cover
Swivel cover towards the door
Fold down the auxiliary cover
Make up mirror, the cover can be pushed in the direction of the arrow
Light - turns on automatically when the cover slides open
While sliding the cover
A
or when lifting the cover, the light turns off
B.
WARNING
The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de-
ployment area of the head airbags if any objects are attached to them. Ini-
tiation of the head airbags may cause injury.
1
2
3
A
B
Sun screen
Fig. 61
Unroll the sun screen
The sun screen is located in the lower part of the boot cover.
Extending
Pull the sun screen on the handle
A
» Fig. 61 and hang it in the magnetic
brackets
B
.
Retracting
Remove the sun screen from the magnetic brackets
B
and hold it on the
handle
A
so that it can slowly roll up into the housing on the boot cover
without being damaged.
Note
Do not place any objects that react sensitively to influences of magnetic fields
(watches, electronics, etc.) in the immediate vicinity of the magnetic brackets.
They can be damaged by the magnetic field.
Sun screen in the rear doors
Fig. 62
Rear door: Sun screen
Extending
Pull out the sun screen with the handle
A
» Fig. 62 and hang it in the brack-
et on the top edge of the door.
76
Operation
Retracting
Remove the sun screen from the handle
A
» Fig. 62 and hold it in such a
way that it can roll up slowly without being damaged.
Windscreen wipers and washers
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Windscreen wipers and washers 78
Headlight cleaning system 79
The wiper and washer system provide a good view through the windscreen or
rear window.
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is
switched on and the bonnet is closed.
Top up with windscreen wiper fluid » page 188.
WARNING
Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi-
bility and safe driving » page 219.
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other-
wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
Automatic wiping during rain is only a support. The driver is still responsi-
ble for setting the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending
on the visibility conditions.
CAUTION
If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on,
the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the igni-
tion is turned back on. The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold tempera-
tures between the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned
back on again.
In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before the journey or be-
fore switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windscreen. If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are fro-
zen to the windscreen, this may damage both the blades and windscreen wip-
er motor!
Carefully release frozen wiper blades off the windscreen.
Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving.
If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage to
the windscreen.
Do not switch on the ignition if the front wiper arms are retracted. The wiper
arms could damage the paint of the bonnet.
If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the
obstacle. The wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the ob-
stacle, in order to avoid damage to the wiper. Remove the obstacle and switch
the wiper on again.
Note
Each time the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the
windscreen wipers changes. This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rub-
bers.
The rear window wiper only operates if the boot lid is closed.
The wiper blades should be cleaned on a regular basis with a windscreen
cleaner to avoid any smears. The wiper blades should be cleaned with a
sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues, for example.
Keep the wiper blades clean. They may become soiled, e.g., with wax resi-
dues after washing in automatic car wash systems » page 177.
The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en-
gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx. +10 °C.
77
Lights and visibility
Windscreen wipers and washers
Fig. 63
Operating lever: Windscreen
wipers and washer settings
Read and observe and on page 77 first.
Lever positions
0
 Wipers off
1
Periodic windscreen wiping / automatic wiping in rain
2
 Slow windscreen wiping
3
 Rapid windscreen wiping
4
Flick windscreen wiping, service position of the wiper
arms » page 219, (spring-loaded position)
5
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen (spring-loaded position)
6
Wiping the rear window (the windscreen wiper wipes at regular in-
tervals after a few seconds)
7
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window (spring-loaded position)
A
Switches for setting: the desired pause between the individual wip-
er strokes / the speed of the wiping in rain (operating lever in the
position
1
)
Interval windscreen wiping
The wiping intervals are also speed-dependent regulated.
Automatic windscreen wiping in rain
The wiping intervals are controlled depending on the rain intensity.
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen
The wash system operates immediately, the windscreen wipers wipe some-
what later. The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneous-
ly at a speed of more than 120 km/h.
Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to
stop and the wipers to continue for another 3 - 4 wiper strokes (depending on
the spraying duration).
At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after
the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This
function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window
(Superb Combi)
The wash system operates immediately, the wiper wipes somewhat later.
Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to
stop and the wiper to continue for another 2 to 3 wiper strokes (depending on
the spraying duration). The operating lever remains in position » Fig. 63
6
.
Automatic rear window wiper (Superb Combi)
If the lever is in position
2
» Fig. 63 or
3
the rear window is wiped every
30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle's speed exceeds 5 km/h.
If automatic windscreen wiping in rain is activated (the operating lever is in the
position
1
) the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate in
continuous mode (no break between each wiping process).
Automatic rear window wiping can be activated/deactivated via the MAXI DOT
display in the menu item Rear wiper » page 47.
Winter setting of the windscreen wiper
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
the windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wip-
ers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily.
Switch on the windscreen wipers.
Switch off the ignition.
The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when
switching off the ignition.
The service position can also be used as a winter position » page 219.
Note
If the operating lever is in the position
2
or
3
and the speed of the vehicle
drops below 4 km/h, the wiping speed is switched to a lower wiping level. The
original setting is restored step by step when the speed of the vehicle exceeds
8 km/h.
The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected.
78
Operation
Headlight cleaning system
Read and observe and on page 77 first.
After the ignition is switched on, the headlights are always cleaned at the first
and after every tenth spray of the windscreen (setting
5
» Fig. 63 on
page 78), when the low beam or main beam is switched on.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight
lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. The following guide-
lines must be observed » page 179, Headlight lenses.
To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter, any
snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be
cleared with a de-icing spray.
CAUTION
Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand – there
is risk of damage.
Rear mirror
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Interior mirror
79
Exterior mirrors 80
WARNING
Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice, snow, condensation or
other objects.
Convex (curved outward) or aspheric exterior mirrors increase the field of
vision. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These
mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the fol-
lowing vehicles.
Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to
the following vehicles.
WARNING
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain an electrolyte liquid which can
escape if mirror glass is broken.
The leaking electrolytic fluid can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory
system. Immediately seek out fresh air and leave the vehicle. If this is not
possible, at least open the window.
If you swallow electrolytic fluid, seek medical assistance immediately.
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for several minutes plenty of water. Then con-
sult a doctor immediately.
Interior mirror
Fig. 64
Interior mirror: manual dimming / auto-dimming / light sensor
Read and observe on page 79 first.
Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 64
Basic position of the mirror
Mirror dimming
Mirror with automatic dimming » Fig. 64
Warning light - lights when dimming is activated
Switch for the activation of the automatic mirror dimming
Light sensor
Light sensor on the back of the mirror
Mirror with automatic dimming
If the automatic dimming is enabled, the mirror dims automatically depending
on the light falling on the sensors.
1
2
A
B
C
D
79
Lights and visibility
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
Do not attach external navigation devices on to the windscreen or in the vicini-
ty of the automatic dimming interior mirror » .
WARNING
The illuminated display of an external navigation unit can lead to opera-
tional faults to the automatic dimming interior mirror – risk of accident.
CAUTION
Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the light striking the sen-
sors is not affected by other objects.
Note
If the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off, the exterior mirror
dimming is also switched off.
Exterior mirrors
Fig. 65
Exterior mirror operation
Read and observe on page 79 first.
The knob can be moved into the following positions (depending on the vehi-
cle equipment)
Adjust the left mirror
Adjust the right mirror
Switch off mirror control
Mirror heater
Folding in the exterior mirrors
Adjust the position
The mirror can be adjusted to the desired position by moving the knob in the
direction of the arrow » Fig. 65.
The movement of the mirror surface follows the movement of the rotary knob.
Synchronous adjustment of the mirror
Activate the synchronous adjustment of the mirror above the MAXI DOT dis-
play in the menu item Mirror adjust. » page 47, Settings.
Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror ad-
justment.
Adjust the mirror to the desired position.
Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob
It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched
on and at a speed of up to 15 km/h.
The mirrors are folded out into the driving position after the rotary knob is
turned from the position
to a different one.
Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key
Close all windows.
Press
on the remote control key for about 2 seconds.
The exterior mirror is folded back into the driving position when the ignition is
switched on.
Mirror with automatic dimming
The exterior mirror blackout is controlled together with the automatic dimming
interior mirror » page 79.
Memory function for mirrors
Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's seat.
It is possible to save the current setting of the exterior mirrors when saving
the driver's seat position with » page 84, Memory function of the electrically
adjustable seat or » page 84, Memory function of the remote control key.
Fold in passenger's mirror
Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's seat.
The passenger side mirror can tilt down to improve the view to the kerb when
reversing.
80
Operation
The mirror will be folded automatically if the following conditions are met.
The function is activated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror
down » page 47, Settings.
The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror
adjustment.
The reverse gear is engaged.
The mirror setting was previously stored » page 84, Memory function of
the electrically adjustable seat or » page 84, Memory function of the re-
mote control key.
WARNING
Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces if the exterior mirror heater is
switched on - risk of burns.
CAUTION
The exterior mirrors with fold in function never mechanically fold by hand -
there is a risk of damaging the electric mirror actuator!
When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during ma-
noeuvring, for example), then first fold-in the mirror by turning the knob and
wait for a loud clapping noise.
Note
The mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an
outside temperature of +35 .
If the electrical mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted by
hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
Seats and practical features
Adjusting the seats
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manually adjusting the front seats 82
Electric front seat adjustment 82
Head restraints 83
Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat 84
Memory function of the remote control key 84
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully
pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.
The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that
the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent
arms.
Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for the following rea-
sons.
Reaching the controls safely and quickly.
A relaxed and fatigue-free body position.
Achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag
system.
WARNING
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
The electric front seat adjustment is also functional when the ignition is
turned off (even with the ignition key removed). Therefore, when leaving
the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such
as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a danger of injury!
Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle.
Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except objects de-
signed for this purpose (e.g. child seat) – risk of accident!
81
Seats and practical features
Note
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of
the backrest angle.
For safety reasons, it is not possible to store the seat position in the electric
seat memory and remote control key memory if the inclination angle of the
seat backrest is more than 102° in relation to the seat cushion.
Each time you store the position of the electrically adjustable driver's seat
and exterior mirrors, the existing settings are deleted.
Manually adjusting the front seats
Fig. 66 Controls / setting
Read and observe on page 81 first.
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
Pull the lever
A
» Fig. 66 in the direction of the arrow 1 and push the seat in
the required direction.
The lock must click into place after you release the lever.
Adjusting height of seat
Again push/pull the lever
B
» Fig. 66 in the direction of one of the arrows2.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
Relieve any pressure from the seat backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the
handwheel
C
» Fig. 66 in the direction of the arrow 3.
Adjusting lumbar support
Push the lever
D
» Fig. 66 in the direction of one of the arrows4.
Electric front seat adjustment
Fig. 67 Adjusting controls / lumbar support
Fig. 68 Setting: Seat pad / backrest
Read and observe on page 81 first.
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
Push the switch
B
» Fig. 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 3 » Fig. 68.
Set the height of the seat cushion
Push the switch
B
» Fig. 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 5 » Fig. 68.
Adjust the angle of the seat cushion
Push the switch
B
» Fig. 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 4 » Fig. 68.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
Push the switch
C
» Fig. 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 6 » Fig. 68.
Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support
Push the switch
A
in the region of one of the arrows2 » Fig. 67.
82
Operation
Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support
Push the switch
A
in the region of one of the arrows1 » Fig. 67.
The adjusted driver's seat position can be set in the memory of the
seat » page 84 or the remote control key » page 84.
Note
If the setting procedure is interrupted, you will need to press the button again.
Head restraints
Fig. 69 Head restraints: Setting / removing
Fig. 70
Rear centre head rests in vehi-
cles with the TOP TETHER sys-
tem
Read and observe
on page 81 first.
Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head rest is at the same level
as the upper part of your head.
Setting height
Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as
required » Fig. 69 -
.
To move the head restraint downwards, press and hold the safety but-
ton » Fig. 69 - with one hand and push the head restraint down with the
other hand.
The head restraints and the front seats must be adjusted to match the body
size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide
the most effective levels of protection to the passengers » page 9, Correct and
safe seated position.
Removing/installing
Fold the seat slightly forward before removing the rear head restraint.
Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
Press the locking button in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 69 -
and pull
the head restraint out.
To reinsert the head restraint, push it far enough down into the seat back-
rest until the locking button clicks into place.
Removing and installing rear middle head rest
Applies to vehicles using the TOP TETHER system.
Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
Press the locking button in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 70 simultaneously
press the locking button into the opening
2
using a flathead screwdriver
with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head rest.
To reinsert the head restraint, push it far enough down into the seat back-
rest until the locking button clicks into place.
WARNING
With seats occupied, the respective head rests must be installed and cor-
rectly set (may not be in the bottom position) - there is a risk of fatal injury!
Note
The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions.
83
Seats and practical features
Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat
Fig. 71
Memory buttons and SET button
Read and observe on page 81 first.
The memory function for the driver's seat provides the option to store the po-
sitions of the driver's seat and the external mirrors. Each of the three memory
buttons
B
» Fig. 71 can be assigned a set position.
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
Switch on the ignition.
Adjust the seat to the desired position.
Adjust both of the exterior mirrors » page 80.
Press the button
SET
A
» Fig. 71.
Within 10 seconds after pressing the
SET
button, press the desired memory
button
B
.
An acknowledgement sound confirms the storage.
Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing
Above the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror down The lowering func-
tion for the mirror on the passenger side when reversing must be ena-
bled » page 47.
Switch on the ignition.
Press the required memory button
B
» Fig. 71.
Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror adjustment » page 80.
Engage reverse gear.
Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position » page 80.
Disengage reverse gear.
The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.
Retrieving the saved setting
Briefly press the desired memory button
B
» Fig. 71 with the ignition on.
or
Press and hold the desired memory button
B
with the ignition off or when
the ignition is on and travelling at a speed of more than 5 km / h.
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
Press any button on the driver's seat or the button
on the remote control
key.
Note
Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
you also have to restore the setting of the individual exterior mirror on the
passenger side for reversing.
Memory function of the remote control key
Read and observe
on page 81 first.
The automatic storage of the driver's seat and exterior mirror positions when
locking the vehicle can be turned on in the memory of the remote control key
(afterwards only as function of automatic storage).
Enable automatic storage
Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key.
Press and hold any memory button
B
» Fig. 71 on page 84.
After the seat has assumed the position stored under this button, at the
same time press the button
on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
The successful activation of the automatic storage function for each key is
confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
Enable automatic storage.
84
Operation
When automatic storage is activated, the current positions of the driver's seat
and the external mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key
each time the vehicle is locked. When the vehicle is next unlocked using the
same key, the driver's seat and the external mirrors assume the positions stor-
ed in the memory of this key
1)
.
Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing
Above the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror down The lowering func-
tion for the mirror on the passenger side when reversing must be ena-
bled » page 47.
Unlock the vehicle using the respective remote control key.
Switch on the ignition.
Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror adjustment » page 80.
Engage reverse gear.
Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position » page 80.
Disengage reverse gear.
The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored in the remote control key
memory.
Disable the function of automatic storage
Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key.
Press and hold the
SET
button
A
» Fig. 71 on page 84. At the same time,
press the button
on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
The successful deactivation of the automatic storage function for each key is
confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
Press any button on the driver's seat or the button
on the remote control
key.
Seat features
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Seat heaters
85
Ventilated front seats 86
Convenience features of passenger seat 87
Front armrest 87
Rear armrest 87
Seat backrests 87
Rear seat folded forward (Superb Combi) 88
Seat heaters
Fig. 72 Heating: Front seats/ rear seats
The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the outer rear seats
can be heated electrically.
The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running.
Switching on the front seat heater
Press the controller in the area of the symbols
and
» Fig. 72 -
Switch on rear seat heater
Press the symbol button
or
» Fig. 72 -
.
By pressing the button once, the heating is switched to the highest intensity -
level 3, which is indicated by all three of the warning lights in the switch illumi-
nating.
With repeated pressing of the switch, the heating is turned down until it goes
off.
The seat heating level is indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights
in the respective control.
1)
The vehicle must be locked and unlocked with the same key to save the seat and exterior mirror position
to the key.
85
Seats and practical features
If the engine is switched off and then turned on again within 10 mins with the
rear seat heating switched, then each rear seat heating is automatically turned
on again.
WARNING
If you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. through
medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we rec-
ommend not to use the seat heating. This can lead to burns on the back,
the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating is
used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving
long distances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the jour-
ney. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.
CAUTION
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
The seat heater in the following cases will not turn on - there is a risk of
damaging the seat covers and seat heater.
The seats are not occupied.
Items are fastened to or stored on the seats e.g. child seat, bags etc.
Additional seat covers or protective covers are fixed to the seats.
Clean the seat covers » page 182, Seat covers.
Note
If the rear seat heating is set to the highest intensity - level 3, it is automati-
cally switched over to level 2 after 10 minutes (two warning lights are illumina-
ted on the switch).
If the on-board voltage drops, the heater switches off automatically in order
to provide sufficient electrical power for the engine control » page 197.
Ventilated front seats
Fig. 73
Rocker switch for the seat venti-
lation
Heat and condensation can be removed from the seat cushions and seat
backrests on the front seats.
The ventilation is operated using the rocker switch » Fig. 73 in the front part of
the seat cushion, in front of the seat control elements for the electric front
seat adjustment.
Switching on
Switch the rocker switch to position 1 - lower intensity and to position 2 -
higher intensity.
Switching off
Switch the rocker switch to the centre position
.
WARNING
If you or a passenger have limited pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g.
caused by medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes),
we recommend that you consult your physician before using the ventilated
front seat.
CAUTION
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
The fan is located underneath the front seat cushion. Do not place any ob-
jects in this area - it may damage the fan.
Do not clean the seats using moisture. Clean the seat covers » page 182,
Seat covers.
Note
The ventilation should only be switched on when the engine is running. This
has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.
We do not recommend using the front seat ventilation and heating at the
same time. Using the ventilation to cool the seat surface considerably reduces
the heating capacity, at the same time affecting the ability of the control unit
to detect the right seat surface temperature.
86
Operation
Convenience features of passenger seat
Fig. 74
Operating passenger seat from
the rear seat
The front passenger seat can also be operated from the rear seat.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
Push the switch
A
in the direction of one of the arrows 1 » Fig. 74.
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
Push the switch
B
in the direction of one of the arrows 2 » Fig. 74 .
Front armrest
Fig. 75
Adjusting armrest
The armrest is adjustable for height and length.
Setting height
First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the
arrow
1
» Fig. 75 to one of the 4 fixed positions.
Move
Move the cover into the desired position in the direction of the arrow
2
» Fig. 75.
The armrest includes a storage compartment underneath » page 92.
Note
Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the hand-
brake.
Rear armrest
Fig. 76
Fold the armrest forwards
Folding forward
Fold down the armrest in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 76.
A cup holder may be located in the armrest » page 90.
Seat backrests
Fig. 77 Pull seat back / seat belt to the side panel to unlock
The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backr-
ests forward. The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles
with divided rear seats.
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adjust the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests.
87
Seats and practical features
If the front seats are too far back, we recommend taking out the rear head re-
straints before the seat backrests are folded forward, to achieve a loading
space that is as horizontal as possible » .
Fold down split seat backrest
Press the release knob
A
» Fig. 77.
Fold the seat backrest completely forwards.
Fold down undivided seat backrest
Push the release handles
A
» Fig. 77 on both sides of the seat backrest at
the same time.
Fold the seat backrest completely forwards.
Fold back split seat backrest
If you removed the head restraint, you need to reinsert it with the backrest
tilted slightly forwards » page 83.
Hold the rear outer seat belt
C
» Fig. 77 against the side trim panel.
Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing
knob
A
clicks into place – check by pulling on the seat backrest » .
Make sure that the red pin
B
is hidden.
Fold back undivided seat backrest
If you removed the head restraints, you need to reinsert them with the back-
rest tilted slightly forwards » page 83.
Hold the rear outer seat belts
C
» Fig. 77 against the side trim panel.
Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the release
levers
A
on either side of the seat back click into place – check by pulling on
the seat backrest » .
Make sure that the red pins
B
on both sides of the seat back are not visible.
WARNING
The seat belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after
folding back the seat backrests – they must be ready to use.
The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no ob-
jects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compart-
ment under sudden braking – risk of injury.
In occupied rear seats make sure that the respective seat backrests are
properly engaged.
CAUTION
Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backr-
ests. Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the fol-
ded back seat backrests.
Store the head restraints that were removed in such a way that they are not
damaged or soiled.
Rear seat folded forward (Superb Combi)
Fig. 78
Folding the seat cushion for-
wards
Pull up the seat squab in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 78 and fold for-
wards in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Note
To achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible, the rear head re-
straints can be removed before folding the seat backrests forwards. Store the
removed head restraints in such a way that they are not damaged or soiled.
Practical features
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Car park ticket holder
89
Storage compartment on the driver's side 89
Storage compartments in the doors 90
Storage compartment in the front centre console 90
Cup holders 90
Cigarette lighter 91
Ashtray 91
12 Volt power outlet 92
88
Operation
Storage compartment under the front armrest 92
Storage net in front centre console 93
Glasses storage box 93
Storage compartment on passenger side 94
Storage compartment under passenger seat 94
Clothes hook 94
Storage pockets on the front seats 95
Storage compartment for umbrella 95
Storage compartment in rear centre console 95
Storage compartment in the rear armrest 96
Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel 96
Removable ski bag 97
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down while you are driving (under acceleration or when cornering) and
could distract you from the traffic - there is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage
compartments can get into the driver's footwell while you are driving. You
would not be able to brake, operate the clutch pedal or accelerate - danger
of causing an accident!
No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
den braking or the vehicle collides with something.
Ash and cigarette or cigar stubs must only be discarded in ashtrays.
Car park ticket holder
Fig. 79
Parking ticket holder
Read and observe on page 89 first.
The note holder is designed e.g. for attaching car park tickets.
WARNING
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order
not to restrict the driver's vision.
Storage compartment on the driver's side
Fig. 80
Open the storage compartment
on the driver's side
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Opening
Raise the handle
A
» Fig. 80 and open out the compartment in the direction
of the arrow.
Closing
Swivel the lid against the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
89
Seats and practical features
Storage compartments in the doors
Fig. 81 Storage compartment: in the front door/in the rear door
Read and observe
on page 89 first.
WARNING
Use the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project
so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not impaired.
Storage compartment in the front centre console
Fig. 82
Opening the storage compart-
ment
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Open/close
Press on the edge of the roof
A
» Fig. 82 in the direction of the arrow.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
The storage compartment must never be used as an ashtray or for the stor-
age of combustible materials - fire hazard and risk of damage to the stor-
age compartment!
Note
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which illuminates
when the parking light is on.
Cup holders
Fig. 83
Front centre console: Cup holder
Fig. 84 Rear armrest: Remove cup holder/insert cup holder
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder.
Cup holder at the front
On vehicles that are fitted with a cover for cup holders, you can cover the cup
holder by pulling on the handle
A
» Fig. 83 in the direction of the arrow.
90
Operation
Rear cup holder
Press on the front end of the armrest in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 84 -
, the cup holder comes out.
To slide the cup holder in again, press the middle part of the cup hold-
er » Fig. 84 -
and slide it into the armrest in the direction of the arrow.
WARNING
Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. They may spill if the
vehicle moves – there is a risk of scalding.
Do not use any cups or beakers made of fragile material (e.g. glass, porce-
lain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
CAUTION
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.
Slide in the cup holder before raising the rear armrest.
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 85 Centre console: Cigarette lighter, front/rear
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Operation
Press the button of the cigarette lighter
A
or
B
» Fig. 85.
Wait until the button pops forward.
Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use.
Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket.
The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ig-
nition key withdrawn » .
WARNING
Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Improper usage can cause
burns.
When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. They could operate
the lighter and burn themselves.
Note
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 Volt socket for electrical
appliances » page 92, 12 Volt power outlet.
Ashtray
Fig. 86 Centre console: Ashtray at the front/rear
Read and observe on page 89 first.
The ashtray can be used for discarding ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like » .
Removing/inserting the front ash tray
Open the ashtray » Fig. 82 on page 90.
Grasp the ashtray insert in the area
A
» Fig. 86 and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow
1
.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
Removing/inserting the rear ashtray insert
Open the ashtray » Fig. 95 on page 95.
Grasp the ashtray insert
B
» Fig. 86 in the area marked with the arrows and
remove it in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
91
Seats and practical features
WARNING
Never place flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
Note
The ashtrays are fitted with an interior light which illuminates when the park-
ing light is on.
12 Volt power outlet
Fig. 87 Boot: Superb / Superb Combi socket
Read and observe on page 89 first.
The 12-volt power socket (hereinafter referred to only as a socket) is located in
the front center console
A
» Fig. 85 on page 91 in the rear center console
B
» Fig. 85 on page 91 and in the luggage compartment » Fig. 87.
Use
Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter » Fig. 85 on
page 91or open the cover for the power socket » Fig. 87.
Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
The power socket and any connected appliances can also be operated when
the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn » .
WARNING
Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. Therefore, when leaving the
vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such as
children, unattended in the vehicle.
If the connected electric device becomes too hot, switch it off and discon-
nect it from the power supply immediately.
CAUTION
The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical acces-
sories with a power uptake of up to 120 watt.
Never exceed the maximum power consumption, otherwise the vehicle's
electrical system can be damaged.
Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power sockets.
Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility
in accordance with the applicable directives.
Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch
the ignition on or off and before starting the engine, to avoid damage from
voltage fluctuations.
Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices!
Storage compartment under the front armrest
Fig. 88
Armrest: Stowage compartment
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Opening
Pull and open the cover of the armrest using the handle
A
in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 88.
92
Operation
Closing
Open the lid to the stop, only then can it be folded downwards and against
the direction of the arrow » Fig. 88.
The sockets marked

AUX input and the MDI input are located in the stor-
age compartment.
Note
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which illuminates
when the parking light is on.
Storage net in front centre console
Fig. 89
Front centre console: Storage
net
Read and observe on page 89 first.
WARNING
Only store soft objects with a total weight of 0.5 kg in the storage net.
Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
CAUTION
Do not place any sharp objects into the net – risk of net damage.
Glasses storage box
Fig. 90
Opening the glasses storage box
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Opening
Press the button
A
» Fig. 90.
The compartment folds in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
Swivel the lid of the glasses storage box against the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 90 until it audibly clicks into place.
WARNING
The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the
spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed – risk of injury.
CAUTION
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - they could
get damaged.
The compartment must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle –
risk of impairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system!
93
Seats and practical features
Storage compartment on passenger side
Fig. 91 Open tray / control air supply
Read and observe
on page 89 first.
A pen holder is provided in the stowage compartment.
Opening
Press the button » Fig. 91 -
.
The flap folds down.
Closing
Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place.
Air supply
Open the air supply by pulling the lever in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 91
-
.
The air supply is closed by pressing the lever in the opposite direction to that
of the arrow.
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows
cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or in-
terior air to flow into the storage compartment.
We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the
cooling system for the storage compartment is not being used.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
Note
When the storage compartment is opened, a light illuminates.
Storage compartment under passenger seat
Fig. 92
Front passenger seat: Opening
the storage compartment
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Opening
Pull the handle to position
1
» Fig. 92 in the direction of the arrow.
The compartment opens out in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Closing
Grip the compartment by the handle and close in the opposite direction to
that of the arrow
2
» Fig. 92.
Keep hold of the handle until the compartment is closed.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
CAUTION
The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1.5 kg.
in weight.
Clothes hook
Read and observe
on page 89 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors.
94
Operation
WARNING
Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks. Never leave any heavy or
sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing.
Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing; this may re-
duce the effectiveness of the head airbags.
Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision
to the rear.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg.
Storage pockets on the front seats
Fig. 93
Map pockets
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Pockets for storing maps, magazines etc. are provided on the back of the front
seat backrests » Fig. 93.
WARNING
Never put heavy items in the map pockets – risk of injury.
CAUTION
Never put large objects into the map pockets, e.g. bottles or objects with sharp
edges - risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings.
Storage compartment for umbrella
Fig. 94
Left rear door: Stowage compart-
ment for an umbrella
Read and observe on page 89 first.
The storage compartment for an umbrella is located in the rear left
door » Fig. 94.
Note
An umbrella can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Storage compartment in rear centre console
Fig. 95
Opening the storage compart-
ment
Read and observe on page 89 first.
The storage compartment is equipped with a removable insert.
Open/close
Pull the handle
A
» Fig. 95 on the upper section of the recess and open out
the compartment in the direction of the arrow.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
95
Seats and practical features
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
not be used for such purposes – risk of fire!
Storage compartment in the rear armrest
Fig. 96
Opening the storage compart-
ment
Read and observe on page 89 first.
Opening
Lift button
A
on the front of the armrest and lift the storage compartment
cover in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 96.
Closing
Fold back the storage compartment lid in the opposite direction to that of
the arrow » Fig. 96 until it clicks.
Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel
Fig. 97 Rear seats: Cover handle/boot: Unlock button
Read and observe on page 89 first.
After folding the rear armrest and cover up, an opening in the seat backrest
becomes visible through which the removable through-loading bag with skis
can be pushed. The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passen-
ger compartment or the boot.
Opening from the passenger compartment
Fold down the rear armrest » Fig. 76 on page 87.
Pull the handle
A
pull up to the stop in the direction of the arrow and fold
the cover down » Fig. 97.
Opening from the boot
Push the unlock button
B
» Fig. 97 in the direction of the arrow and fold the
cover including the armrest forwards.
Closing
Fold the cover and rear armrest upwards to the stop - the cover must click
into place.
Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. This is appa-
rent as the red field above the unlocking button
B
» Fig. 97 is not visible from
the boot.
WARNING
The through-loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are
placed in a properly secured, removable through-loading bag » page 97.
96
Operation
Removable ski bag
Fig. 98
Securing the through-loading
bag
Read and observe on page 89 first.
The removable through-loading bag (hereinafter referred to only as a through-
loading bag) is used exclusively for transporting skis.
Loading
Open the boot lid.
Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest down-
wards » page 96, Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel.
Place the empty, through-loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag
with the zip is in the boot.
Push the skis into the through-loading bag from the boot » .
Close the through-loading bag.
Securing
Tighten the strap
A
on the free end around the skis in front of the bind-
ings» Fig. 98.
Fold the seat backrest a little forward.
Guide the securing strap
B
through the opening in the seat backrest around
the upper part of the seat backrest.
Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlock-
ing button clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.
Insert the securing strap
B
into the lock
C
until it clicks into place.
On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition, guide the securing strap
B
around the housing when the net partition is rolled up. After fixing the
through-loading bag in place, it is not longer possible to unroll the net parti-
tion.
WARNING
After placing skis into the through-loading bag, you must secure the bag
with the securing strap
B
» Fig. 98.
The strap
A
must hold the skis tight.
Make sure that the strap
A
holds the skis in front of the binding (also re-
fer to imprint on the through-loading bag).
The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 24
kg.
Note
The through-loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis.
Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips
facing to the rear. into the through-loading bag.
If there are several pairs of skis in the through-loading bag, ensure that the
bindings are positioned at the same height.
The through-loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when
moist.
Luggage compartment
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Class N1 vehicles 98
Fastening elements 99
Fixing nets 99
Folding hook 99
Floor covering 100
Luggage net 100
Luggage compartment cover 100
Roll up boot cover (Superb Combi) 101
Automatic Retractable cargo cover (Superb Combi) 101
Side pockets in luggage compartment 101
Side compartment in boot with battery 102
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi) 102
Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling
characteristics of your vehicle:
Distribute loads as evenly as possible.
97
Seats and practical features
Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the
nets » page 99.
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an object
weighing 4.5 kg produces energy corresponding to 20 times its own weight.
This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg “ ”.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on/off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or
closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish
automatically after around 10 minutes.
Boot light for Superb Combi vehicles » page 103.
WARNING
Always store transported objects in the boot and attach them to the lash-
ing eyes.
Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in
case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users.
Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – there is
a risk of death.
Please note that transporting heavy objects alters the handling proper-
ties of the vehicle due to the displacement of the centre of gravity – risk of
accident! The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly.
If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with
unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of
braking manoeuvres or accidents. To prevent items of luggage from moving
around, always use suitable lashing straps that are firmly attached to the
lashing eyes.
The transported items must be stowed in such a way that no objects are
able to slip forward on sudden driving or braking manoeuvres – risk of in-
jury!
WARNING (Continued)
When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passen-
gers transported on the other rear seats » page 11.
If the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied, ensure maxi-
mum safety, e.g. by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that
the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision.
Do not drive with the luggage compartment lid open or unlatched, other-
wise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poison-
ing!
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
the vehicle – risk of accident!
Do not transport people in the boot!
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heat-
er, the threads of the integrated antenna in the rear window as well as the
threads of the integrated antenna (Superb Combi) in the rear side windows,
are not damaged by abrasive items.
Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load » page 198.
Class N1 vehicles
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
On class N1 vehicles, which are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set
which complies with the standard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fastening
the load.
The proper functioning of the electrical system is essential for the safe opera-
tion of the vehicle. It is important to ensure that it is not damaged during mod-
ifications or when loading or unloading the luggage compartment.
98
Operation
Fastening elements
Fig. 99 Lashing eyes and fastening elements: Superb / Superb Combi
Read and observe
and on page 98 first.
The following fastening elements are found in the luggage compart-
ment » Fig. 99.
Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets.
Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3.5 kN (350 kg).
Fixing nets
Fig. 100 Fastening examples for nets
A
B
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
Examples for attaching the fixing nets » Fig. 100.
Vertical pocket
Horizontal pocket
Floor net
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets. Heavy ob-
jects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1.5 kg.
Do not place any sharp objects in the nets – risk of net damage.
Folding hook
Fig. 101
Folding hooks: Superb / Superb Combi
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are pro-
vided on both sides of the boot.
Folding forward
Superb: Press on the lower portion of the hook
A
and fold down direction of
the arrow
1
» Fig. 101.
Superb Combi: Take hold of hook
B
in the area of the arrow and fold down in
the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 101.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible hook load is 7.5 kg.
A
B
C
99
Seats and practical features
Floor covering
Fig. 102 Fixing the floor covering: Superb / Superb Combi
Read and observe
and on page 98 first.
The raised floor covering of the luggage compartment can be fixed (e.g. when
handling the spare wheel):
Superb: With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cov-
er » Fig. 102
.
Superb combi: With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment
lid » Fig. 102 -
.
Luggage net
Fig. 103
Luggage net
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
The luggage net is located on the underside of the luggage compartment cov-
er.
The net is designed for transporting lighter objects.
WARNING
Only store soft objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg in the net. Heavy ob-
jects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
CAUTION
Do not place any sharp objects into the net – risk of net damage.
Luggage compartment cover
Fig. 104
Removing/installing the luggage
compartment cover
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
Removing
Hook the support straps
1
» Fig. 104 onto the boot lid.
Place the cover in the horizontal position.
Pull the cover out of the holders
2
horizontally towards the rear.
The removed boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest.
Fitting
Push the boot cover into the brackets
2
» Fig. 104.
Hook the support straps
1
on the boot lid.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the boot cover, the vehicle occupants could
be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with some-
thing.
Note
If the retaining strips
1
are attached to the boot lid, the boot cover will rise
when you open the boot lid.
100
Operation
Roll up boot cover (Superb Combi)
Fig. 105 Roll up cargo cover: take out then pull out or roll up
Read and observe
and on page 98 first.
Extending
Pull the foldable boot cover as far as the stop into the secured position
2
» Fig. 105.
Retracting
Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow
3
» Fig. 105,
and the cover automatically rolls up into position
1
.
Press in the grip area again and the cover will roll up.
Removing/inserting
The fully rolled up luggage compartment cover can be removed (e.g. for the
transport of bulky objects).
Push on the side of the crossbar in the direction of the arrow
4
» Fig. 105
and remove the cover in the direction of the arrow
5
.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover.
Automatic Retractable cargo cover (Superb Combi)
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
The automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover enables an easier entry in-
to the boot.
Open the boot lid.
The foldable boot cover rolls up automatically in the position
1
to » Fig. 105
on page 101.
Push the cover in the area of the handle in the direction of the arrow
3
.
The cover retracts completely.
When the boot lid is opened quickly, the automatic rolling up of the foldable
boot cover is blocked for a delay time of approx. 2 seconds.
The function to automatically roll up the foldable boot cover can be activated/
deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu:
Settings
Autom. blind
Side pockets in luggage compartment
Fig. 106 Superb boot: Open side compartment left / right
101
Seats and practical features
Fig. 107
Superb Combi boot: Open right
compartment
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
Open / close compartment (Superb)
Turn the bolts in direction of arrow » Fig. 106.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
The CD changer and TV tuner are located in the right compartment » Fig. 106
.
The first-aid box can also be stored in this compartment.
Open and close compartment / (Superb Combi)
Pull the handle in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 107.
Open the compartment cover downwards.
When closing keep hold of the handle until the compartment is closed.
The CD changer and TV Tuner are housed in this compartment.
The first-aid box and warning triangle can also be stored in this compartment.
Side compartment in boot with battery
Fig. 108 Open compartment with battery: Superb / Superb Combi
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment » page 193.
Open / close compartment (Superb)
Unfasten the bolts e.g. with a coin or screwdriver in the direction of the ar-
row
1
» Fig. 108.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Open and close compartment / (Superb Combi)
For example, insert a coin in the slot
A
and lift them in the arrow direction
2
» Fig. 108.
The compartment opens out in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Close compartment (opposite to arrow direction)
3
until you hear it click.
Note
The side compartment where the battery is located is labelled in the Superb
Combi vehicles with the symbol .
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi)
Fig. 109
Removing non-lockable side
compartment
Read and observe and on page 98 first.
Increasing the size of the boot
Remove the cover of the stowage compartment in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 109.
CAUTION
When handling the side compartment, ensure that the cover and the cover
mountings are not damaged.
102
Operation
Removable light (Superb Combi)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Use light
103
Changing rechargeable light batteries 103
A removable lamp is fitted on the left side of the boot. This lamp has two func-
tions.
Lighting the luggage compartment - part
B
» Fig. 110 on page 103 illumina-
ted (lamp in holder).
Portable lamp - part
C
illuminated (lamp removed from the holder).
If the lamp is in the holder, it is automatically switched on when the boot lid is
opened and switched off again when the boot lid is closed.
The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type AAA batteries. The rechargea-
ble batteries are constantly charged when the engine is running. It takes ap-
prox. 3 hours to fully charge the rechargeable batteries.
The lamp is fitted with magnets. Therefore it is possible to attach the lamp, for
example on the vehicle body, after removing it.
CAUTION
The removable lamp is not watertight and must therefore be protected against
moisture.
Note
If the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder, it does not light up when
the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged.
If the lamp is not switched off and it is correctly inserted in the holder, the
bulbs in the front part
C
» Fig. 110 on page 103 of the lamp are automatically
switched off.
Use light
Fig. 110 Use light / remove light
Read and observe
on page 103 first.
Use light
If you press button
A
» Fig. 110 once, the lamp illuminates with 100 % light
intensity.
If you press button
A
again, the lamp illuminates with 50 % light intensity.
Press
A
button once again - the light goes out.
Remove the lamp from the holder
Grasp the lamp in the areas of the arrows
D
» Fig. 110 and swivel it in the
direction of the arrow
E
.
Reinserting the lamp the holder
First of all place the deactivated lamp in the holder on the side facing the
boot lid and then press on the lamp from the other side until it is clicks into
place.
Changing rechargeable light batteries
Read and observe
on page 103 first.
Proceed as follows if you wish to replace the faulty rechargeable batteries
yourself:
Remove the lamp.
Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed
object from the location of the lock-off clips
F
» Fig. 110 on page 103.
Remove the faulty rechargeable batteries from the lamp.
Insert the new rechargeable batteries.
103
Seats and practical features
Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it
clicks into place.
CAUTION
We recommend having faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a ŠKODA
service partner. If the lamp is not correctly opened, it can be damaged.
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batter-
ies.
The replacement rechargeable batteries must have the same specification as
the original rechargeable batteries. If other types of rechargeable batteries are
used, the power output can be reduced or it can lead to a malfunction of the
lamp.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used rechargeable batteries in accordance with national legal provi-
sions.
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Dividing the luggage compartment
104
Remove variable loading floor
104
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.
Note
The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects.
Dividing the luggage compartment
Fig. 111
Dividing the boot with variable
loading floor
Read and observe on page 104 first.
Lift up the part with the mounting and secure it by sliding it into the grooves
marked with the arrows » Fig. 111.
Remove variable loading floor
Fig. 112
Boot: Remove variable loading floor/remove carrier rails
Read and observe on page 104 first.
Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes
A
» Fig. 112 to
the left by around 90°.
Fold up and remove the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the ar-
row.
Unlock the carrier rails
B
by turning the arbour-mounted fixing eyes
C
to
the right by approx. 90°.
104
Operation
WARNING
Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened
when installing the variable loading floor. If this is not the case, there is a
risk of injury for the occupants.
Extending variable loading floor with integrated aluminium rails
and fastening elements (Superb Combi)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Partial extension of variable load floor
105
Divide boot 105
Fit and remove variable loading floor
106
Fixing set
106
Movable lashing eyes
107
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.
Note
The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects, for
example the fastening elements, removed foldable boot cover, etc.
Partial extension of variable load floor
Fig. 113 Luggage compartment: partially pulling out the variable loading
floor
Read and observe on page 105 first.
The variable loading floor can be partially pulled out over the rear bumper.
Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift gently in the
direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 113.
Extend the variable load floor over the bumper in the direction of the arrow
2
until it engages in the opening
C
.
The variable loading floor which is pulled out in such a way is solely used as a
seat, for example for changing shoes.
To push in the rear section of the variable loading floor, grasp by the handle
and lift slightly in the direction of the arrow
1
.
Push the variable loading floor against the arrow
2
to the stop.
When pulling out the variable loading floor, the front edge (close to the rear
seats) is lifted at the same time. Thus, small objects can no longer fall into the
space between the boot floor and the variable loading floor.
CAUTION
Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.
Divide boot
Fig. 114
Dividing the boot
Read and observe on page 105 first.
The boot can be divided with the variable loading floor.
Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift in the direc-
tion of the arrow
1
» Fig. 113 on page 105.
Insert the trailing edge in one of the openings
A
» Fig. 114.
The variable loading floor is secured in the openings
A
against movement.
105
Seats and practical features
The variable loading floor can be pulled out a little more before dividing the
boot with the variable loading floor » page 105. This enlarges the space be-
tween the rear seats and the separation.
CAUTION
Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.
Fit and remove variable loading floor
Fig. 115 Luggage compartment: fold up variable loading floor
Fig. 116 Luggage compartment: variable loading floor
Read and observe
on page 105 first.
The variable loading floor can be removed and reinstalled, if necessary.
Removing
Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle, raise it slightly in the direction
of the arrow
1
» Fig. 115 and pull it out over the bumper in the direction of
the arrow
2
until it engages in the opening
C
» Fig. 116.
Fold up the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow
3
» Fig. 115.
Press the safety buttons
A
» Fig. 116 and remove the floor.
Fitting
Fold up the floor and place it on the carrier rails.
Push the floor forwards until it engages in the openings
B
in the carrier
rails » Fig. 116.
Carefully press in the vicinity of the openings
C
on the floor until it clicks in-
to place, if necessary press the safety buttons
A
.
WARNING
Ensure the variable loading floor is attached correctly during installation. If
this is not the case, there is a risk of injury for the occupants.
Fixing set
Fig. 117
Telescopic pole and tensioning strap
Read and observe on page 105 first.
The fixing set can be used for dividing the boot or for securing the objects
which are being transported.
Telescopic pole
Insert the holders for the telescopic pole into the left and right openings of
the carrier rails.
Press the top part of the holder in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 117 and
simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place.
106
Operation
Tensioning strap
Insert the tensioning strap holders into the opening on the left or right carri-
er rail.
Press the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
» Fig. 117 and simultaneous-
ly push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow
4
.
Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place.
Place the object that is to be secured behind the tensioning strap.
Press the button
5
on the top side of the holder and tighten the strap.
WARNING
The objects in the boot must be firmly secured with the fixing set so that
they cannot move freely and uncontrollably and to prevent damage to ob-
jects or injuries to occupants.
Note
Do not use the fixing set to secure objects that might damage the fixing set.
The tensioning strap can also be fully reeled up by pressing the button
5
» Fig. 117.
Movable lashing eyes
Fig. 118
Move lashing eyelets
Read and observe on page 105 first.
There are four moveable lashing eyelets in the boot that can, for example, be
used to attach the fixing nets.
Press the button in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 118 and move the lashing
eyelets to the desired position in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fold up the clamp the lashing eyelets
A
and, for example, attach the fixing
net.
Net partition (Superb Combi)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Using the net partition behind the rear seats
107
Using the net partition behind the front seats 108
Removing and refitting the net partition housing 108
WARNING
The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding
back the seat cushions and backrests - they must be ready to use.
The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no ob-
jects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compart-
ment under sudden braking – risk of injury.
Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged. Only then can
the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function.
Make sure that the transverse rod is inserted into the mounts
C
» Fig. 119 on page 107 or » Fig. 120 on page 108 in the forward position.
Using the net partition behind the rear seats
Fig. 119
Net partition behind the rear
seats in the pulled out state
Read and observe on page 107 first.
Extending
Pull the net partition by the tab
A
» Fig. 119 in the direction of the fasteners
C
.
Insert the transverse rod into one of the mounts
C
and push forwards.
Insert the transverse rod into the mount
C
on the other side of the vehicle
in the same way.
107
Seats and practical features
Retracting
Pull the transverse rod back slightly first on one side and then on the other
and remove it from the mounts
C
» Fig. 119.
Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into
the housing
B
without being damaged.
Note
If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, the roll up luggage com-
partment cover can be removed » page 101.
Using the net partition behind the front seats
Fig. 120
Net partition behind the front
seats in the pulled out state
Read and observe on page 107 first.
Extending
Fold the rear seats forward » page 87.
Pull the net partition by the tab
A
» Fig. 120.
First of all insert the cross rod into the mount
C
on one side and push it for-
ward.
Insert the transverse rod into the mount
C
on the other side of the vehicle
in the same way.
Retracting
Pull the transverse rod back slightly first on one side and then on the other
and remove it from the mounts
C
» Fig. 120.
Hold the transverse rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up
into the housing
B
without being damaged.
Fold the rear seats back into their original positions » page 87.
Removing and refitting the net partition housing
Fig. 121
Rear seats: Removing the net
partition housing
Read and observe on page 107 first.
Removing
Fold the rear seats forward
» page 87.
Open the rear right door.
Push the housing
A
in the direction of the arrow
1
and remove it from the
mounts on the right seat backrests in the direction of the arrow
2
» Fig. 121.
Fitting
Insert the recesses on the housing
A
» Fig. 121 into the mounts on the rear
seat backrests.
Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow
1
as
far as the stop.
Fold the rear seats back into their original positions » page 87.
Roof rack
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Attachment points 109
Roof load
109
WARNING
The transported items on the roof rack must be securely attached – risk
of accident!
Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps
or tensioning straps.
108
Operation
WARNING (Continued)
Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system.
When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, handling of the car may change as a result of the dis-
placement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
Avoid abrupt and sudden driving/braking manoeuvres.
Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traf-
fic conditions.
The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total ve-
hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk of acci-
dent!
CAUTION
Only roof racks from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range should be used.
The fitting instructions supplied with the roof luggage rack system must be
observed when handling roof racks.
On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof or a panoramic sliding roof,
ensure that the opened sliding/tilting roof or the panoramic sliding roof does
not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof.
Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened.
The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system
and the load that is secured to it. Compare the vehicle height with available
clearances, such as underpasses and garage doors.
Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated
car wash.
Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load.
For the sake of the environment
The increased aerodynamic drag results in higher fuel consumption.
Attachment points
Does not apply to the Superb Combi.
Fig. 122 Attachment points for roof bars
Read and observe
and on page 108 first.
Installation position of the attachment points for roof bars » Fig. 122:
Forward attachment point
Rear attachment point
Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions.
CAUTION
Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the en-
closed instructions.
Roof load
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
The maximum permissible roof load (including roof rack system) of 100 kg and
the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.
The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower
load carrying capacity is used. In this case, the roof rack system must only be
loaded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions.
A
B
109
Seats and practical features
Air conditioning system
Heating, ventilation, cooling
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Air outlets 110
Using the air conditioning system economically 111
Operational problems 112
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in
the vehicle. The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up during
winter months.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling
effect.
Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air con-
ditioning system » page 114 or for Climatronic » page 117.
WARNING
For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the win-
dows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about
how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to de-
mist and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for
the use of the cooling system are to be observed.
The difference between the indoor temperature and the outdoor air
temperature should not be greater than about 5 ° C.
The cooling system is to be turned off about 10 minutes before the end
of the journey.
Once a year, a disinfection of the air conditioner or the Climatronic is to
be carried out by a specialist company.
CAUTION
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
leaves) to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a
leak.
Note
The exhaust air streams out through vents at the rear of the luggage com-
partment.
We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating
air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from
the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air condition-
ing system. This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning sys-
tem is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and
expense (replacement of compressor).
Air outlets
Fig. 123
Air vents at the front
110
Operation
Fig. 124 Air vents at the rear
Read and observe
and on page 110 first.
Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according
to the setting of control dial and the outside atmospheric conditions.
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 2,
3 » Fig. 123 and 5 » Fig. 124 - the outlets can be opened and closed individually.
Set the air flow direction
To adjust the height of the air flow, turn the horizontal vanes up or down
with the movable adjuster
A
» Fig. 123 » Fig. 124.
To change the lateral direction of the air flow, turn the vertical fins with the
movable adjuster
A
» Fig. 123 or » Fig. 124 to the left or right.
Setting the amount of airflow
Turn the knob
B
» Fig. 123 and » Fig. 124 to position
to fully open the air
outlet.
Turn the knob
B
» Fig. 123 and » Fig. 124 to position 0 to close the air outlet.
The knob can be adjusted to any position in-between.
An overview of the available settings for adjusting the direction of the air
outlet
Set the direction of the air
outlet
Active air outlet vents

1, 2
1, 2, 4, 6
2, 3, 5
4, 6
Note
Do not cover the air outlet vents with objects of any kind.
Using the air conditioning system economically
Read and observe
and on page 110 first.
The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine
when in cooling mode which will affect the fuel consumption.
It is recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the
interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order
to allow the heated air to escape.
The cooling system should not be switched on if the windows are open.
For the sake of the environment
Pollutant emissions are also lower when fuel is being saved » page 149, Eco-
nomical driving and environmental sustainability.
111
Air conditioning system
Operational problems
Read and observe and on page 110 first.
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5
°C, there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be.
One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse and replace if necessa-
ry » page 220.
The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because
the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot » page 31.
If you are not able to resolve the operational problem yourself, or if the cooler
output has reduced, switch off the cooling system and seek assistance from a
specialist garage.
Air conditioning system (manual air conditioning system)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Control elements
112
adjusting
114
Recirculated air mode
114
The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met.
The cooling system is switched on » page 112.
The engine is running.
The outside temperature is above approximately +2 °C.
The blower is switched on.
Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow out of
the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the
cooling system, fresh air mode should be selected.
The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to
provide cooling at a high load of the engine.
CAUTION
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (especially
around the feet) and large differences in temperature, for example, when get-
ting out of the vehicle, can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold.
Note
We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a spe-
cialist garage once every year.
During operation of the air conditioning, an increase in engine idle speed may
occur under certain circumstances in order to ensure sufficient heating com-
fort.
Control elements
Fig. 125 The air conditioning system: Control elements
Read and observe on page 112 first.
Functions of the individual controls » Fig. 125:
Set the temperature (turn to the left: to reduce the temperature, turn to
the right: to increase the temperature)
Set the blower level (level 0: blowers off, level 4: the highest blower
speed)
Set the direction of the air outlet » page 110
Switch the cooling system on/off
Switching the rear window heater on/off » page 75
Aux. heating on/off » page 118
Switch recirculation on/off » page 114
Control the seat heater on the front left seat » page 85
Control the seat heater on the front right seat » page 85
A
B
C
112
Operation
Note
The warning light in the symbol button  illuminates after activation, even if
not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system are
met » page 112. The operational readiness of the cooling system is indicated by
the warning light in the button illuminating.
113
Air conditioning system
adjusting
Read and observe on page 112 first.
Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes:
Settings
Control dial settings » Fig. 125 on page 112 Button » Fig. 125 on page 112
Air outlet vents 2 » Fig. 123
on page 110
A B C

Defrost/defog windscreen and
side windows
a)
Desired tempera-
ture
3 or 4
Automatically
switched on
Do not switch on
Open and align with the
side window
The fastest heating
To the stop to the
right
3
Switched off Briefly switch on Opening
Comfortable heating
Desired tempera-
ture
2 or 3
Switched off Do not switch on Opening
The fastest cooling
To the stop to the
left
briefly 4, then
2 or 3
Activated Briefly switch on Opening
Comfortable cooling
Desired tempera-
ture
1, 2 or 3
Activated Do not switch on Open and align to the roof
Fresh air mode - ventilation
To the stop to the
left
Desired position
Switched off Do not switch on Opening
a)
We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels. This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside.
We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 » Fig. 123 on page 110 in
the opened position.
Recirculated air mode
Read and observe on page 112 first.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in-
to the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in
a traffic jam.
Switching on/off
Press the
button.
The warning light in the button illuminates.
Press the
button again.
The warning light in the button goes out.
Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution con-
trol
C
» Fig. 125 on page 112 is turned to the position.
Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by pressing
the
button again.
WARNING
Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
start to mist up.
114
Operation
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning system)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Control elements
115
automatic mode 116
Switching the cooling system on/off 116
Setting the temperature 116
Recirculation mode - Version 1 117
Recirculation mode - Version 2 117
Controlling blower 118
Defrosting windscreen 118
The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best possible setting for the
temperature of the air flowing out, the blower stage and air distribution.
The system also takes sunlight into account, which eliminates the need to al-
ter the settings manually.
The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met.
The cooling system is switched on » page 112.
The engine is running.
The outside temperature is above approximately +2 °C.
The blower is switched on.
The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to
provide cooling at a high load of the engine.
Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off
On models fitted with power sliding/tilting roof with solar cells, the fresh air
blower is automatically switched over to “solar mode” if the sun rays are suffi-
cient after switching off the ignition. The solar cells on the sliding/tilting roof
deliver power for the fresh air blower. This supplies the interior of the car with
fresh air.
For an optimum ventilation, the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be
opened » Fig. 123 on page 110.
The ventilation functions only when the sliding/tilting roof is fully closed.
Note
We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage
once every year.
During operation of the Climatronic, an increase in engine idle speed can oc-
cur under certain circumstances in order to ensure adequate heating comfort.
On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted radio or radio navigation system,
the Climatronic information is also shown on their displays. This function can
be switched off, see » operating instructions for the radio or navigation sys-
tem.
Control elements
Fig. 126 Climatronic: Control elements
Functions of the individual controls » Fig. 126:
Adjust the temperature for the left side » page 116
Adjust the blower speed
» page 118
depending on equipment:
Aux. heating on/off » page 119
Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 75
Adjust the temperature for the right side » page 116
Interior temperature sensor
depending on equipment:
Recirculation mode with air quality sensor on/off » page 117, Recir-
culation mode - Version 1
Recirculation mode without air quality sensor on/off » page 117, Re-
circulation mode - Version 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
115
Air conditioning system
Switch the intensive windscreen heater on/off
Air flow to the windows
Air flow to the upper body
Air flow in the footwell
Switching the rear window heater on/off » page 75
Control the seat heater on the front left seat » page 85
Switching automatic mode on » page 116
Switching Climatronic system off
Switch the cooling system on/off » page 116
Switch the temperature setting in Dual mode on/off » page 116
Control the seat heater on the front right seat » page 85
Note
Do not stick anything on or cover the interior temperature sensor
E
, other-
wise it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic.
automatic mode
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
Recommended setting for all periods of the year
Set the required temperature between +18 °C and +26 °C: we recommend 22
°C.
Press the button

» Fig. 126 on page 115.
Set the air outlet vents 2 and 3 » Fig. 123 on page 110 so that the air flow is
directed slightly upwards.
After pressing, a warning light in the top right or left corner of the button

illuminates, depending on which mode was last selected.
If the warning light in the top right corner of the button

illuminates, the
Climatronic operates in “HIGH”-mode.
The “HIGH” mode is the standard setting of the Climatronic.
Upon pressing the

button again, the Climatronic switches to “LOW”-mode
and the warning light in the top left corner illuminates. The Climatronic uses
only in this mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the
noise level, this is more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of
the air conditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occu-
pied.




By pressing the button  again, it is changed to “HIGH”-mode.
Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing any of the air distribution
buttons or by increasing/decreasing the blower speed.
Switching the cooling system on/off
Press the button

.
The warning light in the button illuminates.
Press button

once more.
The warning light in the button goes out.
After the cooling system is switched off, only the ventilation and heating func-
tion remains active whereby the minimum temperature that can be reached is
the outside temperature.
Setting the temperature
The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately or to-
gether.
For both sides
Turn the control dial
A
» Fig. 126 on page 115 to the left or right to increase
or decrease the temperature.
The warning light in the button

does not illuminate.
For the right side
Turn the control dial
D
» Fig. 126 on page 115 to the left or right to increase
or decrease the temperature.
The warning light in the button

illuminates.
If the warning light in the symbol button

is lit, the temperature for both
sides cannot be set with the control dial
A
. This function can be restored by
pressing the symbol button

. The warning light in the button goes out.
The interior temperature can be set between +18 and +26 . The interior
temperature is regulated automatically within this range.
If a temperature lower than +18 °C is selected, a blue symbol illuminates at the
start of the numerical scale.
If a temperature higher than +26 °C is selected, a red symbol illuminates at the
start of the numerical scale.
116
Operation
At both end positions, Climatronic functions at maximum cooling/heating out-
put and the temperature is not regulated.
CAUTION
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (especially
around the feet) and large differences in temperature, for example, when get-
ting out of the vehicle, can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold.
Recirculation mode - Version 1
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in-
to the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in
a traffic jam.
If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognised by the
air quality sensor, recirculated air mode will temporarily be switched off.
If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level, the air distri-
bution control is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into
the vehicle interior.
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then
fed back into the interior.
When the automatic air distribution control is switched on, an air quality sen-
sor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air.
Switching recirculated air mode on
Repeatedly press the button
until the warning light on the left side of
the button is illuminated.
Switch on automatic air distribution control
Repeatedly press the button
until the warning light on the right-hand
side of the button illuminates.
Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily
If the air quality sensor does not switch on automatic recirculated air mode
when there is an unpleasant smell, you can switch in on manually.
Press the
button.
The warning light illuminates in the button on the left side.
Switching recirculated air mode off
Press the button

or press the symbol button
again until the warning
lights in the button go out.
WARNING
Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
start to mist up.
Note
As soon as the windscreen mists up, press the symbol button . Press the
 button once the windscreen has demisted.
The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside tempera-
ture is higher than approx. 2 °C.
Recirculation mode - Version 2
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in-
to the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in
a traffic jam.
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then
fed back into the interior.
The air recirculation mode is automatically activated after the ignition is
switched if it was on before the ignition was turned off. The warning light in
the button illuminates.
Switch off / on
Press the
button.
The warning light in the button goes out.
Press the
button again.
The warning light in the button illuminates.
WARNING
Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
start to mist up.
117
Air conditioning system
Note
As soon as the windscreen mists up, press the symbol button . Press the
 button once the windscreen has demisted.
Controlling blower
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with
the interior temperature.
However, the blower stages can be manually adapted to suit your particular
needs.
Repeatedly pressing the symbol button
on the left or right reduces or in-
creases blower speed.
If the blower is switched off, the Climatronic system is switched off.
The set blower speed is displayed above the symbol button
when the re-
spective number of warning lights illuminate.
WARNING
“Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce atten-
tion levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an ac-
cident increases.
Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary.
Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up.
Defrosting windscreen
Switching on
Press the
button » Fig. 126 on page 115.
Press the
button » Fig. 126 on page 115.
Switching off
Press the symbol button
again or press the symbol button

.
Press the
button again.
More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 » Fig. 123 on page 110. The tempera-
ture control is controlled automatically.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Switching on/off
119
Radio remote control 120
Functional requirements of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion)
The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.
The fuel supply is adequate (the warning icon
is not lit in the display of
the instrument cluster).
Auxiliary ventilation
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by
switching off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively de-
creased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).
Additional heating (hereinafter only as a aux. heating)
The auxiliary heating can be used when both when stationary, when the en-
gine is switched off, to preheat the vehicle and also while driving (e.g. during
the heating phase of the engine).
The aux. heating functions in connection with the air conditioning system or
Climatronic.
The auxiliary heating also warms up the engine. This is not valid for vehicles
with the 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.
The auxiliary heating warms up the coolant by combusting fuel from the vehi-
cle tank. This warms the air flowing into the passenger compartment (if the
blower is turned on).
Depending on the environmental conditions, the automatic on or off of the
heater occurs, which causes the best possible conditions for the engine run-
ning and the interior heating.
For vehicles with petrol engines, the automatic switching on and off of the
heater can be disabled at a specialist workshop.
118
Operation
WARNING
The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms (e.g. garag-
es) – risk of poisoning!
The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk
of fire.
The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
the vehicle. If you want to use the heater, then the car should not be
parked in places where the exhaust gases can come into contact with flam-
mable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel or simi-
lar - Risk of fire.
CAUTION
The running auxiliary heater consumes fuel from the vehicle tank and auto-
matically controls the filling level. If only a low quantity of fuel is present in the
fuel tank, the auxiliary heating switches off.
The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the underside
of the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked.
If the auxiliary heating is running, the vehicle battery discharges. If the auxili-
ary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer peri-
od, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to recharge the vehi-
cle battery.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
leaves) to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.
Note
The auxiliary heating switches on the blower
B
» Fig. 125 on page 112
or » Fig. 126 on page 115 only if it has achieved a coolant temperature of ap-
prox. 50 °C.
At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in
the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operat-
ing problem.
So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the aux-
iliary heating, you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected
by you, leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open po-
sition. It is recommended to put the air flow in the position
or
.
Switching on/off
Fig. 127 Button for switching on/off the system directly on the operating
part of the air conditioning/Climatronic
Read and observe
and on page 119 first.
The auxiliary heating can be switched on/off as follows.
Manually switching on
using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning/Cli-
matronic. The warning light in the button illuminates » Fig. 127.
by using the radio remote control » page 120.
Manually switching off
using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning/Cli-
matronic. The warning light in the button goes out » Fig. 127,
by using the radio remote control » page 120.
After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump still runs for a short
period.
Automatic switching on/off
The following menu items can be selected from the Aux. heating menu item in
the information display » page 47 (depending on the vehicle equipment):
Day of the week - set the current day of the week;
Running time - Set the required running time in 5 minute increments. The
running time can be 10 to 60 minutes.
Mode - Set the desired heating/ventilation mode;


119
Air conditioning system
Starting time 1, Starting time 2, Starting time 3 - for each pre-set time, the
day and the time (hour and minute) can be set for switching on the auxiliary
heating. An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when
selecting the day. If this empty position is selected, the activation is per-
formed without taking into account the day.
Activate - Activate pre-set mode;
Deactivate - Deactivate pre-set mode;
Factory settings - Restore factory settings
Back - Return to main menu
Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.
After the auxiliary heating activates automatically at the set time, it is neces-
sary to pre-set a time again.
If the menu item Back is selected or no changes are made on the display for
longer than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the pre-set time is not
activated.
The system switches itself off at the end of the running time set under the
menu item Running time.
Note
A warning light on the button » Fig. 127 illuminates when the system is run-
ning.
Radio remote control
Fig. 128
Auxiliary heater: Radio remote
control
Read and observe and on page 119 first.
Explanation of graphic » Fig. 128
Aerial
Warning light
Switch on the auxiliary heating
Switch off the auxiliary heating
The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote con-
trol. The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle.
When the battery is fully charged, the range of the remote control is a few
hundred metres. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad
weather conditions and a weaker battery in the remote control can clearly re-
duce the range.
To switch the auxiliary heating on or off, hold the remote control vertically,
with the aerial
A
pointing upwards. The antenna must not be covered with
the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process.
The auxiliary heating can only be switched on/off safely using the radio re-
mote control, if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle
is at least 2 m.
After pressing the button, the warning light in the remote control gives the
user different kinds of feedback:
Display warning light
B
» Fig. 128 Meaning
Lights up green for around 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heating has been
switched on.
Lights up red for around 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heating has been
switched off.
Slowly flashes green for around 2 sec-
onds.
The ignition signal was not received.
Quickly flashes green for around 2
seconds.
The auxiliary heating is blocked, e. g
because the tank is nearly empty or
there is a fault in the auxiliary heat-
ing.
Flashes red for around 2 seconds.
The switch off signal was not re-
ceived.
Lights up orange for around 2 sec-
onds, then green or red.
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was re-
ceived.
A
B


120
Operation
Display warning light
B
» Fig. 128 Meaning
Lights up orange for around 2 sec-
onds, then flashes green or red.
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was not re-
ceived.
Flashes orange for around 5 seconds.
The battery is discharged, however
the switching on or off signal was not
received.
Replace the battery » page 216.
CAUTION
The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore
be protected against water, severe impacts and direct sunlight.
Communication and multimedia
General information
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems 121
Universal telephone preinstallation (hands-free) 122
Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel 122
Symbols in the MAXI DOT display 123
Phone Phonebook 124
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems
ŠKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems
with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission
power of up to 10 watts.
Please ask at a specialist workshop about installing and operating mobile
phones and two-way radio systems that have a transmission power of more
than 10 W.
Operating mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with the
functionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle.
This could be for the following reasons.
no external aerial.
external aerial incorrectly installed.
transmission power greater than 10 watts.
WARNING
If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in a vehicle with-
out an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incor-
rectly, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the
vehicle.
Two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts must not be installed
on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags.
121
Communication and multimedia
WARNING (Continued)
Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in any area
where it can become a projectile during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an
accident or a collision — risk of injury.
Before transport of the vehicle by air, the Bluetooth
®
function must be
switched off by a specialist company.
Universal telephone preinstallation (hands-free)
The universal telephone preinstallation (hands-free system) includes a con-
venience mode for the mobile phone via voice control, the multifunction steer-
ing wheel and the radio or navigation system.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
Only use the device in such a way that you are in full control of your vehi-
cle in every traffic situation – there is the risk of accidents!
The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be
observed.
Note
We recommend that mobile phones and two-way radio systems be installed
in the vehicle by a specialist workshop.
Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth
®
communication are compatible
with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III. Ask a ŠKODA
Partner whether your phone is compatible with the universal telephone prepa-
ration GSM II or GSM III.
The range of the Bluetooth
®
connection to the hands-free system is restric-
ted to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obsta-
cles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your
mobile phone is in a jacket pocket, for example, this can lead to difficulties
when establishing a connection with the hands-free-system or transferring
data.
Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel
Fig. 129
Multifunction steering wheel: Control buttons for the telephone
There are buttons in the steering wheel for easy operation of the basic func-
tions of the phone » Fig. 129 so that the driver is distracted from the traffic as
little as possible when using the phone.
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal tele-
phone installation at the factory.
The buttons control the functions for the operating mode of the current tele-
phone.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel are illuminated.
122
Operation
Button/
wheel
» Fig. 129
Action Function
1
Press briefly (MUTE )
1
Turn upwards Increase volume
1
Turn downwards Decrease volume
2
Press briefly
Accept a call/end a call
Display of the basic Phone menu Main Phone menu List of dialled numbers Call selected contact
2
Press button for a long period
of time
Reject the incoming call
3
Turn up/down Previous / next menu item
3
Press briefly Confirm selected menu item
3
Press button for a long period
of time
Continuously display first letter of the phone book
3
Quickly turn upwards To the previous initial letter in the telephone book
3
Quickly turn downwards To the next initial letter in the telephone book
4
Press briefly Return to previous level in the menu
4
Press button for a long period
of time
Exit telephone menu
Symbols in the MAXI DOT display
Symbol Meaning Valid for
Charge status of the telephone battery
a)
GSM II, GSM III
Signal strength
a)
GSM II, GSM III
A phone is connected with the hands-free system. GSM II, GSM III when connected via the HFP profile
The hands-free system is visible to other devices GSM II, GSM III when connected via the HFP profile
A phone is connected with the hands-free system. GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
The hands-free system is visible to other devices GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
A multimedia unit is connected to the hands-free system GSM II, GSM III
A UMTS network is available GSM III
Internet connection via the hands-free system GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
a)
This function is only supported by some mobile phones.
123
Communication and multimedia
Phone Phonebook
A phone phonebook is part of the hands-free system. This phone phonebook
can be used depending on the type of mobile phone.
After the telephone's first connection to the hands-free system, the phone
book from the phone and the SIM card loads into the hands-free memory.
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-
free system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating
can take a few minutes. During this period, the available phone book is the one
stored at the previous update. Newly stored telephone numbers are only
shown after the updating has ended.
The update is interrupted if a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call,
voice control dialogue) occurs during the updating procedure. After the tele-
phone event has ended, the updating starts anew.
GSM II
The internal phonebook provides 2,500 free memory locations. Each contact
can contain up to 4 numbers.
On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system, a maximum of 1,200
telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance.
If the number of loaded contacts exceeds 2,500, the phone book is not com-
plete.
GSM III
The internal phonebook provides 2000 free memory locations. Each contact
can contain up to 5 numbers.
On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system, a maximum of 1000
telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance.
If the mobile phone's telephone book has more than 2,000 contacts, the fol-
lowing message will appear in the MAXI DOTdisplay:
Phone book not fully loaded
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system
124
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 125
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following func-
tions.
Phone Phonebook » page 124.
Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering
wheel » page 122.
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display » page 122.
Voice control of the telephone » page 131.
Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 134.
All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle's hands-free sys-
tem is established with the help of Bluetooth
®
technology.
Note
The following guidelines must be observed » page 121, Mobile phones and
two-way radio systems.
Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system
To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, the two devices must
be paired. Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions
for your mobile phone.
The following steps must be carried out for the connection.
Activate Bluetooth
®
and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele-
phone.
Switch on the ignition.
Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
the hands-free system has completed the search.
Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
Confirm the PIN
1)
.
1)
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
is either displayed, or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually.
124
Operation
If the hands-free system announces (as standard SKODA_BT) on the display
of the mobile phone, enter the PIN
1)
within 30 seconds and wait, until the
connection is established
2)
.
To finish pairing, confirm the creation of the new user profile in the MAXI
DOT display.
If there is no free space available to create a new user profile, delete an exist-
ing user profile.
During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected
with the hands-free system.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands-free system, whereby
only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system.
The visibility of the hands-free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes
after the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile
phone has connected to the hands-free system.
Restoring the visibility of the hands-free system
If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free
system within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition, the visibility of the
hands-free system can be re-established for 3 minutes in the following ways.
By turning the ignition off and on.
By turning voice control off and on.
In the Bluetooth - Visibility menu in the MAXI DOT display.
Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone
After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for
the already paired mobile phone
2)
. Check on your mobile phone if the automatic
connection has been established.
Disconnecting the connection
By withdrawing the ignition key.
By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone.
By disconnecting the user in the Bluetooth - Users menu item in the MAXI
DOT display.
Solving connection problems
If the hands-free system reports No paired phone found, check the operating
status of the mobile phone.
Is the mobile phone switched on?
Is the PIN code entered?
Is Bluetooth
®
active?
Is the visibility of the mobile phone active?
Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands-free system?
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
The following menu items can be selected from the Phone menu.
Phone book
Dial number
3)
Call register
Voice mailbox
Bluetooth
3)
Settings
4)
Back
Phone book
The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone
memory and the mobile phone SIM card.
Dial number
Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item. The re-
quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel
and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. You can select digits 0 - 9,
symbols
,
, # and the Cancel, Call and Delete functions.
1)
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
is either displayed, or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually.
2)
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth
®
connection
is completed by inputting a code. If the authorisation input is required, it must always be performed
when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.
3)
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga-
tion system menu; refer to the » Operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
4)
This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system.
125
Communication and multimedia
Call register
The following menu items can be selected in the Call register menu item.
Missed calls - List of missed calls
Dialled nos. - List of dialled numbers
Received calls - list of received calls
Voice mailbox
In the Voice mailbox menu item, you can set the number of the voice mailbox
1)
and then dial the number.
Bluetooth
The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item.
User - Overview of the stored telephones
New user - Search for new mobile phones in reception range
Visibility - Switches on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devi-
ces
Media player - Playback via Bluetooth
®
Active device - Connected device
Paired devices - List of paired devices
Find - Device search
Phone name - option to change the name of the phone (default SKODA_BT)
Settings
The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item.
Phone book - Phonebook
Update
1)
- Update the phone book
List - Arrange the entries in the phone book
Surname - Arrange according to surname
Surname - Sort by contact name
Ring tone - Ring tone setting
Back
Return to the telephone's basic menu.
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Connecting the phone to the hands-free system
127
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 128
Internet connection via Bluetooth
®
129
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM III comprises the following func-
tions.
Phone Phonebook » page 124.
Convenience operation via the multifunction steering wheel » page 122.
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display » page 128.
Voice control of the telephone » page 131.
Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 134.
Internet connection » page 129.
Display of SMS messages » page 128.
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your
vehicle can only be established with the help of the following profiles of Blue-
tooth
®
technology.
rSAP - Remote SIM access profile
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP pro-
file, the telephone deregisters from the GSM network, and communication
with the network is only enabled by the hands-free system via the vehicle's
external aerial. In the telephone only the interface for Bluetooth
®
remains ac-
tive. In this case, you can only use the mobile phone to disconnect from the
hands-free system, deactivate the Bluetooth
®
connection or dial the emergen-
cy number 112 (only valid in some countries).
HFP - Hands Free Profile
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP pro-
file, the telephone continues to use its GSM module and the internal antenna
to communicate with the GSM network.
1)
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga-
tion system menu; refer to the » Operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
126
Operation
Note
The following guidelines must be observed » page 121, Mobile phones and
two-way radio systems.
Connecting the phone to the hands-free system
To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to in-
terconnect the telephone and hands-free system. Detailed information on this
is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone. The following
steps must be carried out for the connection.
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile
Activate Bluetooth
®
and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele-
phone. For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP
function.
Switch on the ignition.
Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
the hands-free system has completed the search.
Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
Confirm the PIN
1)
.
If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code, enter the PIN code for the SIM card
in your phone. The telephone connects to the hands-free system (during the
first connection you can only enter the PIN code in the MAXI DOT display
when the vehicle is stationary, as this is the only situation when you can
choose whether the PIN code should be stored).
To save a new user, follow the instructions in the MAXI DOT display.
Reconfirm the rSAP command on your mobile phone to download the tele-
phone book and the identification data from the SIM card into the hands-free
system.
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HPP profile
Activate Bluetooth
®
and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele-
phone.
Switch on the ignition.
Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
the hands-free system has completed the search.
Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
Confirm the PIN
1)
.
Follow the instructions on the MAXI DOT display and the mobile phone to
store a new user or to download the telephone book and identification data
from the SIM card into the hands-free system.
The telephone primarily connects via the rSAP profile.
If the PIN code was stored, the telephone is automatically detected and con-
nected with the hands-free system the next time the ignition is switched on.
Check your mobile phone to see whether this automatic connection has been
established.
Disconnecting the connection
By removing the key from the ignition lock (the connection is disconnected
during a telephone call).
By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone.
Select the user by disconnecting the user in the MAXI DOT display in the
Bluetooth - User menu option - Disconnect.
On vehicles which are fitted with a radio or navigation system at the factory, it
is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ig-
nition lock by pressing the button on the touchscreen of the radio
2)
or naviga-
tion system; refer to the » Operating instructions for the radio or navigation
system.
Note
In the memory of the hands-free system, up to three users can be stored,
whereby the hands-free system can only communicate actively with one user.
If a connection is established with a fourth mobile phone, one of the users
must be deleted.
When connecting to the hands-free system, follow the instructions on your
mobile phone.
1)
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
will either be displayed, or a 16-digit code displayed in the MAXI DOTdisplay will need to be entered into
your mobile phone and confirmed within 30 seconds by following the instructions on your mobile phone
display.
2)
Does not apply for Radio Swing.
127
Communication and multimedia
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
If no phone is connected to the hands-free system, the message No paired
phone found appears along with the following menu items when the Phone
menu is selected.
Help - This menu item appears when no paired phone is stored in the memo-
ry of the hands-free system.
Connect - This menu item appears when one or more paired phones are stor-
ed in the memory of the hands-free system.
New user - New phone
Media player - Media player
Active device - Connected device
Paired devices - List of paired devices
Find - Device search
Visibility - Visibility on/off
SOS - Emergency call
If a telephone is paired with the hands-free system, the following menu items
can be selected in the Phone menu.
Phone book
The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone
memory and the mobile phone SIM card.
The following functions are available for each phone contact.
Display telephone number
Voice tag - Voice tag for the contact
Play - Play a voice tag
Record - Record a voice contact
Dial number
Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item. The re-
quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel
and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. You can select digits 0 - 9,
symbols +,
, # and the Delete, Call and Back functions.
Call register
The following menu items can be selected in the Call register menu item.
Missed calls - List of missed calls
Received calls - list of received calls
Dialled nos. - List of dialled numbers
Delete lists - Delete call registers
Voice mailbox
In the Voice mailbox menu item, you can set or save the number of the voice
mailbox and then dial the number. The required numbers must be selected one
after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjust-
ment wheel. You can select digits 0 - 9, symbols +,
, # and the Delete, Call,
Store and Back functions.
Messages
1)
A list of received text messages is displayed in the Messages menu item. After
calling a message, the following functions appear.
Show - Display text message
Read - The system reads out the selected text message through the vehi-
cle's speakers
Send time - Display message send time
Call back - Dial the phone number of the sender of the text message
Copy - Copy the received text message to the SIM card of your mobile phone
Delete - Delete the message
Bluetooth
The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item.
User - Overview of the stored telephones
Connect - Connection with the telephone
Disconnect - Disconnection of telephone
Rename - Rename the telephone
Delete - Delete the telephone
New user - Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range
Visibility - Switches on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devi-
ces
Media player - Media player
Active device - Connected device
Paired devices - List of paired devices
Connect - Connection with the device
Rename - Rename the device
Delete - Delete the device
Authorisation - Authorise the device
1)
Only applies when connecting the telephone to the hands-free system via the rSAP profile.
128
Operation
Search - Search for available media players
Visibility - Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for media play-
ers in the vicinity
Modem - overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to the
internet
Active device - Connected device
Paired devices - List of paired devices
Phone name - option to change the name of the phone (default SKODA_BT)
WLAN
Wi-Fi menu item» page 131, Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display.
Settings
The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item.
Phone book - Phonebook
Update - Read in the phone book
Select memory - Select memory with phone contacts
SIM & phone - Download the contacts of the SIM card and the phone
SIM card - Download the contacts from the SIM card
Phone - Initial setting to also import contacts from the SIM card; it is nec-
essary to switch to the SIM & phone menu item
List - Arrange the entries in the phone book
Surname - Arrange according to surname
Surname - Sort by contact name
Own number - Optionally display your own telephone number on the display
of the device of the person you are calling (this function is network-depend-
ent)
Network depnd. - Network-dependent own number display
Yes - Allow display of your own number
No - Prohibit display of your own number
Signal settings - Signal settings
Ring tone - Ring tone setting
Volume - Signal volume settings
Turn vol. up - Increase volume
Turn vol. down - Decrease volume
Phone settings - Phone settings
Select operator - Select operator
Automatic - Automatic operator selection
Manual - Manual operator selection
Network mode - Network mode
UMTS - UMTS
GSM - GSM
Automatic - automatic
SIM mode - Applies to telephones with the rSAP profile that simultaneously
support the operation of two SIM cards - there is an option to choose which
SIM card to connect to the hands-free system
SIM mode 1 - SIM 1 is connected to the hands-free system
SIM mode 2 - SIM 2 is connected to the hands-free system
Phone mode - Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode
Premium - rSAP mode
Hands-free - HFP mode
Off time - Set the off time in increments of 5 min
Access point - Set the Internet access point
APN - Change the access point name
User name - User Name
Password - Password
Switch off ph. - Switch off the hands-free system (the mobile phone remains
paired)
Back
Return to the main menu in the MAXI DOT display.
Internet connection via Bluetooth
®
A notebook can, for example, be connected to the Internet via the hands-free
system.
The control unit of the hands-free system supports the GPRS, EDGE and
UMTS/3G technologies.
An Internet can only be established via a telephone which is connected via the
rSAP profile.
The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type
and version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be
connected. Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate
knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device .
Sequence for connection
Connect the mobile phone with the hands-free system.
Set the access point in the Phone - Settings - Access point menu (depending
on the operator, usually “Internet”).
129
Communication and multimedia
Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devices in the
Phone - Bluetooth - Visibility menu.
Use the device that is to be connected to search for available Bluetooth
®
de-
vices.
Select the hands-free system (as standard “SKODA_BT”) from the list of
found devices.
Enter the password on the device being connected and follow any instruc-
tions given on this device or in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
Enter the desired Internet address in the Internet browser. The operating
system requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access
(depending on the operator, usually “*99#”).
Wi-Fi
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Switching Wi-Fi network on/off
130
Connecting an external device to the WLAN network 130
Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display 131
WLAN (also Wi-Fi) is a wireless network for connecting to the Internet.
Using a mobile phone connected with the universal telephone preparation
GSM III via the rSAP profile, it is possible to establish a Wi-Fi network in the ve-
hicle and to enable passengers with compatible devices to connect to this net-
work.
Switching Wi-Fi network on/off
Switching on
Connect the mobile phone with the universal telephone preparation GSM III
via the rSAP profile » page 127.
Select the Wi-Fi menu item in the Phone menu.
The display shows the message Switch on Wi-Fi??
Select the Yes menu item.
If no access point
1)
is assigned automatically, then this must be entered man-
ually as per the instructions from the mobile network operator, e.g. “Internet”.
If the Wi-Fi network is switched on, the display will show the following mes-
sage, for example: WLAN SK_WLAN 1234 switched on.
The display then shows a password for the Wi-Fi network connection. The
password can subsequently be found in the Phone - Wi-Fi - Password - Show
menu.
If no data connection via WLAN is available, the display will show the message
Data connection not available.. This can be caused by a weak GSM signal, for
example. Try to establish the connection again at a location with stronger sig-
nal reception.
Switching off
Select the Wi-Fi - Off menu item in the Phone menu.
The display shows the message Switch off Wi-Fi?
Select the OK menu item.
The display shows the message Wi-Fi switch off.
Connecting an external device to the WLAN network
Connecting using the Wi-Fi network search
Switch on the Wi-Fi network » page 130, Switching Wi-Fi network on/off.
On the device to be connected, search for available WLAN networks (Wi-Fi) -
see operating instructions for the device to be connected.
Select the appropriate Wi-Fi network connection in the menu of the net-
works found (e.g. Wi-Fi SK_WLAN 1234).
If menu item WPA2 is set in the Phone - Wi-Fi - Settings - Encryption menu,
then the password displayed when the Wi-Fi is switched on must be entered
in the device to be connected. The password can be found in the Phone - Wi-Fi
- Password - Show menu.
If menu item Open is set in the Phone - Wi-Fi - Settings - Encryption menu,
the connection is made automatically.
Connecting using WPS (service for easy connection)
Switch on the Wi-Fi network » page 130, Switching Wi-Fi network on/off.
Open the Phone - Wi-Fi - WPS config. menu in the instrument cluster.
In the device to be connected, select the connection using WPS function -
see operating instructions for the device to be connected.
1)
The name of the access point is defined by the mobile operator.
130
Operation
If the Pushbutton menu item is selected in the instrument cluster, the Wi-Fi
connection is made automatically.
If the WPS PIN menu item is selected in the instrument cluster, then a PIN
must be entered in the device to be connected and the instrument cluster.
Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display
When a Wi-Fi network is switched on, the following menu items are displayed
when the Wi-Fi menu item is selected:
Off - Switch off the WLAN network (depending on the context)
Device list - Display a list of external devices
Active device - Display a list of active devices
Block - Block device connections
Known devices - Display a list of known devices
Rename - Rename the device
Block - Block device connections
Device blocked - Display of a list of blocked devices
Unblock - Remove the connection block
Delete lists - Delete device lists
Known devices - Delete the list of known devices
Device blocked - Delete the list of blocked devices
Both lists - Delete both device lists
Password - Use of password to log on to the WLAN network
Show - Display a password to log on to the WLAN network
Generate - Generate a new password to log on to the WLAN network
Wi-Fi Name - Use of WLAN network name
Show - Display the WLAN network name
Rename - Rename the WLAN network
WPS config. - Wi-Fi network connection using WPS
Pushbutton - Automatic connection
WPS PIN - PIN entry for the connection
Data counter - Display information about the volume of data transferred
Current Connection - display of the volume of data transferred for the cur-
rent connection
Total - Display of the total volume of data transferred
Reset - Resetting of the information about the volume of data transferred
Settings - WLAN network settings
Access point - Access point settings
Settings - Access point management
APN - Change the access point name
User name - User Name
Password - Password
Reset - Reset access point factory settings
Prioritisation - Set the connection priority
Calls - Set the connection priority for calls
Data - Set the connection priority for data transfer
Encryption- Set the encryption
WPA2 - Enable WPA 2 encryption
Open - No encryption
Visibility - Set the WLAN network visibility
Visible - WLAN network is visible to other devices
Invisible - WLAN network is not visible to other devices
Data roaming - Set the data roaming
No roaming - Data roaming is not allowed
Allow - Data roaming is allowed
Always ask - Question setting for data roaming
Wi-Fi Channel - Select WLAN network channels (preferably set to channel
11)
Channel 1 ... Channel 11 - Display the WLAN network channels
Reset - Reset Wi-Fi network factory settings
Voice control
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Dialogue
132
Voice commands - GSM II 133
Voice commands - GSM III 133
131
Communication and multimedia
Dialogue
Fig. 130 Multifunction steering wheel
The voice control system (hereinafter referred to as the system) makes it pos-
sible to use voice commands for some functions of the hands-free system.
The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice com-
mands and to carry them out is called a dialogue. The system gives audible
feedback and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions.
Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors.
Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses.
Avoid a bad pronunciation.
Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, to reduce or stop disturbing exte-
rior noise.
It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your
voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise.
During the dialogue, limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers talk-
ing at the same time.
Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.
The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and di-
rected to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front
passenger can operate the equipment.
Entering a phone number
The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually
spoken digits (the whole number at once) or in the form of digital blocks (sepa-
rated by short pauses). After each order of digits (separation through brief
voice pause) all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system.
The digits 0 - 9, symbols +, , # are permitted. The system detects no continu-
ous digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken dig-
its (two, three).
Activating voice control - GSM II
Briefly press button
1
» Fig. 130 on the multifunction steering wheel.
Deactivating voice control - GSM II
If the system is currently playing a message, you will need to end the message
currently being played by briefly pressing the button
1
on the multi function
steering wheel.
If the system is expecting a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself
as follows.
With the CANCEL voice command.
Briefly press button
1
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Activating voice control - GSM III
The dialogue can be started at any time by pressing the button
1
» Fig. 130
on the multifunction steering wheel
1)
.
Deactivating voice control - GSM III
If the system is currently playing a message, the message that is currently be-
ing played must be terminated by pressing the button
1
» Fig. 130 on the
multi function steering wheel.
If the system is expecting a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself
as follows.
With the CANCEL voice command.
Briefly press button
1
» Fig. 130 on the multifunction steering wheel.
Note
The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted.
The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction
steering wheel with telephone control.
On vehicles that are factory fitted with the Columbus navigation system, it is
only possible to operate the voice control for the telephone via this de-
vice» Operating instructions for the Columbus navigation system, chap-
ter Voice control for the navigation system.
1)
Not valid for vehicles with the Columbus navigation system.
132
Operation
Voice commands - GSM II
Basic voice commands
Voice command Action
HELP
After this command the system repeats all possible
commands.
CALL XYZ
This command calls up the contact from the phone
book.
PHONE BOOK
After this command, for example, the phone book
can be repeated back to you, a voice entry for the
contact can be updated or deleted, etc.
CALL REGISTER Lists of dialled numbers, missed calls, etc.
DIAL NUMBER
After this command, a telephone number can be
entered to establish a connection with the reques-
ted party.
REDIAL
After this command the system calls the last dial-
led number.
MUSIC
a)
Play music from the mobile phone or another
paired device.
FURTHER OPTIONS
After this command the system offers additional
context-dependent commands.
SETTINGS Selection for setting Bluetooth
®
, dialogue etc.
CANCEL The dialogue is ended.
a)
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga-
tion system menu; refer to the » Operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Pardon?”, and a
new entry can be made. After the 2nd unsuccessful attempt, the system re-
peats the help. After the 3rd unsuccessful attempt the answer “Cancelled” is
given and the dialogue is ended.
Store voice recording of a contact
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you
can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book -
Voice tag - Record menu item.
Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the FURTHER
OPTIONS menu.
Voice commands - GSM III
Basic voice commands
Voice command Action
HELP
After this command the system repeats all possible
commands.
CALL NAME
After this command, a name can be entered to es-
tablish a connection with the requested party.
DIAL NUMBER
After this command, a telephone number can be
entered to establish a connection with the reques-
ted party.
REDIAL The last selected telephone number is selected.
READ ADDRESS BOOK
The system reads out contacts from the telephone
book.
READ MESSAGES
The system reads the messages which were re-
ceived while the telephone was connected to the
control unit.
SHORT DIALOGUE
The help is significantly reduced (good operating
knowledge provided).
LONG DIALOGUE The help is not reduced (suitable for beginners).
CANCEL The dialogue is ended.
If the system does not recognise the command, it repeats the first part of the
help thus enabling a new entry to be completed. After the 2nd unsuccessful
attempt the system repeats the second part of the help. After the 3rd unsuc-
cessful attempt the answer “Cancelled” is given and the dialogue is ended.
Store voice recording of a contact
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you
can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book -
Voice tag - Record menu item.
Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the FURTHER
OPTIONS menu.
133
Communication and multimedia
Multimedia
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Music playback via Bluetooth
®
134
Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering
wheel 134
AUX- and MDIinputs 135
CD changer 136
DVD-preinstallation 136
Music playback via Bluetooth
®
The universal telephone preinstallation makes it possible to play back music
via Bluetooth
®
from devices such as MP3 players, mobile phones or notebooks.
To ensure the music can be played back via Bluetooth
®
, you must first pair the
device with the hands-free system in the Phone - Bluetooth - Media player
menu.
The music playback process is performed on the connected device.
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played
back via the hands-free system can be controlled with the remote con-
trol » page 133, Voice commands - GSM II.
Note
The device being connected must support the Bluetooth
®
A2DP profile; refer
to the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected.
Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel
Fig. 131
Multifunction steering wheel: control buttons
The multifunction steering wheel has buttons for operating the basic func-
tions of factory fitted radio and navigation system » Fig. 131.
The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices.
A description is included in the relevant operating instructions.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel are illuminated.
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio, au-
dio, video or navigation system.
The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons.
Button/
wheel
» Fig. 131
Action Radio TV Audio sources DVD video Navigation
1
Press Change audio source
2
Press Switch tone off/on (MUTE
)
Interrupt current
navigation an-
nouncement
2
Turn upwards Increase volume
134
Operation
Button/
wheel
» Fig. 131
Action Radio TV Audio sources DVD video Navigation
2
Turn downwards Decrease volume
3
Press briefly
Skip to next channel
Skip to next chan-
nel
Skip to next track
Skip to next chap-
ter
without function
Stop traffic report
3
Press button for a
long period of
time
without function Fast forward without function
4
Press briefly
Switch to previous channel
Switch to previous
channel
Switch to start of
track
a)
Switch to previous
chapter
without function
Stop traffic report
4
Press button for a
long period of
time
without function Fast rewind without function
5
Turn upwards
Switch to the previous station and at the
same time
display list of saved/available stations
Skip to next chan-
nel
Skip to next track
Skip to next chap-
ter
Show the option
to stop naviga-
tion or display
the list of recent
destinations
5
Turn downwards
Switch to the next station and at the same
time
display list of saved/available stations
Switch to previous
channel
Switch to start of
track
a)
Switch to previous
chapter
6
Press briefly Call up the main menu
a)
To go to the previous track, press the adjustment wheel twice or rotate it by two positions.
AUX- and MDIinputs
The AUX and MDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources (e.g. iPod
or mp3 player) and to play back music from these devices via the factory fitted
radio or navigation system.
The AUX input for external audio sources is located below the armrest of the
front seats and is marked with the symbol.

1)
.
The MDI input is located in the storage compartment below the front armrest.
For a description of use, refer to the relevant operating instructions for the ra-
dio or navigation system.
1)
For vehicles with the navigation system Amundsen + the AUX input located on the front panel of the
navigation device » manual of the navigation system Amundsen +.
135
Communication and multimedia
CD changer
Fig. 132
The CD changer
The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the right side
compartment of the boot.
Inserting the CD
Touch the button
C
» Fig. 132 and guide the CD (compact disc) into the CD
case
B
.
The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD chang-
er. The warning light in the corresponding button
D
stops flashing.
Filling the CD changer with CDs
Press and hold the button
C
» Fig. 132 for longer than 2 seconds and guide
the CDs one after the other (maximum 6 CDs) into the CD case
B
.
The warning lights in the buttons
D
stop flashing.
Inserting a CD at a specific position
Press the button
C
» Fig. 132.
The warning lights in the buttons
D
illuminate the memory spaces that are al-
ready assigned and flash in the case of free memory spaces.
Touch the desired button
D
and guide the CD into the CD case
B
.
Ejecting a CD
Press the button
A
» Fig. 132 to eject a CD.
For assigned memory spaces, the warning lights now illuminates in the but-
tons
D
.
Press the corresponding button
D
. The CD is ejected.
Ejecting all CDs
Press and hold the button
A
» Fig. 132 for more than 2 seconds to eject the
CDs.
All CDs in the CD changer are ejected consecutively.
Note
Insert a CD, with the labelled side facing up, into the CD slot
B
» Fig. 132
until it is automatically drawn in. The play function will start automatically.
After loading a CD into the CD changer, wait until the warning light of the
corresponding button
D
is illuminated. Then the CD case
B
is free to load the
next CD.
If a position is selected, on which a CD is already located, this CD is ejected.
Remove the ejected CD and load the desired CD.
DVD-preinstallation
Fig. 133 Seat backrest - left front seat/right front seat
DVD preinstallation » Fig. 133
Openings for attachment of DVD player holder
Audio/video input
Connection input, DVD player
Only one DVD preinstallation is factory-installed in the seat backrest of the
front seat.
The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from ŠKODA original
accessories. For a description of the use, refer to the operating instructions for
these devices and equipment.
A
B
C
136
Operation
WARNING
If there are passengers on the rear seats, the DVD player holder must not
be used on its own (without the DVD player) - risk of injury!
The inclination of the holder can be adjusted to three pre-set positions.
Be careful not to injure fingers between the holder and the backrest when
changes to the position of the DVD player holder are made.
The DVD player holder must not be used when the rear seat backrest or
the rear seat is folded forward or has been removed completely.
Note
Follow the instructions given in the operating instructions of the DVD player
holder/DVD player.
137
Communication and multimedia
Driving
Starting off and Driving
Starting and stopping the engine using the key
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Electronic immobilizer
139
Ignition Switch 139
Starting the engine 139
Stopping the engine 140
Starting and stopping the engine on vehicles with the KESSY sys-
tem » page 140.
The engine can only be started using a correctly coded original key.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
WARNING
When the vehicle is travelling with the engine off, the ignition key must
always be in position
2
» Fig. 134 on page 139 (ignition switched on). This
position is confirmed by the appearance of certain indicator lamps in the in-
strument cluster.
If the key is not in position
2,
it could unexpectedly lock the steering -
danger of accident!
Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has
come to a complete stop (by applying the handbrake). Otherwise, the steer-
ing could be blocked – risk of accident!
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents!
Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is
risk of accident, damage or theft!
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
WARNING
Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms. The en-
gine's exhaust gases also contain the odourless and colourless carbon
monoxide, a poisonous gas – risk of death.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death.
Do not leave any items (e.g. cleaning cloths or tools) in the engine com-
partment. This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a
cover) – risk of fire!
CAUTION
The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the
vehicle is at a standstill. The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is
activated when the engine is running
3
» Fig. 134 on page 139.
Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-
start aid » page 211, Jump-starting.
CAUTION
Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads before the
engine has reached its operating temperature – risk of damaging the engine!
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to
run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumula-
tion of heat when the engine is switched off.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this the engine rea-
ches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are
lower.
Note
After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan can intermittently continue to
operate for approx. 10 minutes.
138
Driving
Electronic immobilizer
Read and observe and on page 138 first.
An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deac-
tivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is
withdrawn from the lock.
The engine will not start if a non-authorized ignition key is used.
The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Immobilizer active.
IMMOBILIZER
Ignition Switch
Fig. 134
Positions of the vehicle key in
the ignition lock
Read and observe and on page 138 first.
Petrol engines » Fig. 134
Ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked
Ignition switched on
Starting engine
Diesel engines » Fig. 134
Fuel supply interrupted, ignition switched off, engine switched off, the
steering can be locked.
Heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on
Starting engine
To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel
until the steering locking pin engages audibly.
1
2
3
1
2
3
If the steering is locked and the key cannot be turned or can only be turned
with difficulty to position
2
» Fig. 134, move the steering wheel back and
forth and the steering lock will unlock.
Note
We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle. This
acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car.
Starting the engine
Read and observe and on page 138 first.
Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system. The glow
plug warning light
illuminates after the ignition has been switched on. Start
the engine once the
warning light has gone out.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Procedure for starting the engine
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position
P or N.
Switch on the ignition
2
» Fig. 134 on page 139.
Depress and hold the clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or brake
pedal (vehicles with an automatic gearbox) until the engine starts.
Turn the key to position
3
to the stop and release immediately the engine
has started – do not depress the accelerator.
After letting go, the vehicle key will return to position
2
.
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position
1
. Re-
peat the start-up process after approx. half a minute.
Vehicles with manual transmission
The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed.
The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Depress clutch to start.
CLUTCH
139
Starting off and Driving
Vehicles with automatic transmission
1)
The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed.
The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Depress the brake to start.
BRAKE
CAUTION
If the engine does not start-up after a second attempt, one of the following
fuses may be defective.
Petrol engine - fuse for the electric fuel pump.
Diesel engine - fuse for the control unit for glow plugs or glow plug relay
and fuel pump.
Check the fuse and replace if necessary » page 220, or seek assistance from
a specialist garage.
Stopping the engine
Read and observe and on page 138 first.
Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key to position
1
» Fig. 134 on
page 139.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
if the selector lever is in position P.
Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Steering lock / unlock 141
Ignition on/off 141
Starting the engine 142
Switching off the engine 142
Emergency start-up of the engine 142
Emergency ignition shutoff system 143
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Exit System, hereinafter referred to only as
system) allows the switching on or switching off of the ignition and starting or
stopping of the engine without the active use of the key.
A key must be in the vehicle to unlock the steering, switch on the ignition and
start the vehicle. When travelling the key must be in the vehicle.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
WARNING
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents!
Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a
risk of theft etc!
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
WARNING
Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms. The en-
gine's exhaust gases also contain the odourless and colourless carbon
monoxide, a poisonous gas – risk of death.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death.
CAUTION
The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been forgotten, for ex-
ample, in the front of the vehicle roof
D
» Fig. 34 on page 53 - There is danger
of loss or damage to the key! It is therefore not always necessary to know
where the key is.
The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the
vehicle is at a standstill. The starter or engine may be damaged if the starter is
activated when the engine is running.
Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-
start aid » page 211, Jump-starting.
1)
Applies to vehicles with START STOP system.
140
Driving
CAUTION
Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads before the
engine has reached its operating temperature – risk of damaging the engine!
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to
run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumula-
tion of heat when the engine is switched off.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this the engine rea-
ches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are
lower.
Note
The system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while
driving, this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergen-
cy » page 143.
After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan can intermittently continue
to operate for approx. 10 minutes.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. after switching off the ignition and opening
the driver's door), the steering is enabled only when the ignition is switched on
or the engine is started.
Steering lock / unlock
Fig. 135
Starter button
Read and observe and on page 140 first.
The steering lock (steering lock) deters attempted theft of your vehicle.
Locking
Stop the vehicle.
Switch off the engine or the ignition by pressing the starter button » Fig. 135.
Open the driver door.
The steering is locked automatically.
If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards, the
steering is only locked after the vehicle is locked.
Unlocking
Open the driver's door and get into the vehicle.
Close the driver's door.
The steering is unlocked within 2 seconds.
If the system does not unlock the steering at the first time (for example when
the front wheels are in contact with an obstacle), then two more unlocking at-
tempts are performed automatically.
If the steering is still not unlocked, then the following message is displayed on
the display of the instrument cluster.
Move the steering wheel!
MOVE STEERING WHEEL
Slightly move the steering wheel and the system will make up to 3 more at-
tempts to unlock after 2 seconds. At the same time, the warning light
flash-
es.
If the steering is still not unlocked, to try to eliminate the possible cause and
then repeat the unlocking attempt.
Ignition on/off
Read and observe and on page 140 first.
Press the starter button » Fig. 135 on page 141 briefly.
The ignition is switched on or off.
On vehicles fitted with a manual transmission, the clutch pedal must not be
depressed while switching the ignition on or off, otherwise the system would
try to start.
On vehicles fitted with a automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be
depressed while switching the ignition on or off, otherwise the system would
try to start.
141
Starting off and Driving
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is on, an audible signal sounds
and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display.
Ignition on!
IGNITION SWITCHED ON
When leaving the vehicle always switch off the ignition.
Note
The ignition is switched on when indicated by the illuminating of certain indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster.
Starting the engine
Read and observe
and on page 140 first.
Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system. The glow
plug warning light
illuminates after the ignition has been switched on. Start
the engine once the
warning light has gone out.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Procedure for starting the engine
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position
P or N.
Depress and hold the clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or brake
pedal (vehicles with an automatic gearbox) until the engine starts.
Press and hold » Fig. 135 on page 141
1)
the starter button until the engine
starts.
CAUTION
If the engine does not start-up after a second attempt, one of the following
fuses may be defective.
Petrol engine - fuse for the electric fuel pump.
Diesel engine - fuse for the control unit for glow plugs or glow plug relay
and fuel pump.
Check the fuse and replace if necessary » page 220, or seek assistance from
a specialist garage.
Switching off the engine
Read and observe and on page 140 first.
Stop the vehicle.
Press the starter button » Fig. 135 on page 141 briefly.
The engine and the ignition are switched off simultaneously.
The engine can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km/h.
Emergency start-up of the engine
Fig. 136
Emergency start-up of engine
Read and observe and on page 140 first.
If the authorisation check for the key fails, the following message appears in
the instrument cluster display.
Key not found.
NO KEY
The emergency start-up must be completed.
Press the starter button directly with the key » Fig. 136.
or
Press the starter button and then hold the key to the starter button.
Note
During an emergency engine start-up, the key bit must face the starter but-
ton » Fig. 136.
1)
On vehicles with the START STOP system, it is sufficient to press the starter button briefly. The motor
will then automatically start.
142
Driving
Emergency ignition shutoff system
Read and observe and on page 140 first.
The ignition can be turned off in an emergency even when travelling at a
speed of more than 2 km / hr.
Press the starter button » Fig. 135 on page 141 for longer than 1 second or
twice within 1 second.
After emergency stop of the ignition, the steering is unlocked.
Brakes
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Information on braking
143
Handbrake
144
WARNING
Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch-
ed off – risk of accident!
The clutch pedal must be depressed when braking on a vehicle with man-
ual transmission, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs. Otherwise,
the function of the brake booster may be impaired – risk of accident!
When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who might, for example,
release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear unattended in the ve-
hicle. The vehicle could then start to move – risk of accident!
WARNING
In the case of damage to the standard fitted front spoiler or if retrofitting
another front spoiler, hub caps etc.» page 173, Services, modifications and
technical alterations, make sure that the air supply to the front brakes is
not affected. The front brakes may overheat, which can have a negative im-
pact on the functioning of the braking system – there is a risk of an acci-
dent!
CAUTION
Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads » page 149.
Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not
necessary. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer
braking distance and excessive wear.
Information on braking
Read and observe and on page 143 first.
If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system con-
siders the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic, the brake light
flashes automatically.
After the speed was reduced below around 10 km/h or the vehicle was stop-
ped, the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system
switches on. The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically af-
ter accelerating or driving off again.
Before travelling a long distance down a steep gradient, reduce speed and
shift into the next lowest gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will
be used, reducing the load on the brakes. Any additional braking should be
completed intermittently, not continuously.
Wear-and-tear
The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driv-
ing style.
The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns
and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted.
Under these severe conditions, the thickness of the brake pads must also be
checked by a specialist garage between services.
Wet roads or road salt
The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake
pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter.
The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads occur if the vehicle has
been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking
system. The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times.
143
Starting off and Driving
Faults in the brake surface
If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that
the brake pedal can be depressed further, the brake system may be faulty.
Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropri-
ately as you will not know the exact extent of the damage.
Low brake fluid level
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system.
The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically » page 35,
Brake sys-
tem.
Brake booster
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
Handbrake
Fig. 137
Handbrake
Read and observe and on page 143 first.
Apply
Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.
Releasing
Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking
button » Fig. 137.
Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
The handbrake warning light
illuminates when the handbrake is applied,
provided the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the
handbrake applied.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Release parking brake!
The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more
than around 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which
is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can
have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system – there is a
risk of an accident.
CAUTION
After the vehicle has come to a standstill, always tighten the handbrake first
and then select the first gear (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or move the se-
lector lever to the P-position (vehicles with an automatic gearbox).
Manual gear changing and pedals
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manual gear changing 144
Pedals 145
Manual gear changing
Fig. 138
Gearshift pattern of 5 gear or
6 gear manual gearbox
Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
on the clutch.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 43.
144
Driving
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the clutch
pedal and hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before reverse gear is engag-
ed to avoid any shift noises.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the
ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gearshift
lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mech-
anism to wear excessively.
Pedals
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat, which is attached to the two corre-
sponding attachment points, may be used.
Only use footmats from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories, which are fit-
ted to two attachment points.
WARNING
No objects are allowed in the driver's footwell – risk of obstruction or limi-
tation in operating the pedals!
Automatic transmission
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Modes and use of selector lever 145
Manual gear shifting (Tiptronic) 146
Starting off and driving 147
Malfunction 148
WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator if the forward driving mode is changed
when the vehicle is halted and the engine is running – there is a risk of an
accident.
Never shift the selector lever to R or P modes when driving – there is a
risk of an accident.
The vehicle must be held on the brake pedal in D, S or R modes if the ve-
hicle is halted and the engine is running. Even when the engine is idling,
power transmission is never completely interrupted – the vehicle will creep.
CAUTION
If the selector lever is shifted to N while the vehicle is being driven you must
lift off the accelerator pedal and you will need to wait until the engine has
reached its idling speed before shifting the selector lever to a forward driving
mode again.
At temperatures below -10 °C, the engine can only be started in selector lev-
er position P.
Never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal when stopping on a
hill – this may lead to transmission damage.
Note
After the ignition is switched off, the ignition key can only be withdrawn when
the selector lever is in position P.
Modes and use of selector lever
Fig. 139 Selector lever/display
145
Starting off and Driving
Fig. 140
Shift lock button
Read and observe and on page 145 first.
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 139.
The following modes can be selected with the selector lever » Fig. 139.
P
– Parking mode
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode.
Parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary.
R
- Reverse gear
Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the en-
gine is at idling speed.
Before moving into mode R from mode P or N, depress the brake pedal while
simultaneously pressing the lock button in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 140.
N
- Neutral
Power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode.
D
- Mode for forwards travel (normal programme)
In mode D, the forward gears are automatically changed according to the en-
gine load, accelerator pedal actuation and driving speed.
S
- Mode for forwards travel (sports programme)
In mode S, the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher
engine speeds than in mode D.
Before changing to mode S from mode D , the shift lock button must be press-
ed in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 140.
Releasing selector lever from P or N modes (selector lever lock)
The selector lever is locked in the P and N modes to prevent the forwards trav-
el mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion.
The
warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster » page 41.
The selector lever is released by depressing the brake pedal while simultane-
ously pressing the lock button in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 140.
The selector lever is not locked when shifted quickly through N (e.g. from R to
D). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck, e.g. in a bank of
snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for more
than approximately 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
up to 5 km/h.
Note
If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D or vice versa,
move the selector lever quickly. This prevents modes R or N from being selec-
ted accidentally.
Manual gear shifting (Tiptronic)
Fig. 141 Selector lever/multi function steering wheel
Read and observe
and on page 145 first.
Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lev-
er or multifunction steering wheel. This mode can be selected both while hal-
ted and while driving.
The currently selected gear is indicated in the » Fig. 139 on page 145 display.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 43.
146
Driving
Switching to manual shifting
Push the gear selector from position D towards the right, or left in a right-
hand drive vehicle.
Shifting up gears
Press the selector lever forwards
+
» Fig. 141.
Pull the right-hand paddle
+
» Fig. 141 briefly towards the steering wheel.
Shifting down gears
Press the selector lever backwards
-
» Fig. 141.
Pull the left-hand paddle
-
» Fig. 141 briefly towards the steering wheel.
Temporarily switching to manual gear shifting in mode D or S
Pull one of the
-
/
+
paddles » Fig. 141 briefly towards the steering wheel .
Manual gear shifting is deactivated if more than 1 minute passes after either of
the
-
/
+
paddles was pulled. The temporary switch to manual gear shifting can
also be deactivated by pulling the right-hand
+
paddle towards the steering
wheel for more than 1 second.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached.
If a lower gear is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no
risk of the engine over revving.
Note
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual
shifting of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and
hence brake wear » page 143.
Starting off and driving
Read and observe
and on page 145 first.
Starting off
Start the engine.
Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal.
Press the lock button in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 140 on page 146and
keep pressing.
Move the selector lever into the desired position » page 145 and then release
the lock button.
Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
Stop
Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a
short time, such as at a cross roads.
Parking
Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Press the lock button in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 140 on page 146and
keep pressing.
Move the selector lever into the position P and then release the locking but-
ton.
Launch control
1)
The launch control function allows the vehicle in mode S or Tiptronic to reach
its maximum acceleration when starting off.
Disable the ASR » page 154, Brake assist systems.
START STOP deactivate » page 164.
Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle starts off with maximum acceleration.
Reactivate the ASR and START STOP when the desired speed has been
reached.
Kickdown
The kickdown function allows you to achieve maximum acceleration by your
vehicle while driving.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the kickdown function is activa-
ted in any forward driving mode.
The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed
and engine speed, and the vehicle accelerates.
The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has
reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range.
1)
This function is only valid for some engines.
147
Starting off and Driving
WARNING
Rapid acceleration, particularly on slippery roads, can lead to loss of control
of the vehicle – there is a risk of an accident.
Malfunction
Read and observe and on page 145 first.
Emergency programme
The transmission switches to the emergency programme if there is a fault in
the automatic gearbox system.
Indications of an activated emergency programme include the following:
Only certain gears are selected.
Reverse gear R cannot be used.
Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible.
Gearbox overheating
The gearbox may, for example, become too hot due to frequent repeated
starting or stop-and-go traffic. Overheating is indicated by the warning
light » page 33,
Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot.
Defective selector lever lock
If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted (e.g. dis-
charged vehicle battery, faulty fuse), the selector lever can no longer be moved
out of position P in the normal manner, and the vehicle can no longer be driv-
en. The selector lever must be emergency released » page 217.
Note
Visit a specialist workshop if the gearbox has switched to the emergency pro-
gramme.
Running in
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
New engine 148
New tyres
149
New brake pads
149
New engine
The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use, which
means 3/4 of the maximum permissible engine speed.
No full throttle.
Avoid high engine speeds.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1,000 up to 1,500 kilometres
Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the
gear engaged, which means up to the maximum permissible engine speed.
The red scale on the rev counter indicates the range in which the system be-
gins to limit the engine speed.
During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than
later until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you
adopt during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the suc-
cess of running in your car.
Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in pe-
riod.
On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, at the very latest shift up into the
next gear when the red area is reached. Observe the recommended
gear » page 43, Gear recommendation. Very high engine speeds when acceler-
ating (accelerator) are automatically restricted » .
In vehicles with manual transmission, do not drive at unnecessarily low engine
speeds. Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly. Ob-
serve the recommended gear » page 43, Gear recommendation.
CAUTION
The engine is not protected from excessive engine revs caused by shifting
down at the wrong time. This can result in a sudden increase in revs beyond
the permissible maximum rpm and hence engine damage.
Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in
individual gears.
For the sake of the environment
Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds. Shifting up sooner helps
save fuel, reduces engine noise and protects the environment.
148
Driving
New tyres
New tyres must firstly be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first.
Therefore, drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so.
New brake pads
New brake pads do not initially provide optimal braking performance. They first
need to be “run in”. Therefore, drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
so.
Economical driving and environmental sustainability
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Looking ahead 149
Economical gear changing. 149
Avoiding full throttle 150
Reducing idling 150
Avoiding short distances 150
Checking tyre pressure 150
Avoiding unnecessary ballast 151
Regular maintenance 151
Saving electrical energy 151
Environmental compatibility 151
The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the
vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. ŠKODA places a
particular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment.
It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to
make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness.
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and the wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depend essentially on the following three factors:
Your personal driving style
Operating conditions
Technical requirements
The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 - 15 % by always looking ahead
and driving in an economical way.
Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond
the driver's control. Consumption increases during the winter or under difficult
conditions, on poor roads, etc.
Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer's data, as a re-
sult of outside temperatures, the weather and driving style.
The optimal engine speed should be maintained when accelerating, to avoid a
high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle.
CAUTION
All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at
its normal operating temperature.
Looking ahead
Read and observe
on page 149 first.
A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating, therefore un-
necessary accelerating and braking should be avoided. If looking ahead when
driving, less braking and consequently less accelerating are required.
If possible, let your vehicle coast to a stop, or use the engine brake, if you can
see that the next set of traffic lights is on red, for example.
Economical gear changing.
Fig. 142
Principle sketch: Fuel consump-
tion in litres/100 km depending
on the selected gear
Read and observe on page 149 first.
Shifting up early saves on fuel.
Manual gearbox
Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear.
Shift up into the next gear at approximately 2,000 rpm.
149
Starting off and Driving
An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. Observe
the recommended gear » page 43, Gear recommendation.
A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption » Fig. 142.
Automatic gearbox
Slowly apply the accelerator pedal. However, do not depress it as far as the
kickdown position » page 147.
An economic driving programme is automatically selected if the accelerator
pedal is only depressed slowly.
Avoiding full throttle
Fig. 143
Principle sketch: Fuel consump-
tion in litres/100 km. and speed
in km/h.
Read and observe on page 149 first.
Driving more slowly saves fuel.
Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel con-
sumption but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of
your vehicle.
The maximum speed of your vehicle should, as far possible, never be used.
Fuel consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase dispropor-
tionally at high speeds.
The graph » Fig. 143 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your
vehicle. Fuel consumption will be halved if you drive at only three-quarters of
the possible top speed of your vehicle.
Reducing idling
Read and observe
on page 149 first.
Idling also costs fuel.
In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP system, turn off the engine
when in a traffic jam, at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times.
Even after just 30 - 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is nee-
ded when you start the engine up again.
If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operat-
ing temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particu-
larly high in the warming-up phase. Therefore, start driving as soon as the en-
gine has started, In this case high engine speeds should be avoided.
Avoiding short distances
Fig. 144
Principle sketch: Fuel consump-
tion in l/100 km at different tem-
peratures
Read and observe on page 149 first.
Short distances result in above-average high fuel consumption. We therefore
recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold.
A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start. Fuel con-
sumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre. The consumption sta-
bilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating
temperature.
An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature. The
graph » Fig. 144 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a
certain distance at a temperature of +20 °C and a temperature of -10 °C.
Checking tyre pressure
Read and observe
on page 149 first.
Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel.
150
Driving
Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct » page 198. If the pressure
is too low, the tyres will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance. This will
not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behav-
iour will worsen.
Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold.
Avoiding unnecessary ballast
Read and observe on page 149 first.
Transporting ballast costs fuel.
Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption. Therefore we rec-
ommend carrying no unnecessary weight.
It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the
vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule
of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an in-
crease in fuel consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.
At a speed of 100 - 120 km/h, a vehicle fitted with a roof rack cross member
without a load will use about 10 % more fuel than normal due to the increased
aerodynamic drag.
Regular maintenance
Read and observe
on page 149 first.
A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel.
By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage, you create
the conditions needed for economical driving. The maintenance state of your
vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention
A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 % higher
than normal.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, e.g. when filling up. Oil consumption is
dependent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil
consumption could be as high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style
of driving.
It is quite normal that a new engine has higher oil consumption at first, and
reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. The oil consump-
tion of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving
about 5,000 km.
For the sake of the environment
Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthet-
ic low viscosity oils.
Regularly check the ground under the vehicle. Have your vehicle inspected by
a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the
ground.
Note
We recommend that your vehicle be serviced on a regular basis by a ŠKODA
service partner.
Saving electrical energy
Read and observe on page 149 first.
When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical
power. If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on,
more fuel is needed to operate the alternator. We therefore recommend
switching off electrical components if these are no longer required.
Environmental compatibility
Read and observe on page 149 first.
Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, material selec-
tion and production of your new ŠKODA. Particular emphasis has been placed
on the following points.
Design measures
Joints designed to be easily detached.
Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system.
Improved purity of different classes of materials.
Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation
260.
Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO
2
.
Minimum fuel leakage during accidents.
Reduced noise.
Choice of materials
Extensive use of recyclable material.
Air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant.
No cadmium.
151
Starting off and Driving
No asbestos.
Reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics.
Manufacture
Solvent-free cavity protection.
Solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production
plant to the customer.
The use of solvent-free adhesives.
No CFCs used in the production process.
Without use of mercury.
Use of water-soluble paints.
Trade-in and recycling of old cars
ŠKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to
protecting the environment and the preserving resources. All new ŠKODAvehi-
cles can be recycled by up to 95 % and can always
1)
be returned free of charge.
In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks have been created, where you
can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your vehicle, you will receive a
confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regula-
tions.
Note
You can find more detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old
cars from a specialist garage.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
General information 152
Driving through water on streets
152
General information
Pay attention to low-slung parts of the vehicle, such as the spoiler and ex-
haust, particularly in the following situations.
When driving on poorly maintained roads and paths.
When driving over kerbs.
When driving on steep ramps, etc.
Particular attention is required for vehicles with sport suspension and when
the vehicle is fully laden.
Driving through water on streets
Fig. 145
Maximum permissible water lev-
el when driving through water
The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided
when driving through water (e.g. flooded roads).
Determine the depth of the water before driving through it.
The water level must not reach above the web of the lower beam » Fig. 145.
Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed.
At a higher speed, a water wave can form in front of the vehicle, which can
cause water to penetrate into the engine's air intake system or other parts of
the vehicle.
Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off.
1)
Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements.
152
Driving
WARNING
Driving through water, mud, sludge etc. can impair the braking power and
extend the braking distance – risk of accident!
Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings.
After driving through bodies of water, the brakes must be cleaned and
dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking. Only apply the brakes for
the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions
permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.
CAUTION
Should water penetrate into the intake system of the engine, there is a
threat of serious damage being incurred by the engine parts!
When driving through water, some vehicle parts such as chassis, electrics or
transmissions can be severely damaged.
Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis-
sible water level for your vehicle.
Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water, making it difficult or
impossible to drive through water.
Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. A vehicle
coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa-
ter.
Note
After driving through water, we recommend having the vehicle checked by a
specialist garage.
Driving abroad
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unleaded petrol 153
Headlights
153
In certain countries, it may be possible that the ŠKODA Partner network is limi-
ted or has not been established. This is the reason why procuring certain spare
parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able
to make limited repairs.
Unleaded petrol
A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded
petrol » page 184, Unleaded petrol. Information regarding the locations of fill-
ing stations that offer unleaded petrol is, for example, provided by the auto-
mobile associations.
Headlights
The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side
of the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent.
When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the
road than in your home country, the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle on-
coming drivers. In order to avoid this, the headlights must be adjusted at a
specialist garage.
Headlights with Xenon lights can be adjusted in the menu of the MAXI DOT
display » page 71.
Note
You can find out more information on adjusting the headlights at a specialist
garage.
153
Starting off and Driving
Assist systems
Brake assist systems
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 154
Antilock brake system (ABS) 155
Traction Control System (ASR) 155
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 155
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) 155
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) 155
Hill Hold Control (HHC) 156
WARNING
A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to
shut down. The brake assist systems would then fail to function – risk of
accident!
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. The increased safety provided by the brake assist
systems must not tempt you to take safety risks – risk of accident!
In the event of an ABS fault, visit a specialist garage immediately. Adjust
your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS, as you will not
know the exact extent of the damage or the extent to which this is limiting
the braking efficiency.
CAUTION
All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufac-
turer to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly.
Changes to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, brakes, chassis) can influence the
functionality of the brake assist systems » page 173, Services, modifications
and technical alterations.
If a fault occurs in the ABS system, the ESC, ASR and EDL will also not work.
An ABS fault is indicated with the warning light
» page 38.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Fig. 146
ESC system: ASR button
Read and observe and on page 154 first.
The ESC system helps to maintain control of the vehicle in situations where it
is being operated at its dynamic limits, such as a sudden change to the direc-
tion of travel. Depending on the road surface conditions, the risk of skidding is
reduced, thereby improving the vehicle's driving stability .
The ESC system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched
on.
The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the
steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with
the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If differences exist, such as the car begin-
ning to skid, the ESC system will automatically brake the appropriate wheel.
During an intervention of the system, the warning light
flashes in the instru-
ment cluster.
The following systems are integrated into the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC).
Antilock Brake System (ABS) » page 155.
Traction control (ASR) » page 155.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) » page 155.
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) » page 155.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) » page 155.
Hill Hold Control (HHC) » page 156.
Trailer stabilisation (TSA) » page 172.
The ESC system cannot be deactivated. The
» Fig. 146 button can only be
used to deactivate the ASR.
The
warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the ASR is de-
activated.
154
Driving
Antilock brake system (ABS)
Read and observe and on page 154 first.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thereby, it helps the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle.
The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of
the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises.
When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pres-
sure on the brake pedal.
Traction Control System (ASR)
Fig. 147
ASR button
Read and observe and on page 154 first.
If the wheels are slipping, the ASR system adapts the engine speed to the con-
ditions of the road surface. The ASR makes it much easier to start off, acceler-
ate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfav-
ourable.
The ASR function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched
on.
If your vehicle is fitted with the ESC system, the ASR is integrated into the ESC
system » page 154.
During an intervention of the system, the ASR warning light
flashes in the
instrument cluster.
The ASR should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactiva-
ted only in the following situations, for example.
When driving with snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
When “rocking a car free” when it has become stuck.
The ASR can be deactivated via the
» Fig. 147symbol button.
The
warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the ASR is de-
activated.
Ensure the ASR is activated again afterwards.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
Read and observe and on page 154 first.
If one of the wheels starts to spin, the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel
and transfers the driving force to the other wheels. This ensures the stability
of the vehicle and a quick journey.
The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation
in the disc brake of the wheel being braked. The vehicle can continue to be
driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL. The
EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)
Read and observe
and on page 154 first.
In critical situations, the DSR provides the driver with a steering recommenda-
tion in order to stabilise the vehicle. The DSR is activated, for example, on the
right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
Read and observe
and on page 154 first.
HBA increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance.
The HBA is activated by very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order to
achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be ap-
plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill.
The HBA function is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is re-
leased.
155
Assist systems
The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the
HBA.
Hill Hold Control (HHC)
Read and observe and on page 154 first.
When driving on slopes, HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake ped-
al to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake.
The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake
pedal for approx. 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released.
The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator ped-
al. If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds, it starts to roll back.
HHC is active on slopes of >5 % when the driver door is closed. HHC is always
only active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. When driving down-
hill, it is inactive.
Parking aid
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Function
157
Activation/deactivation
157
WARNING
The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when reversing the
vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres. Pay particular attention to small
children and animals as they may not be recognised by the system sensors.
Before reversing, you should make sure that there are no small obstacles,
such as rocks, thin posts, trailer drawbars etc. in front or behind your vehi-
cle. Such obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors.
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. Thus, these objects or people
who wear such clothing are not recognised by the System sensors.
External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the system. Un-
der adverse conditions, this may cause objects or people to not be recog-
nised by the system.
CAUTION
If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system
and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The
fault is also indicated by the symbol
flashing in the button » Fig. 148 on
page 157. Seek help from a specialist garage.
The sensors must be kept clean (free of ice, etc.) to enable the system to op-
erate properly.
Under adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or
high temperatures etc.), the system function may be limited - “incorrect recog-
nition of obstacle”.
Additionally installed accessories such as e.g. bicycle carriers can impair the
system function.
Note
The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
than for rear obstacle recognition.
If not all fields around the vehicle are shown after the system is activated,
the vehicle will need to be moved a few metres forwards or in reverse.
The sound of the park assist can be adjusted via the MAXI DOT display in the
Assistants menu option » page 47.
If the system is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is
in position P (the vehicle cannot move), the warning tone is interrupted and no
obstacles are displayed.
156
Driving
Function
Fig. 148 Range of sensors / system button
Read and observe
and on page 156 first.
The parking aid (referred to below solely as system) only works when the igni-
tion is switched on.
The system supports the driver via audible signals, via the display on the radio
or via the factory-installed navigation system when parking and manoeu-
vring » Radio user guide, Navigation system user guide.
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasound sensors are located on the front/rear
bumper.
Image description - approximate range of the sensors
Range » Fig. 148 Range of sensors
A
120 cm
B
60 cm
C
160 cm
D
60 cm
E
a)
60 cm
a)
Applies only for vehicles with 12 sensors.
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm - danger
area. From this moment on do not continue driving!
The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing
device. The danger area thus begins at a distance of around 35 cm on vehicles
equipped with a factory fitted towing device.
Towing a trailer
On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted towing device, only system areas
A
and
B
» Fig. 148 are active when towing a trailer.
Activation/deactivation
Read and observe and on page 156 first.
The system is automatically activated by selecting reverse gear or pressing
the symbol button
» Fig. 148 on page 157. The symbol
illuminates in the
button; activation is confirmed by a brief acoustic signal.
The system is deactivated by moving out of reverse gear, either by pressing
the symbol button
or automatically at a speed exceeding 10 km/h (the sym-
bol
in the button goes out).
On vehicles which only have rear sensors, the system can only be deactivated
by moving out of reverse gear.
Park assist
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Functioning
158
Finding a parking space
158
Parking
159
Departing from a parallel parking space
160
Automatic emergency braking
160
Information messages
160
Park Assist (in the following referred to as the system) helps drivers park in
suitable parallel and perpendicular parking places and also to manoeuvre out
of parallel parking spaces.
The system takes over the steering movements when parking or driving out of
the parking space, the driver operates the pedals as well as the gear lever.
The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to
as parking operation.
157
Assist systems
The parking aid is part of the park assist system, therefore the information
and safety guidelines » page 156, Parking aid must also be read and ob-
served.
WARNING
The system only serves as an assistance and does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility for the vehicle operation.
During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid
steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between
the steering wheel spokes – risk of injury!
During a parking manoeuvre on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow,
ice, etc.) you may stray from the calculated road because of the surface
conditions. Therefore we suggest that you do not use the system in such
situations.
External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors. Un-
der adverse conditions, this may cause objects or people to not be recog-
nised by the system.
CAUTION
If other vehicles are parked behind the kerb or on it, the system can also
guide your vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it. Ensure that the wheels or the
wheel rims of your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time.
Under certain circumstances, surfaces or structures of certain objects such
as wire mesh fences or powder snow cannot be recognised by the system.
Under adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or
high temperatures etc.), the system function may be limited - “incorrect recog-
nition of obstacle”.
CAUTION
The correct evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure de-
pends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle.
The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size
approved by the manufacturer.
Do without the use of the system if snow chains or a spare wheel is moun-
ted.
If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted, the
resulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This
can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage.
Note
We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km / h.
Functioning
Read and observe and on page 158 first.
Basic system operations
The measurement and evaluation of the size of parking spaces when driving.
The determination of the correct position of the vehicle for parking.
The calculation of the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the
parking space or forwards from the parking space.
Automatic rotation of the front wheels during the parking.
The display of the instrument cluster (hereinafter only in the display) informa-
tion and system messages are displayed.
When the system is activated, the warning light illuminates
» Fig. 149 on
page 158 -
.
The traction control system (ASR) must always be switched on when parking.
Finding a parking space
Fig. 149 System button / display
Read and observe and on page 158 first.
Finding a parallel parking space
Drive past the parking space at up to 40 km/h and a distance of 0.5 – 1.5 m.
Press the symbol buttononce
» Fig. 149 .
The display shows the following » Fig. 149 -
.
Finding a perpendicular parking space
Drive past the parking space at up to 20 km/h and a distance of 0.5 – 1.5 m.
Press the symbol buttontwice
» Fig. 149 .
158
Driving
The display shows the following » Fig. 149 - .
The search area for the parking space on the driver's side is automatically indi-
cated on the display.
Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to park on this side of
the road. In the display the search area for the parking space is indicated on
the driver's side.
If suitable parking space is found, its parameters are stored until another suit-
able parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been driven
after finding the parking space.
If the driver changes the parking mode while searching for a parking space, the
symbol button
must be pressed again.
Note
If the symbol (km / h) is shown in the display , the vehicle speed should be
reduced below 40 km / hr (parallel parking) or below 20 km / hr (Transverse
parking) .
Parking
Fig. 150 Display
Read and observe
and on page 158 first.
Display
Parking place recognised with the information to drive on.
Parking place recognised with the information to engage the reverse gear.
Indication for selecting the forward gear.
Indication for selecting the reverse gear.
A
B
C
D
If the system has recognised a suitable parking space, this parking space is
shown in the display » Fig. 150 - .
Continue driving forwards until the display appears » Fig. 150 -
.
Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue to move forward until
the parking procedure starts.
Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. ac-
tive. Monitor area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering
will be taken over by the system.
Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
If necessary, the parking procedure can be continued with further steps.
If the arrow in the display flashes forward » Fig. 150 -
, then select the
1st gear or move the selector lever into position D.
The display shows the
icon (brake pedal).
Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro-
tates into the required position, the symbol
goes out.
Carefully drive forwards.
If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display » Fig. 150 -
, select reverse
gear again or move the selector lever into position R .
The display shows the
icon (brake pedal).
Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro-
tates into the required position, the symbol
goes out.
Carefully move backwards.
You can repeat these steps several times in succession.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the display.
Park Assist stopped. Take over steering!
Automatic brake assist when speeding
If a velocity of 7 km / h is exceeded during the parking manoeuvre for the first
time, the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to less than 7 km /
h. This prevents the parking manoeuvre from aborting.
Automatic termination
The system terminates the parking procedure if one of the following cases ari-
ses.
A speed of 7 km / h is exceeded for the second time.
The time limit of 6 minutes is exceeded.
159
Assist systems
The system key is pressed.
The ASR system is turned off.
There is a driver intervention in the automatic steering operation (wheel
stop).
When there is a system fault (system temporarily not available).
There is an automatic emergency braking.
If any of the above events occurs, the following message is dis-
played » page 160.
Departing from a parallel parking space
Read and observe and on page 158 first.
Manoeuvring out
Press the symbol buttononce
» Fig. 149 on page 158 .
Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out
of which you wish to manoeuvre.
Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. ac-
tive. Monitor area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering
will be taken over by the system.
Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
Follow the system instructions shown in the display.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the information display:
Take over steering and continue driving
Automatic termination
The system terminates the manoeuvring procedure if one of the following ca-
ses arises.
The system key is pressed.
The ASR system is turned off.
There is a driver intervention in the automatic steering operation (wheel
stop).
When there is a system fault (system temporarily not available).
There is an automatic emergency braking.
If any of the above events occurs, the following message is dis-
played » page 160.
Automatic emergency braking
Read and observe and on page 158 first.
If the system detects a risk of collision during parking, automatic emergency
braking takes place to prevent a collision.
The parking is terminated by the emergency braking.
CAUTION
If the parking is aborted due to the speed exceeding 7 km / h for the second
speed, then the automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system!
Information messages
Read and observe and on page 158 first.
Park Assist: Speed too high.
If a speed of 50 km / h is exceeded while searching for a parking space, the
system with the key symbol is
must be reactivated.
Speed too high. Take over steering!
The parking is terminated if the speed exceeds 7 km / hr.
Driver steering intervention: Take over steering!
The parking procedure is terminated due to a driver steering intervention.
Park Assist stopped. ASR deactivated.
The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the ASR system is deac-
tivated. Activate the ASR.
ASR deactivated. Take over steering!
The parking procedure was ended because ASR was deactivated during the
parking procedure.
Trailer: Park Assist stopped.
The parking procedure cannot be carried out because a trailer is hitched.
Time limit exceeded. Take over steering!
The parking procedure was ended because the time limit of 6 minutes was
passed.
Park Assist currently not available.
160
Driving
The system cannot be activated because a fault exists on the vehicle. Seek
help from a specialist garage.
Park Assist stopped. System not available right now.
The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle. Seek
help from a specialist garage.
Park Assist faulty. Workshop!
The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists in the system.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
ASR intervention. Take over steering!
The parking procedure is terminated by an ASR intervention.
PARK ASSIST Turn on turn signal and select reverse gear
The prerequisites for manoeuvring out of a parking space using the system
have been met. Switch on the turn signals and shift into reverse.
Automatic space departure not possible. Space too small.
The manoeuvring procedure using the system is not possible. The parking gap
is too small.
Park Assist: Brake interv. Speed too high.
The speed was too high during the parking and was automatically reduced.
Cruise Control System
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Activating/deactivating
161
Storing and maintaining speed 162
Changing the stored speed 162
Switching off temporarily 162
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed, more than 25 km/h,
without you having to actuate the accelerator pedal.
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output
and braking power of the engine.
The
warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the cruise con-
trol system is switched on.
WARNING
For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in dense
traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads,
loose gravel) – there is a risk of an accident.
The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current
traffic conditions.
Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being switched on unintentionally.
CAUTION
The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when
driving in areas with steeper gradients. The weight of the vehicle increases the
speed at which it travels. In such cases, select a lower gear or slow the vehicle
using the footbrake.
The cruise control system cannot be activated when first gear or reverse
gear is selected (vehicles with manual transmission).
The cruise control system cannot be activated when the selector lever is in
positions P, N or R (vehicles with automatic transmission).
The Cruise Control System may automatically switch off when some brake
assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervene, when the speed exceeds maximum permis-
sible engine speed, or a similar event takes place.
Activating/deactivating
Fig. 151
Operating lever: Cruise control
system controls
Read and observe and on page 161 first.
Activating
Move switch
A
» Fig. 151 into the ON position.
Deactivating
Move switch
A
» Fig. 151 into the OFF position.
161
Assist systems
Storing and maintaining speed
Read and observe and on page 161 first.
Activate the cruise control system » page 161.
Drive at the desired speed.
Push the rocker button
B
into the SET/- » Fig. 151 on page 161 position.
After you have released the rocker button
B
from the SET/- position, the
speed you have just stored is kept constant without having to depress the ac-
celerator.
Changing the stored speed
Read and observe and on page 161 first.
Increasing the speed with the rocker button
B
Push the rocker button
B
into the RES/+ » Fig. 151 on page 161 position.
If the rocker button is held in the RES/+ position, the speed will increase con-
tinuously. Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached. The
set speed is then stored in the memory.
Decreasing the speed using the rocker button
B
The stored speed can be reduced by pushing the rocker switch
B
into the
SET/- » Fig. 151 on page 161 position.
If the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET/- position, the speed will
decrease continuously. Release the rocker button once the desired speed is
reached. The set speed is then stored in the memory.
If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than approx. 25 km/h, the
speed is not stored and the memory is erased. Once the speed of the vehicle
has increased to more than approx. 25 km/h, the speed must then be stored
again by pushing the rocker button
B
into the SET/- position.
Increasing the speed with the accelerator
Depress the accelerator pedal.
Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
speed.
Decreasing the speed with the brake pedal
The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal, which tempora-
rily deactivates the system » page 162.
Switching off temporarily
Read and observe and on page 161 first.
The cruise control system can be temporarily deactivated by pushing the
switch
A
» Fig. 151 on page 161 into the spring-mounted CANCEL position or
by depressing the brake or clutch pedal.
The set speed remains stored in the memory.
Briefly push the rocker button
B
into the RES/+ position in order to resume
the stored speed after the clutch or brake pedal is released.
START STOP
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating conditions for the system
163
Operation in vehicles with manual gearbox
163
Operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox
163
System related automatic start-up
164
Manually deactivating/activating the system
164
Information messages
164
The START STOP system (hereinafter referred to as the system) saves fuel and
reduces polluting emissions and CO
2
emissions by turning the engine off, e.g.
when stopping at traffic lights, and starting the engine again when moving off.
WARNING
Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off.
The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run-
ning.
162
Driving
Operating conditions for the system
Fig. 152
MAXI DOT display: Engine is au-
tomatically switched off / auto-
matic engine cut off is not possi-
ble
Read and observe on page 162 first.
For system-dependent automatic engine shutdown to work, the following
conditions must be met.
The driver's door is closed.
The driver has fastened the seat belt.
The bonnet is closed.
The driving speed exceeded 4 km/h after the last stop.
No trailer is coupled.
Some additional conditions for the system to function correctly cannot be in-
fluenced or recognised by the driver. Therefore, the system can react differ-
ently in situations which are identical from the driver's perspective.
If after stopping the car, the message UNABLE TO START STOP appears in the
segment display or in the MAXI DOT display the check mark
» Fig. 152, then
the conditions for automatic engine shutdown are not met.
Running the engine is essential for the following reasons, for example.
The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
been reached.
The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.
The current consumption is too high.
High air conditioning capacity (high fan speed, big difference between the
desired and actual interior temperature).
Note
If the vehicle remains outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in
direct sunlight, it can take several hours until the internal temperature of the
vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the sys-
tem.
If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than approx. 30 seconds or the
driver's door is opened during stop mode, the engine will have to be started
manually.
After the manual engine start and with a manual gearbox the automatic en-
gine shutdown can take place only when a minimum distance required for the
system function has been covered.
Operation in vehicles with manual gearbox
Read and observe
on page 162 first.
In compliance with the operating conditions, automatic engine shutdown / au-
tomatic engine start takes place as described.
Automatic engine shutdown
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the gear lever to Neutral.
Release the clutch pedal.
Automatic engine shutdown takes place, segment display shows START STOP
ACTIVE or a check mark appears in the MAXI DOT display
» Fig. 152 on
page 163.
Automatic engine start
Depress the clutch pedal.
The automatic start procedure takes place again.
Operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox
Read and observe
on page 162 first.
In compliance with the operating conditions, automatic engine shutdown / au-
tomatic engine start takes place as described.
Automatic engine shutdown
Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
163
Assist systems
Automatic engine shutdown takes place, segment display shows START STOP
ACTIVE or a check mark appears in the MAXI DOT display » Fig. 152 on
page 163.
Automatic engine start
Release the brake pedal.
The automatic start procedure takes place again.
Further information on automatic transmission
The automatic engine shut down takes place when the selector lever is in po-
sitions P, D, S and N and in Tiptronic mode.
When the selector lever is in position P, the engine remains shut down even
after you release the brake pedal. The engine starts automatically by pressing
the gas pedal or by moving the selector lever into a different mode and releas-
ing the brake pedal.
If the engine is off due to the automatic and the selector lever is put to the R
position, then the automatic start-up of the engine.
If the gear selector is moved from position R to the position D, S or N, the vehi-
cle must reach a speed of more than 10 km / h before the automatic engine
shutdown starts.
There is no automatic engine shutdown when the system detects a vehicle
moving due to a large steering angle.
No automatic engine shutdown takes place when the vehicle is moving at low
speed (e.g. during a traffic jam or when turning) and remains stationary after
pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shutdown takes place if you
press the brake pedal down with more force.
System related automatic start-up
Read and observe on page 162 first.
When the engine is off, the system can automatically start the engine before
the desired journey continues. Some possible reasons for this are:
The vehicle has begun to roll, e.g. on a slope.
The brake pedal has been actuated several times.
The current consumption is too high.
Manually deactivating/activating the system
Fig. 153
Button for the START STOP sys-
tem
Read and observe on page 162 first.
Deactivating/activating
Press the
button » Fig. 153.
When start stop mode is deactivated, the warning light in the button illumi-
nates.
Note
If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then
the automatic start process takes place.
Information messages
Read and observe on page 162 first.
The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display.
Start engine manually!
START MANUALLY
One of the conditions for automatic engine start is not satisfied or the driver's
seat belt is not fastened. The engine must be started manually.
On vehicles with the system KESSY the ignition is turned off by the first press
of the start button, only after pressing for the second time is the start process
initiated.
Fault: Start stop
ERROR START-STOP
A system error is present. Seek help from a specialist garage.
164
Driving
Fatigue detection (break recommendation)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Function
165
Information messages 165
WARNING
For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
you feel tired.
The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
Note
In some situations, the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus
mistakenly recommend a break (e.g. sporty driving, adverse weather condi-
tions or poor road conditions).
The fatigue detection system is designed primarily for motorway driving.
Function
Read and observe on page 165 first.
The fatigue detection system advises the driver on the basis of information
about the steering behaviour, to take a break from driving. The system recom-
mends a break at speeds of 65-200 km/h.
After the ignition has been switched on, the system evaluates the steering be-
haviour for 15 minutes. This baseline analysis is constantly compared with the
current steering behaviour.
If the system detects deviations from normal steering behaviour due to possi-
ble fatigue of the driver, it recommends taking a break from driving.
The system deletes the stored baseline analysis if one of the following con-
ditions is met.
The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened.
The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
Activation/deactivation
The system can be activated/deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the As-
sistants menu option » page 47.
Information messages
Read and observe on page 165 first.
In MAXI DOT display the icon appears for a few seconds
and the following
message.
Fatigue detected. Take a break!
An audible signal is also emitted.
Tyre pressure monitoring
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Save tyre pressure values
166
The tyre pressure monitoring function (hereinafter referred to only as a sys-
tem) monitors the tyre pressure while driving.
If the rolling circumference of a wheel is changed, the warning light
in the
instrument cluster illuminates and an audible signal sounds.
Information on the procedure for the notification of change of tyre inflation
pressure » page 40.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
pressure and this pressure values are stored in the system.
WARNING
Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 198.
The system cannot warn in case of very rapid loss of tyre pressure, e.g. in
the event of a sudden puncture.
165
Assist systems
Save tyre pressure values
Fig. 154
Key for storing the pressure val-
ues
Read and observe on page 165 first.
Saving the tyre pressure values is undertaken as follows.
Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the symbol button
» Fig. 154 .
The warning light
in the instrument cluster illuminates.
An acoustic signal and the control indicator provide information about the
storage of the tyre pressure values.
Release the
symbol button.
The tyre pressure values are always stored in the system, if one of the follow-
ing events occurs.
Change of tyre inflation pressure.
Changing one or more wheels.
Changing position of a wheel on the vehicle.
Illumination of the warning light
in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
Before storing the pressures, the tyres must be inflated to the specified in-
flation pressure » page 198. When storing incorrect pressure values, the
system could possibly not issue any warnings, even with a too low tyre
pressure.
CAUTION
The tyre pressure values are to be saved every 10,000 km or once annually to
ensure correct system functioning.
Hitch and trailer
Hitch
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description 167
Adjusting the ready position 167
Fitting the ball head 168
Check proper fitting 168
Removing the ball head 169
Accessories 169
The maximum trailer drawbar load is 80 kg/h.
WARNING
Check that the ball head is seated correctly and is secured in the mount-
ing recess before starting any journey.
Do not use the ball head, if it is not correctly inserted into the mounting
recess and secured.
Do not use the towing equipment if it is damaged or incomplete.
Do not modify or adapt the towing equipment in any way.
Never release the ball head while the trailer is still coupled.
Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times.
Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely.
CAUTION
Take care with the ball bar - there is a risk of paint damage to the bumper.
When the tow bar is removed always place the cover onto the mounting re-
cess - there is a danger of soiling the mounting recess.
Note
Operation and maintenance of hitch » page 180.
Tow the vehicle by means of the detachable ball rod » page 214.
166
Driving
Description
Fig. 155 Carrier for the towing device / tow bar
Read and observe
and on page 166 first.
The ball head can be removed and is kept in the spare wheel well or in a com-
partment for the spare wheel in the luggage compartment.
Support for the towing device and tow bar » Fig. 155
13-pin power socket
Safety eyelet
Mounting recess
Cap
Dust cap
Ball head
Operating lever
Lock cap
Release pin
Key
locking ball
Note
If you lose the key, please get in touch with a specialist garage.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Adjusting the ready position
Fig. 156 Setting the ready position/ready position
Read and observe
and on page 166 first.
The coupling ball bar must be set prior to installation in the standby position.
If this is not in the ready position, then this must be set to the standby posi-
tion as follows.
Grip the ball head below the protective cap
2
.
Remove the cap from the lock.
Insert the key into the lock, so that its green marking is pointing upwards.
Turn key
1
in direction of the arrow, so that the red marking is facing up-
wards » Fig. 156.
Press the release pin
3
as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow and
at the same time push the lever
4
downwards as far as it will go in the di-
rection of the arrow.
The operating lever remains locked in this position.
CAUTION
In the ready position, the key cannot be removed nor turned to a different po-
sition.
167
Hitch and trailer
Fitting the ball head
Fig. 157 Insert the ball head/lock the lock, and put the lock cover on
Read and observe
and on page 166 first.
Pull cap
4
» Fig. 155 on page 167 downwards.
Adjust the ball head to the ready position » page 167.
Grip the tow bar from underneath » Fig. 157 and insert into the mounting re-
cess until you hear it click into place » .
The operating lever
1
automatically turns upwards and the release pin
2
pops out (its red and green parts are visible) » .
If the operating lever
1
does not automatically emerge, or if the release pin
2
does not pop out, remove the ball head from the mounting recess by turn-
ing the lever downwards as far as it will go. Clean the tapered surfaces on the
ball head and the mounting recess.
Turn the key
3
180° to the right so that its green marker points upward.
Remove the key in the direction of the arrow.
Insert and press the cap
4
onto the lock in the direction of the arrow » .
Check the ball head for secure mounting » page 168.
WARNING
Keep your hands outside the lever's range of motion when attaching the
ball head – there is a risk of fingers being injured!
Never attempt to pull the operating lever upwards forcibly to turn the
key. Doing so would mean the ball head is not attached correctly.
CAUTION
After removing the key, always replace the cover on the lock – there is a risk
of the lock getting dirty.
Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times. Such
dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely.
Check proper fitting
Fig. 158
Correctly secured ball head
Read and observe and on page 166 first.
Check that the ball head is fitted properly each time before use.
Correctly secured ball head » Fig. 158
Lever
1
is up as far as it will go » Fig. 158.
The release pin
2
is completely exposed (both its red and green parts are
visible).
The key is removed.
Cap
3
is on the lock.
The ball head does not come out of the mounting recess even after heavy
“shaking”.
WARNING
The towing device can only be used when the tow bar is correctly locked –
there is the risk of an accident occurring.
168
Driving
Removing the ball head
Fig. 159 Unlock the operating lever of the ball head/removing the ball
head
Read and observe
and on page 166 first.
Remove cover
1
» Fig. 159from the lock in the direction of the arrow.
Insert the key into the lock, so that its green marking is pointing upwards.
Turn the key
2
180° to the left so that its red marker points upward.
Grasp the ball head from underneath.
Press the release pin
3
as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow and
at the same time push the lever
4
downwards as far as it will go in the di-
rection of the arrow.
The ball head is released in this position and falls freely into the hand. If it
does not fall freely into the hand, use your other hand to push it upwards.
At the same time, the ball head latches into the ready position and is thus
ready to be re-inserted into the mounting recess » .
Place the cap
4
» Fig. 155 on page 167 onto the mounting recess.
WARNING
Never allow the ball head to remain unsecured in the boot. This could
cause damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put the safety
of the occupants at risk.
CAUTION
If the lever is held firmly and not pushed downwards as far as it can go, it will
go back up after the ball head is removed and will not latch into the ready po-
sition. The ball head then needs to be brought into this position before the
next time it is fitted.
Tuck the ball bar in the ready position, with the golden key up, in the box -
otherwise there is a risk of damage to the key!
Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever (e.g. do not
step on it).
Note
We recommend that you put the protective cap on the ball before removing
the ball head.
Clean any dirt from the ball head before stowing it away in the box with the
vehicle tool kit.
Accessories
Fig. 160
Representation of the maximum
permissible level of the ball head
of the towing hitch and the per-
missible total weight of the ac-
cessories including the load de-
pending on the load center of
gravity
Read and observe and on page 166 first.
An accessory can mounted on the ball head of the towing hitch (e.g. bike carri-
ers).
If this accessory is used, the maximum permissible overhang of the ball head
of the towing hitch and the permissible gross vehicle weight of the accesso-
ries including load are to be checked.
The maximum permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing hitch is 70
cm » Fig. 160.
The total permitted weight of the accessory including load changes with in-
creasing distance of the centre of gravity of the load from the ball head of the
towing hitch.
169
Hitch and trailer
Distance of the centre of gravity of
the load from the ball head
Permissible total weight of the ac-
cessory, including load
0 cm 80 kg
30 cm 75 kg
60 cm 35 kg
70 cm 0 kg
WARNING
Never exceed the permissible gross weight of the accessory including
load - there is a risk of damaging the ball head of the towing hitch.
Never exceed the permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing
hitch - there is a risk of damaging the ball head of the towing hitch.
Note
We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Trailer
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Attaching and detaching trailers 170
Loading a trailer 171
Towing a trailer 171
Trailer stabilisation (TSA) 172
Anti-theft alarm system 172
If your vehicle has already been factory fitted with towing equipment or is fit-
ted with towing equipment from ŠKODA Original Accessories, then it meets all
of the technical requirements and national legal provisions for towing a trailer.
Note
If there is an error in the trailer lighting system, check the fuses in the fuse box
in the dashboard » page 220.
Attaching and detaching trailers
Fig. 161
Swivel out the 13-pin power
socket, safety eyelet
Coupling
Install the tow bar.
Grip the 13-pin socket at point
A
and swing out in the direction of ar-
row » Fig. 161.
Lift off protective cap
5
» Fig. 155 on page 167 towards the top.
Place the trailer onto the ball.
Insert the trailer cable into the 13-pin socket.
If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7-pin connector, you can use a suitable
adapter from ŠKODA Original Accessories to establish a connection to the elec-
tricity.
Hook the breakaway cable of the trailer to the security lock slot
B
.
The breakaway cable of the trailer has to sag when mounted into the security
lock slot for all trailer positions relative to the vehicle (sharp curves, reverse
driving and the like).
Uncoupling
The uncoupling of the trailer is carried out in reverse order.
Unhook the breakaway cable of the trailer from the security lock slot
B
» Fig. 161.
Pull the trailer cable out of the 13-pin socket.
Remove the trailer from the ball head.
Place the cover
5
on the ball head » Fig. 155 on page 167.
Grip the 13-pin socket at point
A
and swing in the opposite direction to the
arrow » Fig. 161.
170
Driving
Exterior mirrors
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see
the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. National legal
requirements must be observed.
Headlights
The front of the vehicle can be lifted when a trailer is being towed and the
headlights can dazzle other road users.
Adjust the headlight setting on the headlight range control » page 68, Operat-
ing the lights and the instrument illumination.
WARNING
Incorrect or improperly connected electrical installation can cause acci-
dents and serious injury due to electric shock.
Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist ga-
rages.
Never directly connect the trailer's electrical system with the electrical
connections for the tail lights or other current sources.
After coupling the trailer and connecting up the power socket, check the
rear lights on the trailer to ensure they are working.
The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be applied when coupling and
uncoupling the trailer.
Never use the safety eyelet for towing!
CAUTION
Incorrect or improperly connected electrical installations may cause malfunc-
tion of the entire vehicle electronics.
Loading a trailer
The vehicle/trailer combination must be balanced, whereby the maximum per-
missible drawbar load must be utilised. If the drawbar load is too low, it jeop-
ardises the performance of the vehicle/trailer combination.
Distribution of the load
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
close to the axle as possible. Secure the items from slipping.
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
trailer is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving
with this combination.
Tyre pressure
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a “full load” » page 198.
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan-
ces » page 228, Technical data.
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1,000 metres above
mean sea level.
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the ability to climb.
Therefore, for every additional 1,000 m in height (or part), the maximum per-
missible towed weight must be reduced by 10 %.
The towed weight comprises the actual weights of the (loaded) towing vehicle
and the (loaded) trailer.
The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing
equipment are merely test data for the towing equipment. The vehicle-specific
values are detailed in the vehicle documents.
WARNING
The maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the permissible
weight of the trailer must not exceed - this could cause an accident!
A sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safe-
ty - there is a risk of accident!
Towing a trailer
Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive faster than 80 km/h when towing a trailer.
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by acceler-
ating.
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
the brakes gently at first and then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts re-
sulting from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as
a brake.
171
Hitch and trailer
Engine overheating
The speed must be reduced immediately if the needle for the coolant tempera-
ture gauge moves into the right-hand area or the red area of the scale.
Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light
in the instrument cluster
illuminates.
The following guidelines must be observed » page 36,
Coolant.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.
WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic
situation.
CAUTION
If you tow a trailer frequently, you should also have your vehicle inspected be-
tween service intervals.
Trailer stabilisation (TSA)
The trailer stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works
in conjunction with the counter-steering assistance to reduce the amount the
trailer "sways".
After turning on the ignition, the ESC warning light
in the instrument cluster
illuminates for about 2 seconds longer than the ABS warning light.
Function requirements for trailer stabilisation.
The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA
genuine accessories.
The ESC is active. (Warning lights
or
do not illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster).
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the
trailer socket.
The speed is higher than approx. 60 km/h.
The trailer has a rigid drawbar.
WARNING
The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt
you to take greater risks than otherwise.
Avoid abrupt and sudden driving and braking manoeuvres - there is a risk
of accidents.
CAUTION
The trailer stabilisation need not be able to correctly detect all of driving sit-
uations.
Light trailers that sway are not always detected and therefore stabilised ac-
cordingly by the trailer stabilisation.
Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regula-
ted.
Note
The trailer stabilisation works for both braked and unbraked trailers.
Anti-theft alarm system
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is activated when the electrical connec-
tion to the trailer is interrupted.
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or un-
coupled » page 55.
Conditions for including a trailer in the anti-theft alarm system.
The vehicle is factory fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and towing
equipment.
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the
trailer socket.
The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional.
The vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti-theft alarm system
is activated.
CAUTION
For technical reasons, trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the
anti-theft alarm system.
172
Driving
General Maintenance
Car care
Services, modifications and technical alterations
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
173
Statutory checks 173
ŠKODA Service Partners 174
ŠKODA Original parts 174
ŠKODA Original accessories
174
Spoiler 175
Airbags 175
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. must be observed when
carrying out all modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. After carrying out modifi-
cations, repairs or technical alterations, the vehicle will comply with German
road transport regulations (StVO)
Always consult a ŠKODA Partner » page 174before buying accessories or
parts, or before carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations
to your vehicle.
WARNING
Works on your vehicle, which have been carried out unprofessionally, can
cause operational faults – risk of accident!
Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to
operational faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected
systems because of the networking of the electronic components. The op-
erational safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to in-
creased wear of parts.
For the sake of the environment
Technical documents regarding alterations carried out on the vehicle must be
kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers at a later
date. This ensures that the vehicle is recycled in an environmentally sound
manner.
Note
We recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations
carried out by a specialist garage.
Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the approval of
the manufacturer is excluded from the warranty » Service schedule.
The ŠKODA Partner does not assume any liability for products that have not
been approved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. even though these may be products with
an operational approval or that have been approved by a government testing
institute.
We advise you only to use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original
Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability,
safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these.
ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts can be purchased from
ŠKODA Partners, who will also perform the professional assembly of the pur-
chased parts.
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
Read and observe
on page 173 first.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with its
intended weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA Partner.
He will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full
functioning of the vehicle as well as to prevent damage.
This involves, for example, the coolant, battery replacement and the like.
Statutory checks
Read and observe on page 173 first.
Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability and road
worthiness and/or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle to be tested at specific
intervals. These tests can be carried out by workshops or testing stations that
have been legally authorised for this purpose.
173
Car care
The ŠKODA Service Partners are up-to-date on the legally required tests and
will prepare the vehicle for the tests as part of a service operation if required,
or will be responsible for carrying out these tests. The specialist garages can
carry out the specified tests directly, if required by the customer, if they are
authorised to do so. This saves you time and money.
Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for
prior checking in preparation of a legally required test, we recommend that you
consult the service consultant of your ŠKODA Service Partner beforehand.
Based on their appraisal, the service consultant will tell you which areas you
should focus on in order to ensure that your vehicle will pass the technical test
without any problems. This allows you to avoid additional expenses resulting
from a possible subsequent test.
ŠKODA Service Partners
Read and observe on page 173 first.
ŠKODA Service Partners are equipped with modern, specially developed tools
and equipment. Here, trained specialists have access to a comprehensive
range of ŠKODA Original Parts and ŠKODA Original Accessories for carrying out
modifications, repairs and technical alterations.
All ŠKODA service partners operate according to the latest guidelines and in-
structions from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. All service and repair work is therefore car-
ried out on time and to the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instructions
and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good
technical condition.
ŠKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle
and to provide quality work. We therefore advise you to have all modifications,
repairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service
Partner.
ŠKODA Original parts
Read and observe
on page 173 first.
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, since these
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. They correspond exactly to ŠKODA
AUTO a.s. specifications in respect of design, dimensional accuracy and materi-
al and are identical to the components used in the batch production.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. can guarantee the safety, suitability, and long life of these
products. We therefore recommend that you only use ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. supplies the market with a complete range of ŠKODA Genu-
ine Parts not only while the model is still in production but with wear-and-tear
parts for at least 15 years after the end of series production and with all other
vehicle parts for at least 10 years.
ŠKODA service partners are liable for any defects in ŠKODA original parts for a
period of 2 years after sale in accordance with materials defect liability under
the law unless otherwise agreed in the purchase agreement. You should keep
the confirmed warranty certificate and the receipt for these components for
this period, so that the commencement of the warranty term may be verified.
Body repairs
ŠKODA vehicles are designed so that if the body suffers damage, it is only nec-
essary to replace those parts which are in fact damaged.
Before you decide to have damaged body parts replaced, however, you should
first contact your specialist garage to determine whether or not such parts can
also be repaired. Repairs to body parts are usually cheaper.
ŠKODA Original accessories
Read and observe on page 173 first.
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the follow-
ing:
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. offers a warranty on the reliability, safety and suitability for
your particular vehicle of these accessories. Although we constantly monitor
the market, we are not able to assess or offer a warranty on other products
even though in some instances such products may have a type approval or
may have been approved by a nationally recognised approval authority.
All accessory products go through a fastidious process of technical develop-
ment (technical tests) and quality inspection (customer tests), and only if all
tests are positive does the product become a ŠKODA Genuine Accessory.
Our ŠKODA Genuine Accessories service also provides expert advice and pro-
fessional fitting if requested by the customer.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects in ŠKODA Genuine Parts for a
period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with materials de-
fect liability legislation, unless otherwise agreed in the purchase contract or in
174
General Maintenance
any other agreements. You should keep the confirmed warranty certificate and
the receipt for these accessories for this period, so that the commencement of
the warranty term may be verified.
In addition, ŠKODA Service Partners also stock a range of suitable car care
products as well as those parts which are subject to natural wear and tear,
such as tyres, batteries, bulbs and wiper blades.
Note
The accessories authorized by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. will be offered by the ŠKODA
Partners in all countries where ŠKODA AUTO a.s. has a sales and service net-
work. This will usually be in the form of a printed catalogue of Original ŠKODA
Accessories, in the form of separate printed brochures or in the form of offers
for ŠKODA Genuine Accessories on the ŠKODA Partner's website.
Spoiler
Read and observe on page 173 first.
If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination
with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid, then the following instruc-
tions must be adhered to.
For safety reasons, the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front
bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the luggage compart-
ment lid.
This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own, in
combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or in
combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.
We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA service partner for any repairs to
or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
WARNING
If work on your vehicle's spoilers is not carried out properly, this can lead
to operational faults - risk of accident and serious injuries.
If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
The front brakes may overheat, which can have a negative impact on the
functioning of the braking system – there is a risk of an accident!
Airbags
Read and observe on page 173 first.
The system components of the airbag system can be situated in the front
bumper, doors, front seats, roof lining or body.
WARNING
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also se-
riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.
Airbag modules cannot be repaired.
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed
from old cars or have been recycled.
Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle. The airbags may then
not be deployed properly or even at all in the event of an accident.
No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
WARNING
A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
proved wheels and tyre combinations, can alter the functioning of the air-
bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork.
175
Car care
WARNING
The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage
can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system. Any work
on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist ga-
rage. The following guidelines must be observed.
Never drive with inner door panels removed.
Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the
resulting openings have not been properly sealed.
Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, unless
the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed.
Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional
loudspeakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner
door panels.
Washing vehicle
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Washing by hand
176
Automatic car wash systems 177
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner 177
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
is frequent washing.
How often the vehicle should be washed depends on factors such as:
Frequency of use.
Parking situation (garage, under trees etc.).
Season.
Weather conditions.
Environmental influences.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust,
tar, soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to
the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect
can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, ac-
centuate this caustic effect.
It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
of the winter.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking
system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off – risk of accident!
CAUTION
Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight – risk of paint damage.
For the sake of the environment
Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose.
Washing by hand
Read and observe
and on page 176 first.
Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible.
Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a washing glove or a washing brush.
Work from the top to the bottom - starting with the roof.
Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such
areas.
Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
leather.
CAUTION
When washing the car by hand, protect your hands and arms from sharp-
edged metal parts (e.g. when cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel
housings or the wheel trims, etc.) - There is a risk of cuts!
Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle's paintwork.
176
General Maintenance
Automatic car wash systems
Read and observe and on page 176 first.
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle
in an automatic car wash system (e.g. closing the windows and the sliding/tilt-
ing roof etc.).
If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts, such as a spoiler,
roof rack system, two-way radio aerial etc., it is best to consult the operator of
the car wash system beforehand.
After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the lips of the wipers should be
cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then de-
greased.
WARNING
Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle
in an automatic car wash system. Never manually fold in electric exterior
mirrors - always use the electric controls.
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
Read and observe
and on page 176 first.
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
use of the equipment must be observed. This applies in particular to the pres-
sure used and to the spraying distance.
Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft mate-
rials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
WARNING
Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters!
CAUTION
If washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high-pressure cleaner,
ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the
door/panel joints – risk of freezing!
To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high-pressure
cleaners or steam jets, the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short pe-
riods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed.
The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 °C – risk
of damaging the vehicle.
See also Washing cars with decorative films using a high-pressure clean-
er » page 179 .
Taking care of your vehicle exterior
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Taking care of your vehicle's paintwork
178
Plastic parts 178
Rubber seals 178
Chrome parts
178
Decorative films 179
Windows and exterior mirrors 179
Headlight lenses 179
Door lock cylinders 179
Cavity protection 180
Jack 180
Wheels 180
Towing device and mounting recess 180
Underbody protection 180
We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the pack-
age must be observed.
WARNING
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com-
pletely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning!
Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when clean-
ing the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims –
risk of cuts!
177
Car care
CAUTION
Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface.
Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned.
For the sake of the environment
Used cans of vehicle care product represent hazardous waste that is harmful
to the environment. These must be disposed of in accordance with national
legislation.
Note
Because of the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any poten-
tial problems with the cleaning and care of your vehicle exterior, we recom-
mend that cleaning and care of your vehicle be carried out by a ŠKODA Service
Partner.
Taking care of your vehicle's paintwork
Read and observe
and on page 177 first.
Minor paint damage such as scratches, scuffs or stone chips should be treated
immediately if possible, using touch-up pens or sprays.
Preserving the vehicle paintwork
A thorough wax treatment provides the vehicle's paintwork with highly effec-
tive protection against harmful environmental influences.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest,
when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body-
work after it has dried thoroughly.
Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat
the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax.
Polishing
Polishing is necessary if the vehicle's paintwork has become unattractive and
if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives.
If the polish does not contain any preserving elements, the paint must be trea-
ted with a preservative afterwards.
CAUTION
Never apply wax to the windows.
Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or
hard waxes.
Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches.
Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
If possible, do not apply any paint care products to parts of the bodywork
that come into contact with door seals or window guides.
Plastic parts
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth.
If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts, use cleaning prod-
ucts specially designed for this purpose.
CAUTION
Do not use paint care products on plastic parts.
Rubber seals
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
All door seals and window guides are factory-treated with a colourless matt
varnish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect
against driving noise.
Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products.
CAUTION
Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coating,
and driving noise may occur.
Chrome parts
Read and observe
and on page 177 first.
First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a
soft, dry cloth.
If this method does not completely clean chrome parts, use a specific chrome
care product.
178
General Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment - risk of surface
scratches.
Decorative films
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Wash the films with a mild soap solution and clean, warm water. Never use
harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents, as this could damage the films.
The following instructions must be followed when washing the vehicle with a
high-pressure cleaner:
The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be
50 cm.
Keep jet perpendicular to the film surface.
The maximum water temperature is 50 °C.
The maximum water pressure is 80 bar.
CAUTION
In the winter months, do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from
the areas with films. Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of
snow or ice – risk of film damage.
Windows and exterior mirrors
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir-
rors.
Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water.
Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this
purpose.
When drying the windows after washing the vehicle, do not use window leath-
ers that have been used to polish the bodywork. Residues of preservatives in
the window leather can make the window dirty and reduce visibility.
CAUTION
The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direc-
tion to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass.
Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel, sand or
salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors – there is a risk of
damage to the surface of the windows and mirrors.
Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water – risk of
cracks forming in the glass.
When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the
paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage.
Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp-edged objects or corro-
sive and acidic cleaning agents – there is a risk of damaging the heating ele-
ments or window aerial.
Headlight lenses
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean, warm water and soap.
CAUTION
Never wipe headlights to dry.
Do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses, as this may damage
the protective paintwork and consequently cause cracks to form on the head-
light lenses.
Do not use any harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents to clean the
headlights, as this could damage the headlight lenses.
Door lock cylinders
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Specific products must be used for de-icing door lock cylinders.
CAUTION
When washing your vehicle, ensure as little water as possible gets into the
locking cylinders.
179
Car care
Cavity protection
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected
for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
This wax protection does not need to be inspected or re-applied.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole-
um cleaner.
WARNING
Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re-
move wax – risk of fire!
Jack
Read and observe
and on page 177 first.
The jack is maintenance-free.
If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should be lubricated with a suitable
lubricant.
Wheels
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Wheel rims
Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular
basis.
Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion, otherwise the rim material will be
corroded.
Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately.
Light alloy wheels
After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product
for light alloy wheels. Products which cause abrasion must not be used to
treat the wheel rims.
CAUTION
Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This
may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the
steering wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of
the steering. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.
Towing device and mounting recess
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Close the mounting recess with the cap to prevent any ingress of dirt.
If dirt is present, clean the inner surfaces of the mounting recess and treat
with a suitable preservative.
Always check the ball head before hitching a trailer. Apply a suitable grease, if
necessary.
Fit the protective cap when stowing away the ball head to protect the luggage
compartment against dirt.
CAUTION
Apply grease to the inner part of the mounting recess. Make sure you do not
remove any grease.
Underbody protection
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and me-
chanical influences.
When driving, it cannot be guaranteed that no damage to the protective layer
will occur.
We recommend having the protective layer underneath the vehicle and the
chassis checked — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of
winter.
WARNING
Never use additional underbody protection or anti-corrosion agents for ex-
haust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filters or heat shields.
When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances may
ignite - risk of fire!
180
General Maintenance
Taking care of the interior
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Natural leather
181
Synthetic leather, fabrics and Alcantara
®
182
Seat covers 182
Seat belts 183
Regular and proper care helps to ensure efficiency and maintain the value of
your vehicle.
We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the pack-
age must be observed.
WARNING
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com-
pletely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning!
CAUTION
Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible
stains on the material (leather), panels and textiles.
Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe
polish, etc., from the material (leather), panels and textiles as quickly as possi-
ble.
Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature
inside the vehicle is high.
Do not attach scent dispensers or air fresheners to the dash panel – risk of
damage to the dash panel.
Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows, the rear side win-
dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the
window aerial. These may get damaged.
Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface
of the panelling.
Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned.
Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product.
For the sake of the environment
Used cans of vehicle care product represent hazardous waste that is harmful
to the environment. These must be disposed of in accordance with national
legislation.
Note
Because of the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any poten-
tial problems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle, we rec-
ommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by
a ŠKODA Service Partner.
Natural leather
Read and observe and on page 181 first.
Leather is a natural material with specific properties, and requires regular
cleaning and maintenance.
The leather should be cleaned on a regular basis depending on the amount of
wear-and-tear.
Dust and dirt in the pores and folds act as abrasive materials. This leads to se-
vere corrosion and the premature brittleness of the leather surface.
We recommend that you remove dust regularly and at short intervals using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water-dampened cotton or woollen cloth
and then dry with a clean, dry cloth » .
Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution (2 ta-
blespoons of neutral soap to 1 litre of water).
To remove stains, use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose.
Treat the leather regularly and at suitable intervals using a suitable leather
care product.
CAUTION
Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that
no water gets into the seams. Otherwise, the leather could become brittle or
cracked.
Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the
leather from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods,
protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it.
181
Car care
Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharp-
edged belts, jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs
of rubbing on the surface. Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as
a justified complaint.
The use of an additional mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the
leather surface of the steering wheel.
Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular ba-
sis and each time after cleaning. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to
breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface
protection.
Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fast-
ness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers,
even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat cov-
ers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour
fastness of the clothing textiles.
Note
When using the vehicle, minor visible changes may occur to the leather parts
of the covers (e.g. wrinkles or creases) as a result of the stress applied to the
covers.
Synthetic leather, fabrics and Alcantara
®
Read and observe
and on page 181 first.
Artificial leather
Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth.
If this method does not completely clean the artificial leather, use a mild soap
solution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose.
Fabric
Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors, boot cover, etc. us-
ing specific cleaning agents, e.g., dry foam.
Use a soft sponge, brush, or commercially available microfibre cloth.
Use a cloth and special detergent to clean the headlining.
Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush.
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning glove”.
Alcantara
®
Dust and fine dirt particles in pores, creases and seams may chafe and damage
the surface.
If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods, protect the Al-
cantara
®
seat upholstery from direct sunlight to prevent fading.
Minor changes in colour caused by use are normal.
CAUTION
Do not use leather cleaners on Alcantara
®
seat upholstery.
Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar agents
on Alcantara
®
seat upholstery.
Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order
to stop the fabric from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked outside for long peri-
ods of time, cover the fabric to protect it from direct sunlight.
Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fast-
ness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers,
even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat cov-
ers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour
fastness of the clothing textiles.
Seat covers
Read and observe and on page 181 first.
Electrically heated seats
Do not clean the covers by moistening, as this can damage the seat heating
system.
Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers.
Seats without seat heating
Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning.
Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially de-
signed for this purpose.
Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use, can be removed by
brushing against the direction of hair with a damp brush.
Always clean all parts of the covers, so that there are no visible edges. Then
allow the seat to dry completely.
CAUTION
Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner.
Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the
heater.
182
General Maintenance
Do not sit on wet seats - risk of seat deformation.
Always clean the seats “from seam to seam”.
Seat belts
Read and observe and on page 181 first.
The belt webbing must always be kept clean.
Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water.
Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush.
Dirty belt webbing may impair the correct functioning of the inertia reel.
WARNING
The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.
Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
destroy the fabric.
The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive
liquids (e.g. acids).
Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage
to the belt webbing, seat belt connections, inertia reel or lock is detected,
the seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage.
The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up.
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Refuelling 184
Unleaded petrol 184
Diesel fuel 185
The correct grades of fuel for your vehicle are stated on a sticker affixed to the
inside of the fuel filler flap » Fig. 162 on page 184 -
.
WARNING
The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canis-
ter in the vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your
vehicle for safety reasons. in the event of an accident, these canisters can
become damaged and fuel may escape – risk of fire!
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and
the exhaust system.
Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage!
If the vehicle was not purchased in the country in which it was intended to
be operated, you should check whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer
is offered in the country where the vehicle will be operated. You should also
perhaps check whether the manufacturer has recommended a different fuel
for operation of the vehicle in the country concerned. If no prescribed fuel is
available, then you must check whether it is permitted by the manufacturer to
operate the vehicle with another fuel type.
183
Inspecting and replenishing
Refuelling
Fig. 162 Open fuel filler flap / tank cap
Read and observe
and on page 183 first.
Before refuelling, switch off the auxiliary heating system (auxiliary heating and
ventilation) » page 119.
Unlock the vehicle.
Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 162 -
.
Unscrew the filler cap by turning it in a counter clockwise direction and place
the cap onto the top of the fuel filler flap» Fig. 162 -
.
Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time » .
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the
pump.
Insert the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and screw it in a clockwise direc-
tion until it clicks into place.
Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly.
CAUTION
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly.
Note
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres, including a reserve of approx.
10.5 litres.
Unleaded petrol
Read and observe and on page 183 first.
The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol that meets the EN 228
1)
standard.
All petrol engines can be operated using petrol with a maximum of 10% bioe-
thanol (E10).
Specified fuel - unleaded petrol 95/91 or 92 or 93 RON
Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON. Unleaded petrol with the
octane ratings 91 or 92 or 93 RON can also be used, but may result in a slight
loss in performance and slightly increased fuel consumption .
Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol min. 95 RON
Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON or higher.
If unleaded gasoline is not available with the octane number 95 RON, in an
emergency petrol with the octane rating of 91 or 92 or 93 RON can be used to
fill the tank, but this leads to a slight loss of performance and a slightly in-
creased fuel consumption » .
Prescribed fuel - unleaded fuel 98/95 RON
Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON or higher. Unleaded petrol
95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance.
In an emergency, if unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 98 RON or 95 RON
is not available, you may refuel with petrol with an octane rating of 91 or 92 or
93 RON »
.
Fuel additives
Unleaded petrol complying with EN 228
1 )
meets all the conditions for a smooth
running engine. We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used. This
can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust sys-
tem.
1)
In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane rating 95 or 91 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane rating 95 or 98.
184
General Maintenance
CAUTION
Even one filling of the tank with petrol that does not meet the standards can
lead to serious damage to parts of the exhaust system!
If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is used by mistake, do not start the engine or
switch on the ignition! Engine parts could be significantly damaged!
CAUTION
If, in an emergency, the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower oc-
tane number than the one prescribed, the journey must only be continued at
medium engine speeds and a low engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a
high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel using petrol of the
prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the
one prescribed is used.
Even in the event of an emergency, petrol of a lower octane number than 91
RON must not be used, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged!
CAUTION
In no case may fuel additives with metal components be used, especially not
with manganese and iron content. There is a risk of causing considerable
damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system!
CAUTION
Fuels with metal components, such as LRP (lead replacement petrol) must
not be used. There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the
engine or exhaust system!
Note
Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
engine can be used without limitations.
The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON in does not re-
sult in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in ve-
hicles for which unleaded petrol 95/91, 92 or 93 RON is specified.
On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of pet-
rol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and re-
duce fuel consumption.
Diesel fuel
Read and observe and on page 183 first.
The vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that meets the EN 590
1)
standard.
All diesel engines can be operated using diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% bi-
odiesel (B7)
2)
.
On the Indian market, your vehicle will only be able to run on diesel fuel com-
pliant with standard IS 1460/Bharat IV. If diesel fuel which complies with this
standard is not available, you can refuel with diesel fuel according to standard
IS 1460/Bharat III in case of emergency.
Operation in winter - Winter-grade diesel fuel
In the cold season, only use “winter-grade diesel fuel” which will still operate
properly even at a temperature of -20 °C.
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel
fuels available have a different temperature characteristic. ŠKODA Partners
and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with in-
formation regarding the diesel fuels available.
Preheating fuel
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system. This secures opera-
tion of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of
-25 °C.
Diesel fuel additives
The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the con-
ditions for a smooth running engine. We therefore recommend that no diesel
fuel additives are used. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine or the exhaust system.
1)
In Germany also DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia GOST R 52368-2005 / EN 590:2004.
2)
In Germany complying with standard DIN 52638, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590.
185
Inspecting and replenishing
CAUTION
Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the
standard, can cause severe damage to parts of the engine, the fuel and ex-
haust system!
If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above men-
tioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used, do not start the engine or switch on the
ignition! Engine parts could be significantly damaged!
Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults.
CAUTION
The vehicle cannot be operated with biofuel RME, therefore this fuel must
not be filled in the tank and used for driving the vehicle. The use of biofuel
RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system.
Do not mix any fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar
agents), into the diesel. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine or the exhaust system!
Engine compartment
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening and closing the bonnet
187
Engine compartment overview
188
Radiator fan
188
Windscreen washer system
188
WARNING
Injuries or scolding or risks of accident or fire may occur when working in
the engine compartment. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the
warning instructions outlined below and with the general applicable safety
rules. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area!
WARNING
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment
Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever in-
to Neutral, or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, move the
selector lever into position P.
Allow the engine to cool.
Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant escaping from the
engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until no more steam or coolant
is escaping.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment
Keep all people, especially children, away from the engine compartment.
Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm. The fan might
suddenly start running!
Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
The coolant is harmful to health.
Avoid contact with the coolant.
Coolant vapours are harmful to health.
Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir, cover it
with a cloth to protect your face, hands and arms from hot steam or hot
coolant.
If any coolant splashes into your eyes, immediately rinse out your eyes
with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
Always keep the coolant in the original container, safe from people who
are not completely independent, especially children - there is a danger of
poisoning!
Consult a doctor immediately if coolant is swallowed.
Never spill fluids on the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the antifreeze con-
tained in the coolant) may ignite!
WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning
Pay particular attention to rotating engine parts (e.g. V-ribbed belt, gen-
erator, radiator fan) and the high voltage ignition system – risk to life!
Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system.
186
General Maintenance
WARNING (Continued)
Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
Always make sure that no jewellery, loose clothing or long hair can get
caught in rotating engine parts – risk to life! Always remove any jewellery,
tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any
work.
WARNING
Information for working on the fuel system or the electrical system
Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system.
Do not smoke.
Never work near open flames.
Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby.
WARNING
Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid
containers.
Keep the working fluids in sealed original containers and safe from peo-
ple who are not completely independent, e.g. children.
If you intend to work underneath the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle
from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks; the car
jack is not sufficient – risk of injury!
CAUTION
Always top up using the correct specification of fluids. This may result in major
operating problems and also vehicle damage!
For the sake of the environment
In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids
and the special tools and knowledge required for such work, we recommend
that fluids be changed by a specialist garage.
Note
Please consult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids.
Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA Origi-
nal Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 163 Bonnet release lever/release lever
Read and observe and on page 186 first.
Open flap
Pull the release lever under the dash panel in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 163.
Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers
are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork could be
damaged.
Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow
2
to unlock the bonnet.
Grasp the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas
spring.
Close the flap
Pull the bonnet down far enough to overcome the force of the pressurised
gas spring.
Close the bonnet from a height of approximately 20 cm with a slight swing
WARNING
Check that the bonnet is closed properly.
If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving, stop the
vehicle immediately and close the bonnet – risk of accident!
CAUTION
Never open the bonnet by the locking lever » Fig. 163.
187
Inspecting and replenishing
Engine compartment overview
Fig. 164 Principle sketch: Engine compartment
Read and observe and on page 186 first.
Arrangement in the engine compartment » Fig. 164
Coolant expansion reservoir
192
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
188
Engine oil filler opening
191
Engine oil dipstick
190
Brake fluid reservoir
193
Battery (below a cover)
193
Note
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and
diesel engines is practically identical.
Radiator fan
Read and observe and on page 186 first.
The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor. Operation is controlled ac-
cording to the temperature of the coolant.
1
2
3
4
5
6
WARNING
After switching off the ignition, the fan may intermittently continue to op-
erate for approx. 10 minutes.
Windscreen washer system
Fig. 165
Engine compartment: Wind-
screen washer fluid reservoir
Read and observe and on page 186 first.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compart-
ment » Fig. 165.
This contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the
headlight cleaning system.
The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 5.5 litres on vehicles that
have a headlight cleaning system
1)
.
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and head-
lights. We recommend using clean water together with a screen cleaner from
the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories (with antifreeze in winter), which will
remove any stubborn dirt.
The washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze in winter even if
the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles.
Under exceptional circumstances, methylated spirits can also be used if no
screen cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated
spirits must not be more than 15 %. The freeze protection at this concentration
is sufficient only to -5 °C.
1)
In some countries, 5.5 ltr. applies for both variants.
188
General Maintenance
CAUTION
Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added
to the windscreen washer fluid.
If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, only cleaning prod-
ucts which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be
added to the windscreen washer fluid.
Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when re-
filling, as this may cause contamination of the liquid transportation system,
leading in turn to a windscreen washer system malfunction.
Engine oil
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Specifications and capacity 189
Checking the oil level
190
Replenishing
191
The engine has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil that can be use
throughout the year - except in extreme climate zones.
The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development. Thus the in-
formation stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publica-
tion.
ŠKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manu-
facturer. We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a
ŠKODA Service Partner.
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following can be indicated sep-
arately or together with other specifications on the bottle.
The oil capacities include oil filter change. Check the oil level when filling; do
not over fill. The oil level must be between the markings » page 190.
WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 186.
Stop driving if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine
oil under the current conditions. Switch off the engine and seek assistance
from a specialist garage.
Do not drive on if the oil level is above range
A
» Fig. 166 on
page 190. Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist ga-
rage.
CAUTION
Do not pour any additives into the engine oil – risk of serious damage to the
engine parts!
Note
Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you en-
gine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle.
We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
If oil comes into contact with your skin, the affected area must be washed
thoroughly.
Specifications and capacity
Read and observe
and on page 189 first.
Specifications and capacity (in l) for vehicles with flexible service intervals
Petrol engines Specification Capacity
1.4 l/92 kW TSI VW 503 00, VW 504 00 3.6
1.8 l/112, 118 kW TSI VW 504 00 4.6
2.0 l/147 kW TSI VW 504 00 4.6
3.6 l/191 kW FSI VW 504 00 5.5
Diesel engines
a)
Specification Capacity
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 4.3
2.0 ltr/103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4.3
2.0 ltr/125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4.3
a)
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without DPF
189
Inspecting and replenishing
Specifications and capacity (in l) for vehicles with fixed service intervals
Petrol engines Specification Capacity
1.4 l/92 kW TSI VW 501 01, VW 502 00 3.6
1.8 l/112, 118 kW TSI
VW 502 00
4.6
applies to Russia
SAE 0W-30
VW 502 00 / 505 00
2.0 l/147 kW TSI
VW 502 00
4.6
applies to Russia
SAE 0W-30
VW 502 00 / 505 00
3.6 l/191 kW FSI VW 502 00 5.5
Diesel engines
a)
Specification Capacity
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 4.3
2.0 ltr/103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4.3
2.0 ltr/125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4.3
a)
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without DPF
CAUTION
If the above engine oils are not available, a different engine oil can be used in
an emergency. To prevent damage to the engine, a maximum of 0.5 litres only
of the following engine oils may be used until the next oil change:
For petrol engine models: ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or API SN/API SM;
For diesel engine models: ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
Checking the oil level
Fig. 166
Principle sketch: Dipstick
Read and observe and on page 189 first.
The dipstick indicates the engine oil level » Fig. 166.
Checking the oil level
Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has
reached its operating temperature.
Switch off the engine.
Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the sump.
Open the bonnet.
Pull out the dipstick.
Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop.
Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.
Oil level within range
A
No oil must be refilled.
Oil level within range
B
Oil can be refilled. The oil level may lie in range
A
.
Oil level within range
C
The engine must be topped up with oil so that the oil level at least reaches
range
B
.
The engine burns some oil. The oil consumption may be as much as 0.5 l/1 000
km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you op-
erate your vehicle. Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the
first 5 000 kilometres.
The oil level must be checked at regular intervals. We recommend it be
checked after each time you refuel or prior to making a long journey.
We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range
A
, but not above, if
the engine has been operating at high loads, for example, during a lengthy
motorway trip during the summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a
high mountain pass.
The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is
too low » page 37,
Engine oil level. Check the oil level using the dipstick as
soon as possible. Add oil accordingly.
CAUTION
The oil level must never be above the
A
range » Fig. 166 – there is a risk of
damaging the exhaust system!
190
General Maintenance
Replenishing
Read and observe and on page 189 first.
Check the oil level » page 190.
Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening » Fig. 164 on page 188.
Replenish the oil in portions of 0.5 litres in accordance with the correct speci-
fications » page 189.
Check the oil level » page 190.
Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully.
Coolant
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Capacity
191
Checking the coolant level
192
Replenishing
192
The coolant consists of water with coolant additive. This mixture guarantees
antifreeze protection, protects the cooling/heater system against corrosion
and prevents lime formation.
Vehicles exported to countries with a mild climate are already factory-filled
with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about -25 . In
these countries, the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 40%.
Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory-filled
with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about -35 °C. In
these countries, the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50%.
If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons, the con-
centration of coolant additive can be increased up to a maximum of 60% (anti-
freeze protection down to approx. -40 °C).
When refilling, only use the same antifreeze identified on the coolant expan-
sion vessel » Fig. 167 on page 192.
WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 186.
CAUTION
Do not continue if for some reason it is not possible to fill with coolant un-
der the current circumstances! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from
a specialist garage.
If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could
ventilate - there is a risk of engine damage,
do not continue driving! Switch
off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must never be under
40%.
Over 60% of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protec-
tion and cooling effect.
A coolant additive that does not comply with the correct specifications can
significantly reduce the corrosion protection.
Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can con-
sequently result in major engine damage!
Do not fill the coolant above the mark
A
» Fig. 167 on page 192.
If a fault causes the engine to overheat, we recommend visiting a specialist
garage, as otherwise serious engine damage may occur.
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Capacity
Read and observe and on page 191 first.
Coolant capacity (in litres)
1)
Petrol engines Capacity
1.4 l/92 kW TSI 7.7
1.8 l/112 kW TSI
1.8 l/118 kW TSI
8.6
1)
The coolant capacity is approximately 1 Litre greater on vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater
(auxiliary heating and ventilation).
191
Inspecting and replenishing
Petrol engines Capacity
2.0 l/147 kW TSI 8.6
3.6 l/191 kW FSI 9.0
Diesel engines Capacity
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR 8.4
2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR 8.4
2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR 8.4
Checking the coolant level
Fig. 167
Engine compartment: Coolant
expansion reservoir
Read and observe and on page 191 first.
The coolant expansion reservoir is located in the engine compart-
ment » Fig. 167.
Explanation of graphic » Fig. 167
Mark for the maximum permissible coolant level
Mark for the lowest permissible coolant level
The coolant level should be kept between the marks
A
and
B
.
If the coolant level is above the mark
A,
no coolant may be topped up.
If the coolant level is below the mark
B,
the coolant must be topped up.
Checking the level
Switch off the engine.
Open the bonnet.
Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle. » Fig. 167.
Check the coolant level only when the engine is cold.
A
B
If the engine is warm, the test result may be inaccurate. The level can also be
above the mark
A
» Fig. 167.
If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low, this is indicated by
the warning light
illuminating in the instrument cluster » page 36,
Cool-
ant. We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir
from time to time.
Loss of coolant
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system. Do
not merely top up the coolant. Have the cooling system checked by a specialist
garage.
Replenishing
Read and observe and on page 191 first.
The coolant expansion tank must always contain a small amount of cool-
ant » page 191, in section Introduction.
Switch off the engine.
Allow the engine to cool.
Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and carefully un-
screw the cap.
Replenish the coolant.
Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
CAUTION
Only top up with new coolant.
Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available. In
this case, use only water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and cool-
ant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible.
Brake fluid
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Checking the brake fluid level 193
Changing 193
192
General Maintenance
WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 186.
Do not continue your journey if the fluid level has fallen below the MIN
marking » Fig. 168 on page 193 - there is a risk of an accident. Seek help
from a specialist garage.
Do not use used brake fluid - the function of the brake system may be im-
paired – risk of accident!
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
Note
The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service.
We recommend using brake fluids from the ŠKODA Original Accessories
range.
Checking the brake fluid level
Fig. 168
Engine compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir
Read and observe and on page 193 first.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment » Fig. 168.
Switch off the engine.
Open the bonnet.
Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir » Fig. 168.
The level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.
A slight drop in the fluid level results in operation due to normal wear-and-tear
and the automatic adjustment of the brake pads.
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid
level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” mark-
ing.
If the brake fluid level is too low, this is indicated by the warning light
» page 35,
Brake system illuminating in the instrument cluster.
Changing
Read and observe and on page 193 first.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the
environment.
Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake
system.
The water content lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid.
The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications:
VW 50114;
FMVSS 116 DOT4.
Vehicle battery
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Open cover
195
Checking the battery electrolyte level
195
Charging
196
Replacing
196
Disconnecting or reconnecting
196
Automatic load deactivation
197
Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
Symbol Meaning
Always wear eye protection.
Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
tection.
193
Inspecting and replenishing
Symbol Meaning
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
vehicle battery.
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
is produced.
Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
WARNING
There is risk of injuries, poisoning, chemical burns, explosions or fire when
working on the battery and on the electrical system. It is essential to com-
ply with the generally applicable rules of safety as well as the warning in-
structions outlined below.
Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde-
pendent, especially children.
Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings. Protect your eyes by wearing safety goggles or a
face shield – risk of blindness!
Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled
with the greatest of care.
Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivi-
tis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs.
Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and, if it comes into contact with the
skin, causes deep wounds that take a long time to heal. Repeated contact
with diluted acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, skin cracks).
If any battery acid comes into contact with your eyes, rinse the affected
eye immediately with clean water for several minutes and consult a doctor
immediately!
Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. If you swal-
low battery acid, consult a doctor immediately!
WARNING
It is prohibited to work with naked flames or lights.
It is prohibited to smoke or carry out any activities that produce sparks.
Never use a damaged vehicle battery – risk of explosion!
WARNING (Continued)
Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery – risk of explosion and
chemical burns!
Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
Never jump-start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels – risk of
explosion and chemical burns.
WARNING
When you charge a battery, hydrogen is released, and a highly explosive
gas mixture is also produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling
over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is
on.
Creating a bridge between the poles on the battery (e.g. with a metal ob-
ject or cable) creates a short circuit - risk of melting the lead bars, and risk
of explosion, battery fire and acid splashes.
Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices.
Strong sparking represents a risk of injury.
Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the en-
gine, the ignition and all electrical components and disconnect the negative
terminal (-) on the battery.
CAUTION
Improper handling of the battery can lead to damage. We recommend having
all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a specialist garage.
CAUTION
The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off,
otherwise the vehicle's electrical system (electronic components) can be dam-
aged. When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system, first of all
disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the battery, and then the positive ter-
minal (+).
When connecting the battery to the electrical system, first of all connect the
positive terminal (+) of the battery, and then the negative terminal (-). Under
no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly – risk of a
cable fire.
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
of damage to the paintwork.
Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle bat-
tery housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.
194
General Maintenance
If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will
discharge. This is because certain electrical components consume electricity
(e. g. control units) also in idle state. Prevent the battery from discharging by
disconnecting the battery's negative terminal (-) or continuously charging the
battery with a very low charging current.
If the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips, the vehicle battery
will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge.
For the sake of the environment
A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste.
These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations.
Note
You should replace batteries older than 5 years.
Open cover
Fig. 169
Polyester cover of the vehicle battery / plastic cover of the vehi-
cle battery
Read and observe and on page 194 first.
The battery is located in the engine compartment, with some equipment under
a polyester cover » Fig. 169or in the left side compartment of the luggage com-
partment » page 101.
Battery in the engine compartment
Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 169 -
or press
the catch on the side of the battery cover in the direction » Fig. 169 -
.
fold the cover up and remove.
The battery cover is installed in reverse order.
Battery in the boot
The battery is located in the left side compartment with the symbol
» page 101.
Checking the battery electrolyte level
Fig. 170
Vehicle battery: Electrolyte level
indicator
Read and observe and on page 194 first.
On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator, » Fig. 170 the
colouring of the display can indicate the acidic level.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
knock on the indicator before carrying out the check.
Black colour - electrolyte level is correct.
Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for
checking the energy level for the recurring engine start.
We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist
garage, especially in the following cases.
High external temperatures.
Longer day trips.
After each charge.
Winter time
The vehicle battery only has some of its starting power at low temperatures. A
discharged vehicle battery may freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C.
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and, if necessary,
recharged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter.
195
Inspecting and replenishing
CAUTION
For technical reasons, on vehicles with the description “AGM”, the electrolyte
level cannot be checked.
Note
The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of
the inspection service.
Charging
Read and observe and on page 194 first.
A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine.
Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components.
Disconnect both battery cables (“negative” first, then “positive”) only when
“rapid charging” the battery.
Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals (red =
“positive”, black = “negative”).
Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch the
charger on.
Once charging is complete: Switch off the charger and remove the mains ca-
ble from the power socket.
Only then disconnect the charger's terminal clamps.
Reconnect the cables to the battery (first “positive”, then “negative”).
It is not necessary to disconnect the battery cables if you are recharging the
vehicle battery using low amperages (for example from a mini-charger). Refer
to the charger manufacturer's instructions.
A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low-
er) must be used until full charging is achieved.
Both cables must be disconnected before charging the battery with high
amperages, known as “rapid charging”.
The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging.
WARNING
“Quick-charging” the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special
charger and specialist knowledge.
CAUTION
On vehicles with the START/STOP system, the pole terminal of the charger
must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery,
but only to the engine earth » page 212, Jump-starting in vehicles with the
START STOP system.
Note
We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be rapid charged by a special-
ist garage.
Replacing
Read and observe and on page 194 first.
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and
size as the original battery. Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased
from a specialist garage.
We recommend having the battery replaced by a specialist garage, where the
new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be
disposed of in accordance with national regulations.
Disconnecting or reconnecting
Read and observe and on page 194 first.
The following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to oper-
ate faultlessly after the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnec-
ted.
Function Operating measure
Electrical power window (operational faults) » page 64
Panoramic sliding roof (operational faults) » page 218
Enter the radio/navigation system code
number
» User manual of the radio
or » user manual of the naviga-
tion system
Setting the clock » page 32
Data in the multifunction display are de-
leted.
» page 44
196
General Maintenance
Note
We recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist garage in order to
ensure full functionality of all electrical systems.
Automatic load deactivation
Read and observe and on page 194 first.
The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from dis-
charging when the battery is put under high levels of strain. This may be no-
ticed from the following.
The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to
the electrical system.
Where necessary, large convenience consumers such as seat heaters and
rear window heaters have their power limited or are shut off completely in
the event of an emergency.
CAUTION
Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management, the
vehicle battery may be drained. For example, when the ignition is switched on
a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned
on during longer parking.
Consumers that are supplied via a 12-V power socket can cause the vehicle
battery to discharge when the ignition is switched off.
Note
Driving comfort is not impaired by consumers being deactivated. The driver is
often not aware of it having taken place.
Wheels
Tyres and wheel rims
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Service life of tyres 198
Unidirectional tyres 199
Spare and temporary spare wheel 200
Full wheel trim 200
Wheel bolts 201
Only use tyres or wheel rims that have been approved by ŠKODA for your mod-
el of vehicle.
WARNING
The national legal regulations must be observed for the use of tyres.
WARNING
Instructions for the use of tyres
For the first 500 km, new tyres do not yet provide optimum grip, and ap-
propriate care should therefore be taken when driving – risk of accident!
For reasons of driving safety, do not replace tyres individually.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity of moun-
ted tyres.
Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for the mounted tyres.
An incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling.
Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged, immediately re-
duce your speed and stop! If no external damage is evident, drive slowly
and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle checked.
WARNING
Information regarding tyre damage or wear
Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age.
Never drive with damaged tyres – there is the risk of an accident occur-
ring.
197
Wheels
WARNING (Continued)
You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down.
Worn tyres impair necessary adhesion to the road surface, particularly at
high speeds on wet roads. This could lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled
vehicle movement – “swimming” on a wet road surface).
WARNING
Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility.
Too low or too high inflation pressure impairs handling.
If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre will have to overcome a higher
rolling resistance. This will cause a significant increase in the temperature
of the tyre, especially at higher speeds. This can result in tread separation
and a tyre blowout.
In the event of very fast tyre inflation pressure loss, such as a sudden tyre
failure, an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop
without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking.
CAUTION
If a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres, the following
must be observed » page 200, Spare and temporary spare wheel.
The tyres must be protected from contact with substances such as oil,
grease and fuel, which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with
these substances, then we recommend you have this checked out in a special-
ist workshop.
If, in the case of puncture occurring, the spare tyre with a non-bound direc-
tion or an opposite direction of rotation must be mounted, then drive carefully.
The best properties of the tyre are no longer present in this situation.
For the sake of the environment
Old and unserviceable tyres are classified in a special environmentally haz-
ardous category. These must be disposed of in accordance with national legis-
lation.
Tyres that are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.
Note
We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe-
cialist garage.
We recommend that you use wheel rims, tyres, full wheel trims and snow
chains from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Service life of tyres
Fig. 171 Principle sketch: Tyre tread with wear indicators/open fuel filler
flap with a table detailing the tyre sizes and tyre inflation pressures
Fig. 172
Replacing wheels
Read and observe and on page 197 first.
The service life of tyres depends on the inflation pressure, driving style and
other circumstances.
Tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare wheel, at least once a
month and also before setting off on a long journey.
The tyre pressures for tyres are shown on the inside of the fuel filler
flap » Fig. 171
.
The tyre pressure for the spare wheel should correspond to the highest pres-
sure specified for your vehicle.
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
higher pressure on warm tyres.
198
General Maintenance
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stor-
ed » page 166.
With greater additional load, adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly.
Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres.
Wheel balance
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. When driving, however, there are a
range of factors that may result in an imbalance. This may become apparent by
“vibration” in the steering. If this is the case, have the wheels checked by a
specialist garage.
Have the wheels likewise rebalanced after replacing the tyres.
Setting the vehicle geometry
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear on the
tyres and impairs driving safety. With a distinctive tyre wear, we recommend
that you check the setting of the vehicle geometry in a specialist workshop.
Tyre damage
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges, etc.) on a regular basis. Remove foreign bodies (e.g.
small stones) from the tyre tread immediately.
Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and at right angles wherever
possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.
Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres.
Exchanging the wheels
For uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the wheels ev-
ery 10 000 km according to schedule » Fig. 172. You will then obtain approxi-
mately the same life for all the tyres.
After a wheel has been replaced, the tyre pressure has to be adjusted.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stor-
ed » page 166.
Tyre storage
Identify disassembled tyres so that the previous direction of rotation can be
maintained if the tyres are reassembled.
Always store wheels or tyres in a cool, dry place that is as dark as possible.
Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright.
Wear indicators
The base of the tread of the tyres contains has a 1.6 mm high wear indica-
tor » Fig. 171 -
. In some countries, different tyre wear rates may apply.
Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”, triangular sym-
bols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.
Tyre age
Tyres age and lose their original characteristics, even if they are not being
used. The service life of the tyres is 6 years. Therefore, we recommend not us-
ing tyres that are older than 6 years.
Wheel bolts
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We rec-
ommend that you use wheel rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Acces-
sories.
Note
In some countries, the vehicles have a sticker with tyre inflation pressure val-
ues without pictograms.
Unidirectional tyres
Read and observe and on page 197 first.
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the
tyre.
The indicated direction of rotation must be adhered to in order to ensure the
optimal characteristics of these tyres.
These characteristics mainly relate to the following:
Increased driving stability.
Reduced risk of aquaplaning.
Reduced tyre noise and tyre wear.
199
Wheels
Spare and temporary spare wheel
Fig. 173
Fixing the spare or temporary
spare wheel
Read and observe and on page 197 first.
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is
fixed in place with a special bolt » Fig. 173.
Taking the wheel out
Open the boot lid.
Raise the floor covering in the boot » page 100.
Remove the box with the tool kit.
Unscrew the nut » Fig. 173 anti-clockwise.
Take out the wheel.
Stowing the wheel
Place the wheel into the spare wheel well with the wheel rim pointing down-
ward.
Screw on the nut » Fig. 173 clockwise until the wheel is safely secured.
Replace the box with the tool kit into the spare wheel and secure it with the
tape.
Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
Close the boot lid.
Fit a wheel in the appropriate dimensions and design as soon as possible.
If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to
the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres), it must only be used briefly
in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is
adopted » .
Temporary spare wheel
A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel.
Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel.
The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel.
Be particularly observant when driving.
The temporary spare wheel is inflated to the maximum inflation pressure for
the vehicle » Fig. 171 on page 198.
The tyre inflation pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa.
Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage,
since it is not intended for permanent use.
WARNING
Never drive with more than one temporary spare wheel mounted!
Only use the temporary spare wheel when absolutely necessary.
Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged.
If the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the
fitted tyres, never drive faster than 80 km/h (or 50 mph).
Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
The snow chains cannot be used on the temporary spare wheel.
Observe the instructions on the warning sticker on the temporary spare
wheel.
Full wheel trim
Read and observe
and on page 197 first.
Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel cover.
Pulling off
Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit » page 205 into the reinforced
edge of the wheel trim.
Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim.
Fitting
Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
correctly in place.
200
General Maintenance
CAUTION
Only use the manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – there is a
risk of damaging the trim.
When using the anti-theft wheel bolt, ensure that it is in the hole in the
valve area.
If wheel trims are fitted, an adequate flow of air must be assured in order to
cool the brake system.
Note
We recommend that you use wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheel bolts
Fig. 174
Remove the cap
Read and observe and on page 197 first.
Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the covering caps.
Pulling off
Push the extraction pliers » page 205 sufficiently far onto the cap until the
inner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap.
Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 174.
Fitting
Push the cap onto the wheel bolt up to the stop.
Manufacturer-approved tyre variants
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Explanation of the tyre labelling
201
Superb 202
Superb GreenLine 202
Superb N1 203
Approved tyre variants are first to be selected for the model variant (e.g. Su-
perb GreenLine), and then selected according to the engine size of your vehi-
cle.
If the model variant of your vehicle cannot be found in the discrete module,
then the approved tyre variants are to be selected according to the engine size
of your vehicle in module » page 202, Superb.
Only use radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and tread
pattern on one axle on all four wheels.
When mounting new tyres the tyres have to be replaced axle by axle.
The information listed in the table corresponds to the information available at
the time of going to press.
The approved tyre / rim combinations for your car are given on the sales and
technical vehicle documentation.
Explanation of the tyre labelling
Explanation of tyre markings
For example, 225/50R 17 91 Tmeans:
225 Tyre width in mm
50 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial
17 Diameter of wheel in inches
91 Load index
T Speed symbol
The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall (possibly on the inside).
For example, DOT ... 11 14... means, for example, that the tyre was manufac-
tured in the 11th week of 2014.
The marking M+Smeans that the associated tyre is suitable for winter use.
Load index
The load index indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
tyre.
201
Wheels
Load index
90 91 92 93 94 95
Load
(In kg)
600 615 630 650 670 690
Speed symbol
The maximum speed symbol indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed
with fitted tyres in each category.
Speed
icon
U H V W Y
Maximum
speed
(in km/h)
200 210 240 270 300
CAUTION
The information about load index and speed symbol can be found in the vehi-
cle sales and technical documentation.
Superb
Motorisation
Tyre
size
Minimal
Load index
Minimal
Speed
icon
1.4 l/92 kW TSI
205/55 R16 91 H
205/50 R17 93 H
225/45 R17 91 H
225/40 R18 92 Y
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR
205/55 R16 91 H
205/50 R17 93 H
225/45 R17 91 H
225/40 R18 92 Y
2.0 l/147 kW TSI
205/55 R16 91 V
a)
205/55 R16 91 W
205/50 R17 93 W
225/45 R17 91 W
225/40 R18 92 Y
Motorisation
Tyre
size
Minimal
Load index
Minimal
Speed
icon
1.8 l/112 kW TSI
205/55 R16 91 V
205/50 R17 93 V
225/45 R17 91 V
225/40 R18 92 Y
1.8 l/118 kW TSI
205/55 R16 91 V
205/50 R17 93 V
225/45 R17 91 V
225/40 R18 92 Y
3.6 l/191 kW FSI
205/50 R17 93 W
225/45 R17 91 W
225/40 R18 92 Y
2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR
205/55 R16 91 V
205/50 R17 93 V
225/45 R17 91 V
225/40 R18 92 Y
2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR
205/55 R16 91 V
205/50 R17 93 V
225/45 R17 91 V
225/40 R18 92 Y
a)
Applies only to vehicles with a rough road package.
Superb GreenLine
Motorisation
Tyre
size
Minimal
Load index
Minimal
Speed
icon
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR 205/55 R16 91 H
202
General Maintenance
Superb N1
Motorisation
Tyre
size
Minimal
Load index
Minimal
Speed
icon
3.6 l/191 kW FSI
205/50 R17 93 W
225/45 R17 94 W
225/40 R18 92 Y
Winter operation
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Winter tyres
203
Snow chains
203
Winter tyres
Summer tyres have less grip on ice, snow and at temperatures below 7 °C. This
is especially true of low-profile tyres or high-speed tyres.
Fitting winter tyres will significantly improve the handling of your vehicle when
driving in wintry road conditions.
To get best possible handling, winter tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.
The minimum tread depth must be 4 mm.
Winter tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol) of a lower speed
category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these
tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is
higher.
Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by ŠKODA for
your model of vehicle.
The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the Win-
ter tyres menu item » page 47.
For the sake of the environment
Re-fit the summer tyres at an appropriate time as they provide better handling
properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise, and reduced tyre wear
on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 °C.
The fuel consumption is also lower.
Snow chains
When driving in wintry road conditions, snow chains improve not only traction,
but also the braking performance.
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.
For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the follow-
ing wheel/tyre combinations.
Wheel size Depth D Tyre size
7J x 16
a)
45 mm 205/55 R16
6J x 16
a)
50 mm 205/55 R16
6J x 17 45 mm 205/50 R17
a)
Not valid for vehicles with 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.
Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains » page 200.
WARNING
Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains.
CAUTION
The chains are to be removed when driving on snow-free paths. They would
otherwise cause loss of performance and damage the tyres.
203
Wheels
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
Emergency equipment
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Placement of the first-aid kit and warning triangle
204
fire extinguisher 204
Vehicle tool kit 205
Placement of the first-aid kit and warning triangle
Fig. 175 Stowage compartment for the first-aid kit: Superb / Superb Com-
bi
Fig. 176
Placing of the warning triangle
First-aid box
The compartment for stowing the first-aid box is located in the right of the
boot » Fig. 175.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber
straps » Fig. 176.
WARNING
The first-aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that
they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle
collision which could cause injuries to occupants.
Note
Pay attention to the expiration date of the first-aid kit.
We recommend using a first-aid kit from ŠKODA Original Accessories, which
are available from a ŠKODA Partner.
fire extinguisher
Fig. 177
Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a bracket under the driver's
seat.
Removing/attaching
Loosen the two straps by pulling the buckles in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 177.
Remove the fire extinguisher.
For mounting, fit the fire extinguisher back into the holder and secure it with
straps.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extin-
guisher.
204
Do-it-yourself
The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year.
National legal requirements must be observed.
WARNING
The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not
come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision
which could cause injuries to occupants.
Note
The fire extinguisher must comply with national legal requirements.
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. Proper function-
ing of the fire extinguisher is not assured once it has passed its expiry date.
The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only.
Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 178 Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is housed in a box in the spare wheel or in the compart-
ment for the spare wheel underneath the floor covering in the luggage com-
partment. The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel.
Depending on the equipment, not all the components listed in the on-board
tool kit have to be contained in it.
Screwdriver
Spanner for removing and installing the tail light
Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
1
2
3
Towing eye
Clamps for removing the wheel trims
Depending upon vehicle equipment: Jack with sign / puncture repair kit
Wheel wrench
Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps
Replacement bulb set
WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle.
Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads.
CAUTION
Screw the jack back into the starting position before storing in the box with
the tool kit.
Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot.
Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.
Changing a wheel
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Preliminary work
206
Changing a wheel
206
Follow-up work
206
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
207
Raising the vehicle
207
Anti-theft wheel bolts
208
4
5
6
7
8
9
205
Emergency equipment and self-help
WARNING
If you are in flowing traffic, switch on the hazard warning light system
and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance! The national le-
gal requirements must be observed.
Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic. Park on
as flat and firm a surface as possible.
The following instructions must be followed if the vehicle is subsequently
fitted with tyres or rims that differ from the factory fitted ones » page 201,
Explanation of the tyre labelling.
WARNING
Information on the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. Never treat them
with grease or oil.
The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light al-
loy wheels is 120 Nm.
If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim
can come loose when the car is moving. A tightening torque which is too
high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent
deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim.
In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen
when the car is moving.
Note
The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel.
Preliminary work
Read and observe on page 206 first.
Before changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance) while
the wheel is being changed.
Switch off the engine.
Select the 1st gear or place the selector lever of the automatic transmission
in the P-position.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Uncouple a trailer.
Remove the vehicle tool kit » page 205and the spare wheel » page 200from
the boot.
Changing a wheel
Read and observe on page 206 first.
When changing a wheel, the following instructions must be followed.
Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts.
First of all slacken the anti-theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts.
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the
ground.
Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper,
etc.).
Remove the wheel carefully.
Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the opposite wheel bolts alternately (cross-wise) with the wheel
wrench. Tighten the anti-theft wheel bolt last.
Replace the wheel trim or the caps.
When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the indication is cor-
rect » page 197.
WARNING
If it is established when changing a wheel that the wheel bolts are corro-
ded and difficult to move, then these must be replaced.
Follow-up work
Read and observe on page 206 first.
After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special
bolt » page 200.
Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the strap.
Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque
wrench as soon as possible.
206
Do-it-yourself
After changing the wheel, the tyre pressure should be adjusted. In vehicles
with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stor-
ed » page 166.
Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair op-
tions.
WARNING
Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque
has been checked.
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 179
Changing a wheel: Loosening the
wheel bolts
Read and observe on page 206 first.
Before removing the wheel bolts, the caps for the wheel bolts must be pulled
off.
Releasing
Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as the stop
1)
.
Grip the wrench at its end and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 179.
Tightening
Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as the stop
1)
.
Grip the wrench at its end and turn the bolt against the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 179 until it is tight.
After tightening the wheel bolts, the covering caps must be replaced.
WARNING
Undo the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) provided that the vehi-
cle has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could become loose
and fall off.
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end
of the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and
make sure you keep your footing.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 180
Jacking points for positioning
lifting jack
Fig. 181 Attach lifting jack
Read and observe on page 206 first.
In order to raise the vehicle, the jack from the tool kit is to be used.
Position the car jack at the jacking point closest to the flat tyre .
1)
Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti-theft wheel bolts » page 208.
207
Emergency equipment and self-help
The mounting points are located on the metal bar of the lower sill on the un-
derside of your vehicle. The positions of these are embossed by means of
markings on the side surface of the lower sill » Fig. 181.
Support the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground
and ensure that the jack is located in a vertical position at the jacking
point » Fig. 181 -
.
Position the lifting jack below the jacking point with the crank and move it up
until its claw encloses the web » Fig. 181 -
.
Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the
ground.
WARNING
Notes for vehicle lifting
Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle.
If the wheel has to be changed on a slope, first of all block the opposite
wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpect-
edly rolling away.
Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent
possible moving. A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move
the lifting jack, causing the vehicle to fall down. It is therefore always nec-
essary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable
base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if the surface is smooth,
such as cobbled stones, tiled floor, etc.
Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur-
pose.
Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs under the vehicle,
while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack.
When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the web of the
lower fork leg, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle occurring.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Fig. 182
Principle sketch: Anti-theft
wheel bolt with adapter
Read and observe on page 206 first.
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. These can only be
loosened or tightened with the use of adapter
B
» Fig. 182.
Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts.
Insert adapter
B
» Fig. 182 with the toothed side all the way into the inner
teeth in the head of the anti-theft wheel bolts
A
.
Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter
B
up to the stop.
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt » page 207.
Remove the adapter.
Replace the wheel trim or the caps.
To be equipped for a possible wheel change, the adapter for the anti-theft
wheel bolts must always be kept in the vehicle. The adapter is stowed in the
tool kit.
Note
Note the code number which is embossed both on the adapter and also on
the end of each anti-theft wheel bolt. This number can be used to purchase a
replacement adapter from ŠKODA Original Parts if necessary.
The anti-theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a ŠKODA
Partner.
208
Do-it-yourself
Puncture set
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Components of the puncture repair kits
209
Preparations for using the breakdown kit 210
Sealing and inflating the tyre 210
Notes for driving with tyre repaired 211
Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies
or a puncture with diameters up to approx. 4 mm.
A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a perma-
nent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga-
rage.
The wheel need not be removed during the repair.
Do not remove foreign bodies, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances.
There is damage to the rim.
The outside temperature is less than -20 °C.
The tears or punctures are greater than 4 mm in size.
There is damage to the tyre wall.
Driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre.
If the use-by-date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
WARNING
If you are in flowing traffic, switch on the hazard warning light system
and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance! The national le-
gal requirements must be observed.
Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic. Park on
as flat and firm a surface as possible.
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a stand-
ard tyre.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
WARNING (Continued)
The sealant is hazardous to heath. Remove immediately if it comes into
contact with the skin.
Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit.
For the sake of the environment
Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in
accordance with environmental protection regulations.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Parts.
Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit, or
consult a specialist garage about repair options.
The national legal requirements must be observed when repairing a tyre.
Components of the puncture repair kits
Fig. 183 Principle sketch: Components of the breakdown kit
Read and observe on page 209 first.
Components of the set » Fig. 183
Valve remover
Sticker with “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph” speed designation
Inflation hose with plug
Air compressor
Tyre inflation hose
1
2
3
4
5
209
Emergency equipment and self-help
Tyre inflation pressure indicator
Air release valve
ON and OFF switch
12 volt cable connector
Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent
Replacement valve core
The valve remover
1
has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment. This contains a sealing means and an air compressor.
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
folder.
Preparations for using the breakdown kit
Read and observe on page 209 first.
The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the puncture
repair kit.
Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance) while
the wheel is being changed.
Switch off the engine.
Select the 1st gear or place the selector lever of the automatic transmission
in the P-position.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit
» page 209.
Uncouple a trailer.
Remove the breakdown kit from the boot.
Stick the appropriate sticker
2
» Fig. 183 on page 209 onto the dashboard in
the driver's field of view.
Unscrew the valve cap.
Use the valve remover
1
to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean
surface (rag, paper, etc.).
6
7
8
9
10
11
Sealing and inflating the tyre
Read and observe on page 209 first.
Sealing
Shake the tyre inflator bottle
10
» Fig. 183 on page 209 vigorously several
times.
Firmly screw the inflation hose
3
onto the tyre inflator bottle
10
in a clock-
wise direction. The film on the cap is pierced automatically.
Remove the plug from the inflation hose
3
and plug the open end fully onto
the tyre valve.
Hold the bottle
10
with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve.
Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover
1
.
Inflating
Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose
5
» Fig. 183 on page 209 firmly
onto the tyre valve.
Check that the air release valve
7
is closed.
Start the engine and run it in idle.
Plug the connector
9
into 12 Volt socket » page 91, Cigarette lighter.
Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch
8
.
Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is achieved.
Maximum run time of 8 minutes » .
Switch off the air compressor.
If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
hose
5
from the tyre valve.
Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent
to “distribute” in the tyre.
Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose
5
back onto the tyre valve and repeat
the inflation process.
If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either, this
means the tyre has sustained too much damage. You cannot seal with tyre
with the breakdown kit » .
Switch off the air compressor.
Remove the tyre inflation hose
5
from the tyre valve.
Once a tyre pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is reached, the journey may be continued
at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
210
Do-it-yourself
WARNING
If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bar, this means the damage
sustained was too serious. The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the
tyre.
Do not continue to drive! Seek help from a specialist garage.
The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be-
ing inflated – there is a risk of burning.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest – there is a
risk of overheating. Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before
switching it on again.
Notes for driving with tyre repaired
Read and observe on page 209 first.
The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10
minutes.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or less
Do not continue to drive! You cannot properly seal with tyre with the
breakdown kit.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or more
Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value.
Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
Jump-starting
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle 211
Jump-starting in vehicles with the START STOP system
212
Jump-starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot
212
The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump-start your vehicle if the en-
gine will not start because the battery is flat.
WARNING
Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to work in the engine
compartment » page 186.
A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be-
low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not jump-start with the battery of an-
other vehicle – there is a risk of explosion.
Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes, etc.)
away from the battery – risk of explosion!
Never jump-start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels – risk of
explosion and chemical burns.
The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.
Note
We recommend you buy jump-start cables from a car battery specialist.
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
Fig. 184
Jump-starting: A – flat battery, B
– battery providing current
Read and observe on page 211 first.
The starting process using the battery of another vehicle requires the use of
jumper cables.
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
Attach clamp
1
to the positive terminal of the discharged battery
A
» Fig. 184.
Attach clamp
2
to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power
B
.
Attach clamp
3
to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power
B
.
Attach clamp
4
to a solid metal component firmly connected to the engine
block or to the engine block itself.
Starting engine
Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
211
Emergency equipment and self-help
Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the engine does not start, halt the attempt to start the engine after 10 sec-
onds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process.
Remove the jumper cables exactly in the reverse sequence as for clamping.
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the bat-
tery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of
the discharged battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps. Obey the instructions of the jump-start cable manu-
facturer.
Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases is red.
Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases is black.
WARNING
Do not clamp the jump-start cable to the negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery
being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being star-
ted.
The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – there is a risk of short circuit.
The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle
– there is a risk of short circuit.
Route the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotat-
ing parts in the engine compartment.
There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise cur-
rent may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.
Jump-starting in vehicles with the START STOP system
Fig. 185
Engine earth: START STOP sys-
tem
Read and observe on page 211 first.
The jump-start cable must only be connected to the engine earthing point on
vehicles with the START STOP system » Fig. 185.
Jump-starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot
Fig. 186
Detail of the engine compart-
ment: Jump-starting point
Read and observe on page 211 first.
On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot, the positive terminal of the
battery supplying the power can only be connected to the jump-starting point
in the engine compartment of the vehicle being started by means of a jump-
start cable » Fig. 186.
Open the protective cap of the jump-starting point in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 186.
Connect the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power with the
jump-starting point.
Attach the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power to a solid
metal part firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself.
Start the engine.
212
Do-it-yourself
After starting the engine, close the protective cap of the jump-starting point.
Towing the vehicle
Introduction
Fig. 187 Braided tow rope / Spiral tow rope
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front towing eye 214
Rear towing eye 214
Vehicles with a tow hitch 214
For towing a braided tow rope is to be used » Fig. 187-
.
The following guidelines must be observed when towing.
Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
rope or with the front or rear wheels raised.
Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
rope or with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the auto-
matic gearbox is damaged!
Driver of the tow vehicle
Engage the clutch gently when starting off or depress the accelerator partic-
ularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Only then, approach correctly when the rope is taut.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
Driver of the towed vehicle
Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that
the turn signal lights, windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can
be used.
Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the
engine is running. If the engine is not running, significantly more physical force
is required to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle.
If using a tow rope, ensure that it is always kept taught.
Both drivers should be familiar with the problems which might possibly occur
while a vehicle is being towed. Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in
another vehicle or to be towed in.
The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it
is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing dis-
tance is greater than 50 km.
WARNING
When towing, respect the national legal provisions, especially those
which relate to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle be-
ing towed.
When towing, exercise increased caution.
For towing no spiral tow rope is to be used » Fig. 187-
, the towing eye
may unscrew out of the vehicle - there is a risk of accidents.
The tow rope should not be twisted - there is a risk of accidents.
CAUTION
Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-
start aid » page 211, Jump-starting.
If the gearbox no longer contains any oil, your vehicle must only be towed
with the front axle raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or
trailer.
To protect both vehicles when tow-starting or towing, the tow rope should
be elastic. Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a
similarly elastic material.
213
Emergency equipment and self-help
There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the
points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a
vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes » page 214, Front
towing eye or » page 214, Rear towing eye to the detachable ball head of the
towing equipment » page 166.
Note
We recommend using a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories, which is
available from a ŠKODA Partner.
Front towing eye
Fig. 188 Removing the cap / installing the towing eye
Read and observe and on page 213 first.
Remove the cap from the front bumper » Fig. 188 -
.
Screw-in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop » Fig. 188 -
and tighten as much as possible. For tightening purposes, we recommend,
for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a
similar object that can be pushed through the eye.
After unscrewing the towing eye, put the cap on and press into place.
The cap must engage firmly.
WARNING
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, oth-
erwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
Rear towing eye
Fig. 189 Removing the cap / installing the towing eye
Read and observe
and on page 213 first.
Press onto the bottom part of the cap in the rear bumper » Fig. 189 -
and
remove it.
Screw-in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop » Fig. 189 -
and tighten as much as possible. For tightening purposes, we recommend,
for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a
similar object that can be pushed through the eye.
After unscrewing the towing eye, put the cap on and press into place.
The cap must engage firmly.
On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device, there is no mount for the
screw-in towing eye behind the cap » page 214, Vehicles with a tow hitch.
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, other-
wise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
Vehicles with a tow hitch
Read and observe
and on page 213 first.
On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device, there is no mount for the
screw-in towing eye behind the cap.
Use the built-in detachable ball rod for towing » page 166, Hitch.
Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to
using the towing eye.
214
Do-it-yourself
If the towing device is removed completely, it must be replaced with the
standard reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the
towing eye.
If this procedure is not observed, the vehicle may not meet the national legal
provisions.
CAUTION
The detachable ball rod and/or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable
tow bar is used.
Note
The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for
towing, if necessary.
Radio remote control
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
215
Synchronising the remote control
215
Replace the battery in the remote control of the auxiliary heater (parking
heater)
216
CAUTION
The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original
battery.
We recommend having faulty batteries replaced by a ŠKODA service partner.
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions.
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
Fig. 190 Remove cover/take out battery
Read and observe
on page 215 first.
The battery change is carried out as follows.
Flip out the key.
Press off the battery cover
A
» Fig. 190 with your thumb or by using a
screwdriver release in the region of arrow
1
.
Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down in
the region of the arrow
2
.
Insert the new battery.
Insert the battery cover
A
and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
with the remote control key after replacing the battery » page 215.
Note
If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat-
tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
Synchronising the remote control
Read and observe
on page 215 first.
If the vehicle does not unlock when the remote control is pressed, the key may
not be synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the remote control
key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the
equipment or the battery in the remote control key has been replaced.
Synchronise the key as follows.
215
Emergency equipment and self-help
Press any button on the remote control key.
Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing
the button.
Replace the battery in the remote control of the auxiliary heater
(parking heater)
Fig. 191
Radio remote control: Battery
cover
Read and observe on page 215 first.
The battery is located under a cover on the back of the radio remote con-
trol » Fig. 191.
Insert a flat, blunt object, such as a coin, into the gap of the battery cover.
Turn the cover against the direction of the arrow up to the mark to open the
cover.
Replace the battery.
Return the battery cover.
Turn the cover in the direction of the arrow up to the initial marking, engage.
Emergency unlocking/locking
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
216
Locking the door without a locking cylinder 217
Unlocking the boot lid 217
Selector lever-emergency unlocking 217
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
Fig. 192
Handle on the driver's door: cov-
ered key cylinder
The driver's door can be unlocked or locked in an emergency.
Pull on the door handle and hold it pulled.
Insert the vehicle key into the slot on the underside of the cover in the re-
gion of the arrow » Fig. 192.
Fold the cover upwards.
Release the door handle.
Insert the remote control key into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the ve-
hicle.
For vehicles with LHD insert the remote control key with the buttons facing
up into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.
For vehicles with RHD insert the remote control key directed with buttons
down into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.
Pull on the door handle and install the cover to the original location.
CAUTION
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency lock-
ing/unlocking.
216
Do-it-yourself
Locking the door without a locking cylinder
Fig. 193
Left rear door: Emergency lock-
ing
An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors
which have no locking cylinder. It is only visible after opening the door.
Remove the cover
A
» Fig. 193.
Insert the key into the slot
B
and turn it into the horizontal position in the
direction of the arrow (mirror-inverted on the right doors).
Replace the cover.
Unlocking the boot lid
Fig. 194
Emergency unlocking: Superb / Superb Combi
The boot lid can be unlocked manually in an emergency.
Unlocking (Superb)
Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the
stop » Fig. 194 -
.
Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
Open the boot lid.
Unlocking (Superb Combi)
Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim as far as the
stop » Fig. 194 -
.
Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
Open the boot lid.
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Fig. 195 Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Grasp the cover
1
in the area of arrow
2
» Fig. 195 and carefully pull up-
wards.
Also unlock the cover on the other side.
Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow
3
.
At the same time, press the locking button in the selector lever and move
the selector lever to N.
The selector lever will be locked once more if it is moved again to P.
Emergency operation of the sliding/tilting roof
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation 218
Activation after unclamping and reclamping the battery
218
217
Emergency equipment and self-help
Operation
Fig. 196 Point for positioning screwdriver/opening for positioning the
key
The sliding/tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if a fault occurs. The
emergency operation of the sliding/tilting roof is located underneath the
glasses storage box
1
» page 93, Glasses storage box.
Open the glasses storage box.
Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the
positions shown by the arrows
1
» Fig. 196.
Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down
and turning the screwdriver.
Insert an Allen key, SW 4, up to the stop into the opening
2
and close or
open the sliding/tilting roof.
Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then
pushing the entire part upwards.
Have the fault on the sliding tilting roof rectified as soon as possible by a spe-
cialist garage.
Note
It is necessary after each emergency operation to move the sliding/tilting
roof into the basic position.
1)
This is why the rotary switch must be set to posi-
tion
A
» Fig. 46 on page 64 and pressed forwards for about 10 seconds.
After each emergency operation, it is necessary to activate the
roof
2)
» page 218.
Activation after unclamping and reclamping the battery
The panoramic sliding/tilting roof (referred to form now on as just the sliding/
tiling roof) and the sun screen must be activated after disconnecting and re-
connecting the battery.
To activate the sliding/tilting roof, press the notch on the control dial down-
wards and forwards for approx. 10 seconds.
To activate the sun screen, press and hold the switch
G
» Fig. 48 on
page 66for approx. 10 seconds.
If the sliding/tilting roof or sun screen is not fully closed or pushed shut when
disconnecting and reconnecting the battery, they must first be closed or push-
ed shut » page 66, Opening/closing the sun screen » page 66, Operation. Only
then is it possible to perform the activation.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
219
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
219
WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
1)
Applies to emergency operation of the Superb sliding/tilting roof.
2)
Applies to emergency operation of the Superb Combi sliding/tilting roof.
218
Do-it-yourself
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 197
Windscreen wiper blade
Read and observe on page 218 first.
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade, put the windscreen wiper arms
into the service position.
Service position for changing wiper blades
Close the bonnet.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
Within 10 seconds, press the lever in position
4
and hold it in position for
around 2 seconds » Fig. 63 on page 78.
Move the windscreen wiper arms into the service position.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.
Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism
1
» Fig. 197.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fitting the wiper blade
Push the wiper blade in until it latches on the stop.
Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached.
Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Turn on the ignition and press the lever into position
4
» Fig. 63 on page 78.
Move the windscreen wiper arms into the home position.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Fig. 198
Rear window wiper blade
Read and observe on page 218 first.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.
Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism
1
» Fig. 198.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fitting the wiper blade
Push the wiper blade in until it latches on the stop.
Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached.
Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen.
219
Emergency equipment and self-help
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fuses in the dash panel 220
Fuses in the engine compartment 222
Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment 222
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses.
Switch off the ignition and the corresponding power consuming device before
replacing a fuse.
Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operat-
ing » page 220, Fuses in the dash panel or » page 222, Assignment of fuses in
the engine compartment.
Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers, which
switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been
eliminated.
Fuse colour Maximum amperage
light brown 5
dark brown 7.5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
white 25
green 30
orange 40
red 50
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 186.
CAUTION
“Never repair” fuses or replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage –
there is a risk of fire. This may also cause damage at another part of the elec-
trical system.
A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip. Replace the faulty
fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
If a newly inserted fuse burns through again, then a specialist should be con-
sulted immediately.
Note
We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle. A box of
replacement fuses can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
There can be multiple power consuming devices for one fuse.
A single consumer may use several fuses.
Fuses in the dash panel
Fig. 199
Cover of the fuse box in the control panel / fuses
Read and observe
and on page 220 first.
The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover.
Replacing fuses
Remove the cover.» Fig. 199
Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover in the dash
panel.
Place the clamp on the respective fuse and pull this fuse out.
Insert a new fuse.
Replace the clamp in the original position.
Reinsert the cover of the fuse box .
220
Do-it-yourself
Fuse assignment in the dash panel
No. Consumer
1
Diagnostic socket, engine control unit, fuel pump relay, fuel pump
control unit
2
ABS control unit, ESC switch for tyre pressure warning, brake sen-
sor, for START STOP coil of the starter relay only
3 Switch and airbag control unit
4
WIV, tail lights, dimming mirrors, pressure sensor, telephone prein-
stallation
5
Control unit for headlight beam adjustment and headlight swivel,
control unit for parking aid, control unit for park assist
6
Instrument cluster, control unit for electromechanical power steer-
ing, selector lever lock, power supply for data bus
7 Heated opening of the crankcase ventilation, air flow meter
8 Control unit for trailer detection
9 Relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation
10 Adaptive left main headlight
11 Adaptive right main headlight
12 Not assigned
13 Diagnostic socket, light switch, rain sensor, clock
14 Central locking system and bonnet lid
15 Central control unit - interior lights
16 The air conditioning system
17 Not assigned
18 Telephone
19
Instrument cluster, operating lever under the steering wheel, relay
coil for heated windscreen
20 KESSY
21 KESSY ELV
22 Air blower for Climatronic
23 Front power window, central locking of the front doors
24 Selector lever lock
25 Rear window heater, relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation
26 Power socket in the boot
No. Consumer
27 Fuel pump relay, control unit for fuel pump, injection valves
28 Electric boot lid
29 Haldex
30 Climate controlled front seats
31 DVD preinstallation
32 Front power window, central locking system of the rear doors
33 Electric sliding/tilting roof
34 Alarm, spare horn
35 front and rear lighter
36 Headlight cleaning system
37 Heated front seats
38 Heated rear seats
39 Rear window wiper
40
Fan air conditioning system, relay for auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion
41 Not assigned
42 Light switch
43 Control unit for trailer detection
44 Control unit for trailer detection
45 Control unit for trailer detection
46 Switch for seat heating
47 Telephone preinstallation
48 Preparation for the aftermarket radio
49
Only for START STOP: Central control unit, DC-DC converter, the en-
gine control unit
221
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 200
Cover for the fuse box in the en-
gine compartment
Read and observe and on page 220 first.
On some vehicles, the battery cover must be removed before removing the
cover for the fuse box » page 195.
Replacing fuses
Move the safety catch of the cover of the fuse box
A
» Fig. 200in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
The symbol is displayed behind the catches.
.
Remove the cover.
Replace the appropriate fuse.
Place the cover on top of the fuse box.
Turn the securing bracket
A
in opposite direction of the arrow.
The symbol is displayed behind the catches
.
The cover is locked into position.
CAUTION
The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied
correctly. Water may get into the fuse box if the cover is not replaced properly
- there is a risk of damage to the vehicle!
Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 201 Fuses: Type A / Type B
Read and observe
and on page 220 first.
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment - version A
No. Consumer
1 Front right main headlight, right tail light
2 Valves for ABS
3-4 Not assigned
5 Horn
6-12 Not assigned
13 Control unit for automatic gearbox
14 Not assigned
15 Coolant pump
16 Not assigned
17 Instrument cluster, windscreen wiper lever, and turn signal lever
18 Audio amplifier (sound system)
19 Radio
20 - 22 Not assigned
23 Engine control unit
24 Data bus control unit
25 - 26 Not assigned
27 Fuel dosage valve
28 Engine control unit
222
Do-it-yourself
No. Consumer
29 Main relay
30 Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit
31 Windscreen wipers
32 - 37 Not assigned
38 Radiator fan, valves
39 Clutch/brake pad sensor
40 Lambda probe
41 AKF valve
42 Lambda probe
43 Ignition
44 - 46 Not assigned
47 Front left main headlight, left tail light
48 Pump for ABS
49 Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on)
50 - 51 Not assigned
52 Power supply relay - terminal X
a)
53 Power to the internal fuse carrier
54 Not assigned
a)
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of
this terminal are automatically switched off.
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment - version B
No. Consumer
1 Not assigned
2 Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG
3 Measuring circuit
4 Valves for ABS
5 Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG
6 Not assigned
7 Power supply relay - terminal X
a)
8 Radio
9 Not assigned
10 Engine control unit, Main relay
No. Consumer
11 Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit
12 Data bus control unit
13 Engine control unit
14 Ignition
15
Lambda probe (petrol engine), glow plug system relay and fuel
pump (diesel engine)
16 Front right main headlight, right tail light
17 Horn
18 Audio amplifier (sound system)
19 Windscreen wipers
20 Valve for metering fuel, coolant pump, high-pressure pump
21 Lambda probe
22 Clutch pedal switch
23 Coil of the coolant pump relay valves, high-pressure pump
24 Radiator fan
25 Pump for ABS
26 Front left main headlight, left tail light
27 Control unit for glow plug system
28 Windscreen heater
29 Power to the internal fuse carrier
30 Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on)
a)
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of
this terminal are automatically switched off.
Replacing bulbs
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Headlights
224
Replacing the low beam bulb 224
Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 225
Replacing bulb for main beam 225
Replacing the bulb for the fog light 225
223
Fuses and light bulbs
Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light 226
Rear light (Superb Combi) 226
Replacing bulbs in rear light (Superb Combi) 227
Some manual skills are required to change a bulb. For this reason, we recom-
mend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help
in the event of any uncertainties.
Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in
the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 186.
Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficul-
ty by other road users.
Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the
bulb - risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
Gas discharge bulbs (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, professio-
nal knowledge is required – risk of death!
Switch off the respective vehicle light when changing the bulb.
CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
Note
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is pos-
sible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage.
We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the ve-
hicle. Replacement bulbs can be purchased from ŠKODAOriginal Accessories.
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
after replacing a bulb in the main beam, low beam or fog lights.
In case of failure of a xenon gas discharge lamp or an LED diode, visit a spe-
cialist garage.
Headlights
Fig. 202 Bulb arrangement: Headlight with halogen bulb/with Xenon
bulb
Read and observe
and on page 224 first.
Headlight with halogen bulb
Low beam
Main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light
Headlights with Xenon light
Xenon gas discharge bulbs
Main beam
Replacing the low beam bulb
Fig. 203
Halogen headlight: Changing the
bulb for the low beam
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Remove the protective cap
1
» Fig. 202 on page 224.
1
2
3
4
224
Do-it-yourself
Turn the plug with the bulb
A
» Fig. 203as far as the stop in the direction of
the arrow.
Change the bulb.
Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in an anti-clockwise direc-
tion as far as the stop.
Fit the protective cover
1
.
Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights
Fig. 204
Halogen headlight: Replacing
the bulb for main beam and sep-
arate daytime running lights
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Remove the protective cap
2
» Fig. 202 on page 224.
Turn the bulb holder
A
» Fig. 204in the direction of the arrow as far as the
stop.
Replace the bulb, insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in the
opposite direction to that of the arrow as far as it goes.
Fit the protective cover
2
.
Replacing bulb for main beam
Fig. 205 Headlights with Xenon light: Changing the bulb for the main
beam
Read and observe
and on page 224 first.
Unlock the protective cap in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 205 and remove.
Turn the plug with bulb
C
anti-clockwise to the stop and remove it.
Change the bulb.
Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in an anti-clockwise direc-
tion as far as the stop.
Insert the protective cap in holder
2
and carefully push in.
The protective cover must engage firmly.
Replacing the bulb for the fog light
Fig. 206 Front bumper: Remove the protective grille/fog light
225
Fuses and light bulbs
Fig. 207
Replacing the light bulb
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Removing the protective grille
Undo the protective grille in the area of the arrow » Fig. 206 -
using the
clamp for removing the wheel trims » page 205, Vehicle tool kit.
Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow
1
.
Changing light bulbs for fog lights
Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the fog lamp » Fig. 206 -
.
Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the connector.
Turn bulb holder
A
» Fig. 207 in an anti-clockwise direction up to the stop
and remove.
Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb into the headlight and turn in a
clockwise direction as far as the stop.
Attach the connector.
Replace the fog lamp by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow
2
» Fig. 206 -
and screw tight.
Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in.
The protective grille must engage firmly.
Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light
Fig. 208 Remove the number plate light/replace the bulb
Read and observe
and on page 224 first.
Open the boot lid.
Push in the lamp in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 208.
The lamp comes loose.
Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow
2
and remove it.
Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Insert a new bulb into the holder.
Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
.
Push on the light until the spring clicks into place.
Check that the light is securely inserted.
Rear light (Superb Combi)
Fig. 209 Removing: Cover/light
226
Do-it-yourself
Fig. 210
Seal expand / lighting connector
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Removing
Open the boot lid.
Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims » page 205, Vehicle tool kit
into the hole at the position indicated by the arrow » Fig. 209 -
.
Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 209 -
.
Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the lamp » Fig. 209 -
.
Grasp the rear light and carefully remove away from the direction of travel.
Remove the rubber seal in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 210 -
.
Pull off the cable bundle with the plug cap » Fig. 210 -
.
Press together the interlocks on the connector in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 210 -
.
Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction
of the arrow
3
.
Fitting
Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely.
Install the rubber seal in the body in the opposite direction to arrow
1
in-
stall » Fig. 210 -
.
Insert the tail lamp with the holes
1
» Fig. 211 on page 227 into the bolts on
the body » Fig. 210 -
.
Carefully press the tail light into the bolts on the bodywork.
Ensure that the wiring harness does not become pinched between the body
and the lamp.
Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover.
Ensure that the cover engages firmly.
CAUTION
Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when re-
moving and installing the tail lamp.
Replacing bulbs in rear light (Superb Combi)
Fig. 211
Replacing the light bulb
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Turn the bulb holder
2
» Fig. 211 in an anti-clockwise direction and remove it
from the lamp housing.
Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to
the stop and remove.
Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
Replace the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in a clock-
wise direction to the stop.
227
Fuses and light bulbs
Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle data
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle identification data
228
Operating weight and payload 229
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to ECE
Regulations and EU Directives 229
Dimensions
230
Vehicle-specific information depending on engine type 231
Multi-purpose vehicles (AF) 235
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reduc-
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
Vehicle identification data
Fig. 212 Vehicle data sticker/type plate
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker » Fig. 212 - is located on the base of the luggage
compartment and is also fixed into the service schedule.
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle type
Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine
code
Partial vehicle description
Type plate
The type plate » Fig. 212 -
is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the
right driver's side.
The type plate contains the following data.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Maximum permissible gross weight
1)
Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped on
the right-hand suspension strut dome in the engine compartment. This num-
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left-hand edge below the windscreen
(together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate.
Engine number
The engine number (three-digit code letter and serial number) is stamped onto
the engine block.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
registration documents.
WARNING
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of acci-
dent and damage!
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1)
For vehicles with a factory fitted towing device and sports suspension, the value is reduced by 25 kg.
228
Technical data
Operating weight and payload
Operating weight
This value represents the minimum operating weight without additional
weight-increasing equipment such as air conditioning system, spare wheel, or
trailer hitch.
The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only.
The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver (75 kg), the weight
of the operating fluids, the tool kit, and a fuel tank filled to 90 % capacity.
Operating weight of the vehicle » page 231, Vehicle-specific information de-
pending on engine type.
Payload
It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ-
ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following weights.
The weight of the passengers.
The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer (max. 80 kg).
Note
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
garage.
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to
ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions are given on the ŠKODA
websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation.
The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en-
gine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.
The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.
Note
The fuel consumption and emission levels given on the ŠKODA websites or in
the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established in
accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by legal or techni-
cal rules for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehi-
cles.
Depending on the extent of the equipment, the driving style, traffic condi-
tions, weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values can in
practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ from
the fuel consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the commer-
cial and technical vehicle documentation.
229
Technical data
Dimensions
Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)
Superb Superb GreenLine Superb Combi Superb Combi GreenLine
Length 4833 4833 4833 4833
Width 1817 1817 1817 1817
Width including exterior mirror 2009 2009 2009 2009
Height 1462/1482
a)
/ 1447
b)
1464/1449
b)
1511/1529
a)
/ 1497
b)
1511/1496
b)
Clearance 139/159
a)
/124
b)
/141
c)
140/125
b)
141/159
a)
/127
b)
/140
c)
141/126
b)
Wheel base 2761 2761 2761 2761
Track gauge front/rear
1545/1518
(1537/1510)
c)
1545/1518
1545/1517
(1537/1510)
c)
1545/1517
a)
Applies to vehicles with a rough road package.
b)
Applies to vehicles with a sport chassis.
c)
Applies to vehicles with a 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.
230
Technical data
Vehicle-specific information depending on engine type
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
1.4 l/92 kW TSI Motor
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
92/5000 200/1500 - 4000 4/1390
Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb Combi MG6
Top speed (km/h) 204 203
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 10.5 10.6
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
configuration
1467 - 1615 1489 - 1647
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1400
a)
/ 1500
b)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 730 740
a)
Slopes up to 12 %
b)
Slopes up to 8 %
1.8 l/112 kW TSI Motor
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
112/4300 - 6200 250/1500 - 4200 4/1798
Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG7
Su-
perb MG6 4x4
Superb Combi
MG6
Superb Combi
DSG7
Superb Combi
MG6 4x4
Top speed (km/h) 219 218 215 217 216 213
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 8.8 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.8 8.9
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
configuration
1496 - 1654 1508 - 1666 1587 - 1745 1518 - 1676 1530 - 1688 1609 - 1767
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1500
a)
/ 1700
b)
1600
a)
/ 1800
b)
1500
a)
/ 1700
b)
1600
a)
/ 1800
b)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
a)
Slopes up to 12 %
b)
Slopes up to 8 %
231
Technical data
1.8 l/118 kW TSI Motor
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
118/4500 - 6200 250/1500 - 4500 4/1798
Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb MG6 4x4
Superb Combi
MG6
Superb Combi
DSG7
Superb Combi
MG6 4x4
Top speed (km/h) 222 222 219 221 221 218
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 8.2 8.4 8.4 8.3 8.5 8.5
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
configuration
1496 - 1654 1508 - 1666 1587 - 1745 1518 - 1676 1530 - 1688 1609 - 1767
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1500
a)
/ 1700
b)
1600
a)
/ 1800
b)
1500
a)
/ 1700
b)
1600
a)
/ 1800
b)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
a)
Slopes up to 12 %
b)
Slopes up to 8 %
2.0 l/147 kW TSI Motor
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
147/5100 - 6000 280/1700 - 5000 4/1984
Performance and Weights Superb DSG6 Superb Combi DSG6
Top speed (km/h) 240 238
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 7.7 7.8
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
configuration
1540 - 1698 1562 - 1720
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1600
a)
/ 1800
b)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
a)
Slopes up to 12 %
b)
Slopes up to 8 %
232
Technical data
3.6 ltr/191 kW FSI engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
191/6000 350/2500 - 5000 6/3597
Performance and Weights Superb DSG6 4 x 4 Superb Combi DSG6 4 x 4
Top speed (km/h) 250 250
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 6.4 6.5
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
configuration
1704 - 1860 1726 - 1882
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 2000
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
77/4400 250/1500 - 2500 4/1598
Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb Combi MG6 Superb Combi DSG7
Top speed (km/h) 194/197
a)
193 192/195
a)
192
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 12.1/12.2
a)
12.2 12.2/12.3
a)
12.3
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
configuration
1512 - 1670
(1519 - 1615)
a)
1519 - 1677
1534 - 1692
(1541 - 1699)
a)
1541 - 1699
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1500
b)
/ 1700
c)
1200
b)
/ 1400
c)
1500
b)
/ 1700
c)
1200
b)
/ 1400
c)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
a)
GreenLine
b)
Slopes up to 12 %
c)
Slopes up to 8 %
233
Technical data
2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
103/4200 320/1750 - 2500 4/1968
Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG6 Superb MG6 4x4
Superb Combi
MG6
Superb Combi
DSG6
Superb Combi
MG6 4x4
Top speed (km/h) 212 212 210 211 210 208
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 10.0 10.1 10.3 10.1 10.2 10.4
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
configuration
1532 - 1690 1554 - 1712 1609 - 1767 1554 - 1712 1576 - 1734 1631 - 1789
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1800 2000 1800 2000
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
125/4200 350/1750 - 2500 4/1968
Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG6
Superb DSG6 4
x 4
Superb Combi
MG6
Superb Combi
DSG6
Superb Combi
DSG6 4 x 4
Top speed (km/h) 228 222 219 226 221 218
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 8.6 8.6 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.8
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
configuration
1540 - 1698 1557 - 1715 1634 - 1792 1562 - 1720 1579 - 1735 1656 - 1814
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1800 2000 1800 2000
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
234
Technical data
Multi-purpose vehicles (AF)
Engine Maximum permissible gross weight (kg)
1.4 l/92 kW TSI
MG6
2032
1.8 l/118 kW TSI
MG6 DSG7 MG6 4 x 4
2061 2073 2152
2.0 l/147 kW TSI
DSG6
2105
3.6 l/191 kW FSI
DSG6 4 x 4
2267
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR
MG6 DSG7
2077/2084
a)
2084
2.0 l/103 kW TDI
CR
MG6 DSG6 MG6 4 x 4
2097 2119 2174
2.0 l/125 kW TDI
CR
MG6 DSG6 DSG6 4 x 4
2105 2122 2199
a)
GreenLine
235
Technical data
Index
A
Abroad
Driving abroad 153
Unleaded petrol 153
ABS
Operation 155
Warning light 38
Accessories 173
Adaptive headlights (AHL) 70
Adjust
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion)
119
Head restraints 83
Adjusting
Belt height 15
Exterior mirrors 80
Interior mirror 79
Manual air conditioning 114
Seats 81, 82
Steering wheel 10
Adjusting the seats 9, 81
Adjustment
Range of light 68
Aerial 177
See windows 179
AHL 70
Warning light 38
Airbag 16
Deactivating 21
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 21
Deployment 16
Front airbag 17
Head airbag 20
Indicator light 40
Knee airbag 18
Modifications and damage to the airbag system 175
Side airbag 19
Airbag system 16
Air conditioning system 110
Air outlets 110
Climatronic 115
Manual air conditioning system 112
Air outlets 110
Air recirculation
Climatronic 117
Alarm
Switching off 55
Triggering 55
Anti-theft alarm system
Activating/deactivating 56
Trailer 172
Anti-theft wheel bolts 208
Antilock brake system (ABS) 155
Armrest
Front 87
rear 96
Rear 87
Ashtray 91
ASR
Operation 155
warning light 37
Assist systems 154
ABS 38, 155
ASR 37, 155
Cruise Control System 161
DSR 155
EDL 155
ESC 37, 154
HBA 155
HHC 156
Park assist 157
Parking aid 156
START STOP 162
Audio
see radio / navigation system 4
Auto Check Control 33
Automatic driving lamp control 70
Automatic gearbox
Selector lever-emergency unlocking 217
Starting off and driving 147
Tiptronic 146
Using the selector lever 145
Automatic gearbox modes 145
Automatic load deactivation 197
Automatic retractable cargo cover (Superb
Combi)) 101
Automatic transmission 145
Kickdown 147
Malfunction 148
Selector lever lock 146
AUX
Installation in the storage compartment 92
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion) 118
Adjust 119
Radio remote control 120
Switching on/off 119
Avoiding damage to the vehicle
Driving through water 152
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 152
B
Ball head
Check fitting 168
Fitting
168
Ready position 167
Removing 169
Battery
In the remote control key 215
Replace the remote control of the auxiliary
heater (parking heater) 216
Belts 12
Belt tensioners 15
Bonnet
Closing 187
Opening 187
Warning light 36
236
Index
Boot
Automatic retraction (Superb Combi) 101
Extending variable loading floor 105
Folding hook 99
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi) 102
Removable Light (Superb Combi) 103
Roll up boot cover (Superb Combi) 101
Side compartment with battery 102
Boot cover (Superb Combi) 101
Boot lid 57
automatic locking 58
Warning light 36
(Superb Combi) 58
Brake booster 144
Brake fluid 192
Checking 193
Information messages 35
specification 193
Brake linings
warning light 41
Brakes
Brake assist systems 154
Brake booster 144
Brake fluid 193
Handbrake 144
Information messages 35
Running in 149
Warning light 35
Braking
Information on braking 143
Break recommendation
See Fatigue detection 165
Button in the driver's door
Electrical power windows 61
C
Car care 173
Jack 180
Car computer
See multifunction display 44
Car park ticket holder 89
Carrier
Roof rack 108
Cavity protection 180
CD changer 136
Central locking 50
Central locking button 55
Changing
brake fluid 193
bulbs 223
Wheels 205
Changing a wheel
Follow-up work 206
Preliminary work 206
Remove and attaching a wheel 206
Changing brake
fluid 193
Charging a vehicle battery 196
Check
Fit ball head properly 168
Checking
Battery electrolyte level 195
Brake fluid 193
Coolant 192
Engine oil 190
Oil level 190
Windscreen washer fluid 188
Checks
Statutory checks 173
Children and safety 22
Child safety
Side airbag 24
Child safety lock 55
Child seat
Classification 25
ISOFIX 25
on the front passenger seat 23
TOP TETHER 27
Use of child seats 25
Use of ISOFIX child seats 26
Chrome parts
refer to Taking care of your vehicle 178
Cigarette lighter 91
Cleaning
Alcantara 182
Covers of electrically heated seats 182
Fabrics 182
Headlight lenses 179
Natural leather 181
Plastic parts 178
Synthetic leather 182
Wheels 180
Cleaning the vehicle
Towing device 180
Cleaning vehicle 176
Climatronic 115
Air recirculation 117
automatic mode 116
Control elements 115
Controlling blower 118
Cooling system 116
Defrosting windscreen 118
Setting the temperature 116
Clothes hook 94
Cockpit
12-Volt power outlet 92
Ashtray 91
Cigarette lighter 91
General view 29
Lighting 73
Practical features 88
Storage compartments 88
Comfort control
window 63
COMING HOME 72
Compartments 88
Components of the puncture repair kits 209
Computer
See multifunction display 44
237
Index
Convenience operation
sliding / tilting roof 65
sliding / tilting roof (Superb Estate) 67
Convenience turn signal 70
Coolant 191
Checking 192
Messages 36
Replenishing 192
Temperature gauge 31
Warning light 36
CORNER
See Fog lights with CORNER function 71
Correct seated position 9
Driver 9
Front passenger 10
Instructions 11
Rear seats 11
Counter for distance driven 32
Cruise control system
Activating/deactivating 161
Changing the stored speed 162
Storing and maintaining speed 162
Switching off temporarily 162
Warning light 41
Cruise Control System 161
Cup holders 90
D
DAY LIGHT
see Daylight running lights
69
Daylight running lights 69
De-icing the windscreen and rear window 75
Deactivating an airbag 21
Decorative films 179
Delayed locking of the boot lid
see boot lid 58
Diesel
refer to Fuel 185
diesel -
particulate filter 39
Diesel fuel
Operation in winter 185
Diesel particulate filter
warning light 39
Digital Clock
Time 32
Dipstick 190
Display 31
Compass points 48
Coolant temperature 31
Fuel supply 32
Gear changes 43
Service intervals 48
Display a low temperature 43
Display of the second speed 33
Distance driven 32
Door
Child safety lock 55
Closing 52
Emergency locking 217
Emergency locking the driver's door 216
Opening 52
Warning light for open door 36
Door open
Warning light 36
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) 155
Driving
Abroad 153
Driving through water on streets 152
Emissions 229
Fuel consumption 229
Driving economically
Economical gear changing 149
Driving through water 152
DSR 155
DVD-preinstallation 136
E
Economical and environmentally friendly driv-
ing 149
Economical driving
Ballast 151
Driving at full throttle 150
Idling 150
Looking ahead
149
Regular maintenance 151
Saving energy 151
Short distances 150
Tyre pressure 150
EDL
Operation 155
Electrical power windows 63
Button in the driver's door 61, 62
Button in the rear doors 63
Operational faults 64
Electric boot lid
Force limit 59
Manual operation 59
Electric luggage compartment lid
Acoustic signals 61
Adjusting the top lid position 61
Deleting the top lid position 61
Malfunctions 61
Operating 59
Electric sliding/tilting roof
64
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 155
Electronic immobilizer 139
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 154
Emergency
Activation of the sliding/tilting roof 218
Changing a wheel 205
Hazard warning light system 72
jump-starting 211
Jump-starting 211
Locking the door without a locking cylinder 217
Locking the driver's door 216
238
Index
Selector lever-unlocking 217
Sliding/tilting roof 218
Start engine - KESSY 142
Switching off the ignition –KESSY 143
Towing the vehicle 213
Towing the vehicle using the tow hitch 214
tyre repair 209
Unlocking the boot lid 217
Unlocking the driver's door 216
Emergency equipment
Fire extinguisher 204
First-aid kit 204
Jack 205
Vehicle tool kit 205
Warning triangle 204
Emissions 229
Engine
Running in 148
Engine compartment 186
Brake fluid 193
Coolant 191
Overview 188
Vehicle battery 193
Engine number 228
Engine oil 189
Capacity 189
Checking 190
Note messages 36
Replenishing 191
Specifications 189
Engine oil level
Warning light 37
Engine oil pressure
Warning light 36
Entry lighting 75
Environment 149
Environmental compatibility 151
Environmentally friendly driving 149
EPC
Warning light 39
ESC
Function 154
Warning light 37
Exhaust inspection system
Warning light 38
Extendable variable loading floor
Fixing set 106
Extending variable loading floor 105
Divide boot 105
Movable lashing eyes 107
Partial extension 105
F
Fastening elements 99
Fatigue detection 165
Function 165
Information messages 165
Films 179
Fire extinguisher 204
First-aid kit 204
Floor covering
Fixing 100
Fog lights 71
Warning light 41
Fog lights with CORNER function 71
Folding hook 99
Fold in passenger's mirror 80
Footmats
145
see Footmats 145
Force limit
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi) 59
Power windows 63
Sliding/tilting roof 64
Sliding/tilting roof (Superb Combi) 66
Front airbag 17
Front door warning light 74
Front interior light 73
Fuel 183
Diesel 185
Fuel gauge 32
refer to Fuel 183
Refuelling 184
Unleaded petrol 184
Fuel consumption 149, 229
Fuel reserve
Warning light 39
Fuses
Assignment 220
Colour coding 220
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 222
Replacing 220
G
Gearbox
Warning messages 33
Gear change
Gear recommendation 43
Information on the selected gear 43
Gear changing
Gear stick 144
General view
Cockpit 29
Generator
Indicator light 35
Genuine parts
174
Glasses storage box 93
Glow plug system
Warning light 38
GSM 124, 126
H
Handbrake
144
Warning light 35
Hands-free system
Voice control 131
Hazard warning light system 72
239
Index
HBA 155
Head airbag 20
Headlight cleaning system
Headlight cleaning system 79
Headlights
Driving abroad 153
Headlight cleaning system 79
Replacing a bulb 224
Head restraint 83
Head restraints 83
Heater
Windscreen and rear window 75
Heating
Exterior mirrors 80
Seats 85
HHC 156
Hill Hold Control (HHC) 156
Hitch 166
Accessories 169
Drawback load 166
Horn 29
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) 155
I
Ignition 139
Immobilizer 139
Individual settings
Locking
54
Unlocking 54
Inertia reels 15
Information messages
see KESSY 53
Information system 42
Compass point display 48
Display a low temperature 43
Door warning 44
Gear recommendation 43
MAXI DOT display 46
Multifunction display 44
Operation 42
Service interval display 48
instrument cluster
Auto Check Control 33
Instrument cluster 30
Counter for distance driven 32
Display 31
Display of the second speed 33
Fuel gauge 32
Overview 30
Revolution counter 31
see instrument cluster 30
Speedometer 31
Temperature gauge 31
Warning lights 34
Interior monitor 56
Internet connection 129
ISOFIX 25
J
Jack 205
Maintenance 180
Jacking points
Raise vehicle 207
Jump-starting 211
K
KESSY
Information messages
53
Lock / unlock the steering 141
Locking 53
Starting the engine 142
Switching off the engine 142
Switch off ignition 141
Switch on ignition 141
Unlocking 53
Key
Starting the engine 139
Stopping the engine 140
Knee airbag 18
L
Lamp failure
Warning light
38
Lamps
Warning light 38
LEAVING HOME 72
Lever
Main beam
69
Turn signal 69
Windscreen wipers 78
Light
Cockpit 73
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 72
Fog lights with CORNER function 71
Headlight range control 68
Instrument illumination 68
Low beam 68
Parking light 68
switching on and off 68
Travel mode 71
Light bulbs
Rear light (Superb Combi) 226
Lighting
Luggage compartment 97
Lights 67
Adaptive headlights (AFS) 70
Automatic driving lamp control 70
Daylight running
69
Fog lights 71
Hazard warning light system 72
Headlight flasher 69
Main beam 69
Parking lights 73
Rear fog light 71
Replacing bulbs 223
Tourist lights 71
Turn signal 69
Warning lights 34
Lock
Vehicle key 51
240
Index
Locking
Individual settings 54
KESSY 53
Remote control 52
Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the in-
side 55
Locking the door without a locking cylinder
Emergency 217
Long cargo channel 96
Low beam 68
Warning light 41
Low tyre pressure warning
refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 165
Luggage compartment 97
Class N1 vehicles 98
Cover 100
Emergency unlocking 217
Fastening elements 99
Fix floor covering 100
Fixing nets 99
Lighting 97
Luggage net 100
see boot lid 57
Side pockets 101
Unlocking the boot lid 217
Variable loading floor 104
Luggage compartment cover 100
Luggage compartment lid 57
Luggage net 100
M
Main beam 69
Warning light 41
Maintenance 151
Decorative films 179
Manual air conditioning
adjusting 114
Recirculated air mode 114
Manual gear changing
see gear changing 144
Manually setting air conditioning
Control elements 112
MAXI DOT
See MAXI DOT display 46
MAXI DOT display 46
Main menu 47
Operation 42
Settings 47
maximum allowable
weights 228
MDI
Installation in the storage compartment 92
Media
see radio / navigation system 4
MFD
See multifunction display 44
Mirror
Exterior mirrors 80
Mirrors
Interior mirror 79
Vanity 76
Mobile phone 121, 124, 126
Connecting to the hands-free system 124, 127
Modifications 173
Modifications and technical alterations
Airbags 175
Service 174
Spoiler 175
Multifunction display
Functions 44
Information 45
Memory 44
Operation 42
Multimedia 134
AUX 135
MDI 135
N
N1 98
nameplate 228
Navigation system 4
Net partition 107
Behind the front seats 108
Behind the rear seats 107
Removing and refitting the housing 108
Nets 99
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi) 102
Notes for driving with tyre repaired 211
O
Oil
Note messages 36
See Engine oil 190
Oil pressure
Note messages 36
On-board computer
See multifunction display 44
Operating
the sun screen 66
Operating weight 229
Operation in winter
Diesel fuel 185
Vehicle battery 195
Original accessories 174
Outside temperature 45
Overview
Engine compartment
188
Warning lights 34
P
Paintwork
See Paintwork care
178
Paintwork care 178
Park assist 157
Departing from a parallel parking space 160
Finding a parking space 158
Information messages 160
Parking 159
241
Index
Park Assist
automatic emergency braking 160
Operation 158
Parking
Park assist 157
Parking aid 156
Parking aid 156
Function 157
Parking light 68
Part replacement 173
Passive safety
Before setting off 8
Driving safety 8
Safety equipment 8
Passive Safety 8
Payload 229
Pedals 145
Footmats 145
Petrol
refer to Fuel 184
Polishing the paintwork
See Taking care of your vehicle 178
Power outlet
12 V 92
Power Steering / steering lock (KESSY system)
warning light 36
Power windows
Button in the front passenger door 63
Practical features 88
12 Volt power outlet 92
Ashtray 91
Car park ticket holder 89
Cigarette lighter 91
Clothes hook 94
Cup holders 90
Glasses storage box 93
Removable ski bag 97
Seat backrest with long cargo channel 96
Storage compartment for umbrella 95
Storage compartment in rear centre console 95
Storage compartment in the front centre con-
sole 90
Storage compartment on passenger side 94
Storage compartment on the driver's side 89
Storage compartments in the doors 90
Storage compartment under passenger seat 94
Storage compartment under the front armrest 92
Storage net in front centre console 93
Storage pockets on the front seats 95
Puncture set 209
R
Radiator fan 188
Radio 4
Radio reception
See windows 179
Radio remote control
Auxiliary heating 120
Raise vehicle 207
Rear-view mirror
Exterior mirrors 80
Fold in passenger mirror 80
Synchronous adjustment of the rear-view mir-
ror 80
Rear fog light 71
Warning light 38
Rear interior light 74
Rear mirror
79
Interior mirror 79
Rear seats
Seat folded forward Combi 88
Rear window - heater 75
Recirculated air mode
Manual air conditioning 114
Refuelling 184
Fuel 184
Remote control
Locking 52
Replacing the battery 215
Synchronisation process 215
Unlocking 52
Remote control key
Replacing the battery 215
Removable lights (Superb Combi)
Changing rechargeable light batteries 103
Removable Light (Superb Combi)
Remove light 103
Removable ski bag 97
Removable variable loading floor
Fit and remove 106
Repairs and technical alterations 173
Replacing
Bulb for main beam 225
Bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 225
Bulb for the fog light 225
Bulb for the licence plate light 226
Bulb in rear light (Superb Combi) 227
Fuses 220
Fuses in the dash panel 220
Fuses in the engine compartment 222
Low beam bulb 224
Vehicle battery 196
Wiper blades 219
Replenishing
Coolant 192
Engine oil 191
Windscreen washer fluid 188
Revolution counter 31
Roof luggage rack
Attachment points 109
Roof rack 108
Roof rack system
Roof load 109
Running in
Brake pads 149
Engine 148
The first 1,500 km 148
Tyres 149
242
Index
S
SAFE
see Safe securing 54
SAFELOCK
see Safe securing 54
Safe securing 54
Safety
8
Child safety 22
Child safety seats 22
Correct seated position 9
Head restraints 83
ISOFIX 25
TOP TETHER 27
Saving electrical energy 149
Screens
see Sun screen in the rear doors 76
Seals
Taking care of your vehicle 178
Seat belt
warning light 35
Seat belts 12
Belt tensioners 15
Cleaning 183
fastening and unfastening 14
Height adjustment 15
Inertia reels 15
The physical principle of a frontal collision 13
Seat features
85
Seats
Convenience features of passenger seat 87
Electric adjustment 82
Front armrest 87
Head restraints 83
Heating 85
Manually adjusting 82
Rear armrest 87
save 84
Seat backrests 87
Storing in memory of remote control key 84
Ventilated front seats 86
Seats and practical features 81
Adjusting the seats 81
see Automatic gearbox
Manual gear shifting on the multifunction
steering wheel 146
Selector lever
Refer to Selector lever 145
Selector lever lock / starter (system KESSY)
Warning light 41
Service 174
Service interval display 48
Setting 32
Setting the 32
Shelves 88
Shifting gears
Driving and saving energy 149
Side airbag 19
Side compartment in boot with battery 102
Side compartments in the luggage compart-
ment 101
ski bag 97
Sliding/tilting roof
Close (Superb Combi) 66
Closing 64
Closing the sun screen (Superb Combi) 66
Electric sliding/tilting roof 64
Emergency operation 218
Opening/closing the sun screen (Superb Combi) 66
Opening and tilting 64
Opening and tilting (Superb Combi) 66
Operation 64
Operation (Superb Combi) 66
Snow chains 203
Spare wheel 200
Speedometer 31
See speedometer 31
Speed symbol
Refer to Wheels 202
Spoiler 175
Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY 140
Starting and stopping the engine using the key 138
Starting engine
Jump-starting 211
Starting the engine
Jump-starting 211
Key 139
see KESSY 142
START STOP 162
Information messages 164
Jump-starting 212
Manually deactivating/activating the system 164
Operating conditions for the system 163
operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox 163
operation in vehicles with manual gearbox 163
system related automatic start-up 164
Steering lock / unlock
see KESSY 141
Steering wheel 10
Stopping the engine
Key 140
Storage compartment in rear centre console 95
Storage compartment on passenger side 94
Storage compartments 88
Storage compartment under passenger seat 94
Storage pockets on the front seats 95
Storing skis 96
Sun screen 76
Sun screen in the rear doors 76
Sun visors 76
Switch
see Ignition 139
Switching off the engine
see KESSY 142
Switch light on and off 68
243
Index
Switch off ignition
Refer to KESSY 141
Switch on ignition
Refer to KESSY 141
Synchronous adjustment of the rear-view mir-
ror 80
Synthetic leather 182
T
Tailgate
TwinDoor 58
Taking care of the vehicle
Natural leather 181
Seat belts 183
Taking care of your vehicle
Automatic car wash system 177
Cavity protection 180
Chrome parts 178
Cleaning the wheels 180
Decorative films 179
Door lock cylinders 179
Headlight lenses 179
High-pressure cleaner 177
Plastic parts 178
Polishing the paintwork 178
Rubber seals 178
Taking care of the interior 181
Taking care of your vehicle exterior
177
Washing by hand 176
Wash system 177
Wax treatment 178
Taking care of your vehicles
Fabric covers 182
Technical data 228
Telephone 124, 126
Temporary spare wheel 200
Tilting roof
see Electric sliding/tilting roof 64
Tiptronic 146
Tools 205
TOP TETHER 27
Towing 213
Towing a trailer 171
Towing device
Description 167
Operation and maintenance 180
Towing eye
Front 214
Rear 214
Towing protection 56
Traction Control System (ASR) 155
Trailer 170
13-pin socket 170
connection and disconnection 170
Loading 171
Safety eye 170
Towing a trailer 171
Trailer operation 166
Trailer stabilisation 172
Transport
Luggage compartment 97
Roof rack 108
Transporting children safely 22
Triangle 204
TSA 172
Turn signal 69
Turn signal system
Warning light 41
Twindoor
see boot lid 57
Two-way radio systems 121
Tyre
Explanation of the labelling 201
see wheels 201
Tyre inflation pressure
Warning light 40
Tyre load bearing capacity
Refer to Wheels 201
Tyre pressure monitoring 165
Save tyre pressure values 166
Tyre repair
Preparations 210
Pressure test 211
Sealing and inflating the tyre 210
Tyres 197
Inflation pressure 198
Sizes 198
Tyre wear indicator 198
Tyre size 201
see wheels 201
U
Umbrella
Tray 95
Underbody protection 180
Unleaded petrol 153
Unlock
Vehicle key 51
Unlocking
Individual settings 54
KESSY 53
Remote control 52
Unlocking and locking 50
Using the information system 42
Using the selector lever 145
V
Variable loading floor
104
Dividing the luggage compartment 104
Remove 104
slides off on aluminium rails 105
Vehicle battery
Automatic load deactivation 197
Charging 196
Checking the battery electrolyte level 195
Cover 195
Disconnecting and reconnecting 196
244
Index
Operation in winter 195
Replacing 196
Safety instructions 193
Vehicle care
Alcantara 182
Fabrics 182
Synthetic leather 182
washing 176
Vehicle Condition
see Auto Check Control 33
Vehicle data sticker 228
Vehicle dimensions 230
Vehicle height 230
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 228
Vehicle key
lock 51
unlock 51
Vehicle length 230
Vehicle tool kit 205
Vehicle width 230
Visibility 75
Visors
see Sun screen 76
see Sun visors 76
W
Warning at excessive speeds 46
Warning lights
34
warning messages
Diesel particulate filter 39
Warning symbols
see Warning lights 34
Warning triangle 204
Washing
Automatic car wash system 177
by hand 176
Chrome parts 178
High-pressure cleaner 177
Washing vehicles 176
Water
Driving through 152
Wax treatment
See Taking care of your vehicle 178
Weather conditions 173
Wheel bolts
Anti-theft wheel bolts 208
Caps 201
Loosening and tightening 207
Wheel rims 197
Wheels
Changing 205
Full trim 200
General information 197
Load index 201
Replacing wheels 198
Service life of tyres 198
Snow chains 203
Spare wheel 200
Speed symbol 202
Storing wheels 198
Temporary spare wheel 200
Tyre pressure 198
Tyre size 201
Tyre sizes 198
Tyre wear indicator 198
Unidirectional tyres 199
Winter tyres 203
Wi-Fi 130
Windows 179
De-icing 179
See Electrical power windows 61
Windscreen
De-icing 179
Heater 75
Windscreen washer fluid
Checking 188
Replenishing 188
Warning light 40
Winter 188
Windscreen washers
Windscreen washers 78
Windscreen washer system 188
Windscreen wiper
Replacing the rear window wiper blade 219
Windscreen wipers
Operating 78
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 219
Windscreen washer fluid 188
Windscreen wipers and washers 77
Winter
De-icing windows 179
Winter operation 203
Snow chains 203
Winter tyres 203
Winter tyres
See Wheels 203
WLAN 130
MAXI DOT 131
Network connection 130
Switching off 130
Switching on 130
245
Index
246
Index
Reprinting, reproduction, translation, or any other use, either in whole or in
part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2014
www.skoda-auto.com
You also can do something for the environment!
The fuel consumption of your ŠKODA and the related pollutant
emissions are determined crucially on how you drive.
The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how
you deal with your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual shows you how to use your ŠKODA vehi-
cle with utmost care for the environment while driving eco-
nomically at the same time.
Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner's Manual
that are marked below.
Work with us – for the sake of the environment.
Návod k obsluze
Superb anglicky 11.2014
S74.5610.19.20
3T0012720AH

3T0012720AH
246


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Skoda Superb - 2015 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Skoda Superb - 2015 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 17,13 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Skoda Superb - 2015

Skoda Superb - 2015 User Manual - Dutch - 292 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info